JP5923768B2 - Amusement stand - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning cylinder game machine (slot machine), or an enclosed game machine.

In game machines represented by pachinko machines, slot machines, etc., it is common to form a passage for game media used for games (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
In addition, game machines represented by pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are generally provided with production means such as a movable body for the purpose of improving the production effect (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in the passage of game media.
Moreover, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in a movable body.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game stand having a feature in a passage of game media.
Another object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in a movable body.

The above purpose is
A game machine having movable means including a plurality of movable bodies,
One of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body,
One of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body,
The second movable body is a movable body different from the first movable body,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a first operation,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a second operation,
The first operation and the second operation are a series of operations of the first movable body,
The first operation is an operation including an operation in which the first movable body operates in a first posture,
The second operation is an operation including an operation in which the first movable body changes from the first posture to the second posture,
The first movable body is a movable body that is visible from a player when the first body is in the first posture,
The first movable body is a movable body that is visible from a player when the second posture is set,
The second movable body is received from a player in at least one of a case where the first movable body is in the first posture and a case where the first movable body is in the second posture. It is a movable body that can be seen,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of executing a third operation.
This is achieved by a game stand characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the passage of game media.
In addition, according to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the movable body.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, and the special symbol of special figure 2, (b) is a decoration symbol (C) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (b) is the 1st. 1 shows a flow of 1 sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) shows a flow of first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) shows a flow of image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is the 2nd. 2 shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is an exploded perspective view of game board 200 of pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is the external view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is the external view which removed the accessory unit 820 from the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and was seen from the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball path unit 700 used with the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side (back side). It is the perspective view which looked at the ball path unit 700 used with the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side (back side). It is the rear view which looked at the ball path unit 700 used with the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side (back side). It is the external view which looked at the accessory unit 820 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a disassembled perspective view of the accessory unit 820 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the logo accessory 900 of the pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is the external view which looked at the logo accessory 900 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is the external view which looked at the logo accessory 900 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is a disassembled perspective view of the upper front decoration object 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. 1 is an exploded perspective view of an upper front decoration accessory 1000 and an upper rear decoration accessory 1100 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the upper front movable body 1002 of the upper front decoration accessory 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is the external view which looked at the upper front decoration accessory 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is the external view which looked at the upper front decoration accessory 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side. 1 is an exploded perspective view of an upper rear decoration accessory 1100 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of an upper rear movable body 1102 of an upper rear decoration accessory 1100 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is the external view which looked at the upper back decoration accessory 1100 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a part of an upper right side accessory 1200 and a lower right side accessory 1400 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the other part of the lower right side accessory 1400 of the pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is the external view which looked at the upper right side accessory 1200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side, and the external view which looked at the upper right side accessory 1200 from the back side. It is the external view which looked at the upper right side movable body 1201 of the upper right side accessory 1200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is the external view which looked at the lower right side accessory 1400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the right side. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the lower right side accessory 1400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the lower right side accessory 1400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from back. It is a figure which shows the modification of the guidance part 1452 of the lower right side accessory 1400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the center lower part 1600 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is the external view which looked at the center lower part 1600 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the right side. It is FIG. (1) which shows the production example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (2) which shows the production example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (The 3) which shows the production example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example 2 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example 3 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example 4 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine 2000 as a game stand by the modification of one embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure showing an information display button 2046 of the slot machine 2000 as a game machine according to a modification of the embodiment of the present invention.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine, a spinning game machine such as a slot machine, or an enclosed game machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden or metal frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales office. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function by the lock unit 105 and is configured in a frame shape. Thus, the door member has an opening 116 inside thereof. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 is provided, the lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the player's operation are discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box), and a player's operation to the launcher 110. The ball launching handle 134 that launches the guided game ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and the chance button 1 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation. 6, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that can perform various settings and the like by operation of a setting person (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), and a card unit ( A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to the (CR unit), a return operation button 142 for instructing return of the player's balance to the card unit, and the player's balance and card unit status are displayed. A ball rental display unit (not shown). In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, and confirm A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is displayed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout controller 600 (see FIG. 4). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process, and the first control process related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls are configured, and the error is canceled by the operation of the game store clerk. A payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of a game ball are configured. A launch board case 176 for housing the launch board 174, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 for turning the power on and off by the operation of a game shop clerk and being operated when the power is turned on. Accordingly, a power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that sends and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit. And are arranged.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164 and the like are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power board 182 and the like are provided. Since it is used in common by a plurality of models, the outer frame 102 is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center. The stage device 206 includes a logo accessory 900, an upper front ornament accessory 1000, an upper rear ornament accessory 1100 (not shown in FIG. 3), an upper right side accessory 1200, an upper left side accessory 1300, and a lower right side accessory. 1400, a lower left side accessory 1500, a central lower accessory 1600 (hereinafter, these actors may be collectively referred to as “various actors”) to produce effects, and details will be described later. To do.

  The game board 200 in this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, the ease of entering a normal symbol starting port 228, a first special symbol starting port 230, a second special symbol starting port 232, a variable winning port 234, etc., which will be described later, is a game ball that falls on the right path. And the game ball falling on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol start port 228, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 234, the normal symbol start port 228, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 234 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, for the first special symbol starting port 230, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball falling on the left path due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of game nails (not shown), the presence of the warp device 242, and the like. Yes, it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the game area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the general figure variable game is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances such as a general prize opening 226, a general figure start opening 228, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, and a variable prize opening around the rendering device 206. 234 and the second out port 241 are disposed. Details of the second out port 241 will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize balls”) and balls lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “rental balls”). May be included).

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged on the route. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. While the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a sphere. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed on the right flow path of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special symbol display device stops and displays the big hit symbol when the special symbol variable game is won. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members (not shown) and game nails (not shown) called windmills are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and the inner rail 204 is arranged. At the bottom of the ball, there is an out port 240 for guiding a ball that has not entered the winning port, starting port or second out port 241 to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the amusement island side. Provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, The outer rod 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by a hitting direction changing member, a game nail, or the like, and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (special FIG. 1 starting port 230, special figure 2 starting port 232) or winning a second out port 241 or winning out any winning port or starting port, the second out port The player reaches the out port 240 without entering the ball 241 or simply passing through the normal start port 228.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the stage device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and various actors are arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. Has been established. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 is positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and various accessories. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230. Various types of accessories will be described later.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 performs the game ball launch control, and the power supply control unit 660 controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). And various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of various movable bodies 550 (various movable bodies 550, which will be described later) included in various kinds of accessories, a chance button sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and a setting An operation unit sensor (not shown) that detects pressing of each button of the operation unit 137, a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from these sensors to the basic circuit 402, and a signal stored from the CPU 404 in the ROM 406. The displayed image data is read out, a display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436, and the decoration diagram It is connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 for displaying an image on the display device 208, a.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a driving circuit 516 for controlling the driving of the various movable bodies 550, a gaming board lamp driving circuit 530 for controlling the gaming board lamp 532, and a gaming platform frame lamp 542. A gaming table frame lamp driving circuit 540 for controlling the above, a gaming board lamp driving circuit 530 and a gaming table frame lamp driving circuit 540, a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication; Is connected. In the present embodiment, the second sub control unit 500 is configured to control the operations of the various movable bodies 550, but the first sub control unit 400 is configured to control the operations of the various movable bodies 550. Alternatively, a movable body control unit may be provided separately from the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, and the movable body control unit may control the operations of the various movable bodies 550. In the present embodiment, various movable body sensors 430 are connected to a sensor circuit 428 provided in the first sub-control unit 400 so that the first sub-control unit 400 performs position detection of the various movable bodies 550. However, the various movable body sensors 430 are connected to a predetermined sensor circuit provided in the second sub-control unit 500 so that the second sub-control unit 500 detects the positions of the various movable bodies 550. The various movable body sensors 430 are connected to a predetermined sensor circuit provided in the movable body control section, and the movable body control section performs position detection of the various movable bodies 550. It may be.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, when the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is performed by bidirectional communication, the various sensors 320 detect the front frame door opening sensor that detects the opening of the front frame door 106. The detection result 107 may be transmitted to the payout control unit 600 without being transmitted to the sensor circuit 322, and the payout control unit 600 may output the received detection result to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5A to 5C, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 and special figure 2. FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5 (a) shows 10 types of special figures “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a special figure variation game after the jackpot game ends, and the difference in probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and “Special Figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special chart after the jackpot game ends. It is a symbol that becomes a low probability normal state high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that have a relatively high degree of advantage over the player.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. "Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends. “Special figure F” is a 2R jackpot symbol that is suddenly called “normal”, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state after the big hit game is over.

  “Special figure G” is a first small hit symbol, and after the small hit game is completed, the game state before the small hit game is executed is maintained. “Special figure H” is a second small hit symbol, and after the small hit game is completed, the game state before the small hit game is executed is maintained. Further, the “special chart I” is a first off-line symbol, which is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player. The “special drawing J” is a second off-set symbol, which is a symbol having a relatively small advantage for the player.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 9” and “Decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  When notifying 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and 15R big jackpot of “Special Figure B”, a combination of symbols in which the same three decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “Decoration 1− “Decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, etc.) When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7”). -Decoration 7 "etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  Also, 2R big hit called “special drawing E” latent probability variation (hidden probability variation), “special drawing F” suddenly called 2R big hit, or “special drawing G” or “special drawing H” small When notifying the winning, “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. When notifying 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” and 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction of“ special drawing D ”,“ decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5 ”is stopped and displayed. . On the other hand, in the case of notifying the special symbol I and the special symbol J, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 5B are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG.5 (c), the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which light-extinguishes, and the black-colored part has shown the location of the segment which lights up.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main process of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when an RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is operated by a store clerk or the like is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), the data is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, three initial values for generating initial values of three random number counters for generating the normal winning random value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value, respectively. Update the generation random number counter. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a special figure 1 random value counter and its initial value generation random number counter, a special figure 2 random value counter and its initial value generation random number counter, and a normal winning random number counter and its initial value. A generation random number counter is provided. In step S115, the initial values of three initial value generating random number counters are updated. For example, if the initial value generation random number counter can take a numerical value range of 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the initial value generation random number counter, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original initial value generation random number counter is obtained. To remember. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original initial value generation random number counter. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. In addition, interrupt permission is set after the basic random number initial value updating process is completed. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms). At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 2 starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. It is determined that there was. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S205, if the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is configured to be performed by bidirectional communication, the front frame door opening sensor 107 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106. The presence / absence of a door opening detection signal output from the payout control unit 600 that has received the detection result from is monitored and stored in a door detection signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Three random number counters for generating 1 random number value and special figure 2 random value respectively are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the normal winning random number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the normal winning random number counter for generating the normal winning random value provided in the RAM 308, and the acquired value is set to 1. Is stored in the original normal winning random number counter. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original winning random number counter. In addition, when it is determined that the common winning random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the general winning random number counter is acquired. And set it in the regular winning random number counter.

  For example, the previous value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308 is obtained from a value obtained from a common winning random number counter that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value. When the value is equal to the set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the ordinary winning random number counter, and is set in the ordinary winning random value counter. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the normal winning random number counter has made one round next. In addition to the initial value storage area described above, an initial value storage area for determining that the special figure 1 random value counter and the special figure 2 random value counter have made one round each is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used. The same initial value generation random number counter and initial value storage area may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the value of the random number counter for determining the special figure 1 variable time for determining the graphic fluctuation time in the special figure 1 variable game or its initial value is updated, and the symbol fluctuation in the special figure 2 variable game is updated. The value of the random number counter for determining special time 2 for determining the time or the initial value thereof is updated. Further, the value of the random number counter for determining the normal figure change time for determining the symbol change time in the normal figure change game or its initial value is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228 and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. 1 random number value is acquired, and the special figure 1 variation time determination random value value is acquired from the special figure 1 variation time determination random value counter provided in the RAM 308 and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number value, special figure 1 random value, and special figure 1 variable time random number value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1 start information") The same number as the number of the special figure 1 hold stored in the one hold number storage area is stored. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, every time the number of special figure 1 holds decreases, the special figure 1 starting information data with the highest holding order (first) is erased, and the remaining special figure 1 start is started. Processing is performed so that the hold order of information data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 holding number increases by one, new special figure 1 starting information data is written in the holding order next to the special figure 1 starting information data having the lowest holding order (last).

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, the special figure 2 variation time determination random number value provided in the RAM 308 is acquired and stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of special figure 2 winning random value, special figure 2 random value and special figure 2 variation time determining random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 start information") is a special figure. 2 The same number as the number of special figure 2 reservations stored in the storage number storage area is stored. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, every time the special figure 2 holding number decreases, the special figure 2 starting information data with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remaining special figure 2 starting information data is deleted. Processing is performed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 2 holding number increases by one, new special figure 2 starting information data is written in the holding order next to the special figure 2 starting information data having the lowest holding order.

  If a win is received at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Are stored in the corresponding ordinary random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 234.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbols (common symbol A shown in FIG. 5 (c)) and the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out of place, the usual figure flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is not in operation), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold If the number is 1 or more, whether or not to win the result of the floating figure game based on the random number lottery based on the random number value stored in the above-mentioned common random number value storage area Make a hit judgment to determine. In the case of winning, the flag for the normal figure provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the above-mentioned random number value counter for determining the normal variation time is acquired as a random value for determining the normal variation time, and based on the acquired random number value for determining the normal variation time. One of the plurality of variable times is selected as a time for displaying the general map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is set as a general map variable display time in the RAM 308. To remember. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 following step S223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. In the special figure prefetching process, when the number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure holding number storage area increases, the start information related to the increased holding is prefetched, and the special symbols related lottery symbols for special figure variable games are drawn. Pre-determination is performed before the success / failure determination in the process.

  For example, in the special figure prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not the current control state is in the electric support (a state in which any one of the ordinary figure change, the ordinary figure change, or the electric chew extension is set, details will be described later). If it is determined that the power support is in progress, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, and if it is determined that there is a winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, the special figure 2 starting information is displayed. The special figure 2 winning random value, the special figure 2 random value, and the special figure 2 variation time determining random value are prefetched. Next, prior to the success / failure determination in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), using the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pre-read special figure 2 winning random number value and the success / failure determination table (not shown), Pre-determination is made as to whether or not this hit / fail judgment is a big hit. Next, using the pre-read special figure 2 random value and the special figure 2 symbol determination table (not shown), a symbol to be stopped and displayed after the special figure 2 variable game (stop symbol) is determined in advance. Next, the variation time of the special figure 2 variable game is preliminarily determined using the pre-determined stop symbol, the special figure 2 variable time determination random value, and the special figure 2 variable display time determination table (not shown). Next, a pre-determination result (presence / absence determination result, stop symbol, variation time) obtained by the pre-determination is stored in a special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit (not shown) provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The main control unit 300 stores the pre-determined special figure 2 variable game success / failure determination result, stop symbol, and variation time as the special figure 2 prefetch result in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. It has become. In the present embodiment, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit can store, for example, up to four special figure 2 prefetch results.

  The RAM 308 also has a special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 2 prefetch number. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 2 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 2 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last). In the present embodiment, the prefetch process is performed for the increment of the hold, but the special figure prefetch process may be performed for all the hold each time.

  In the special figure prefetching process, for example, if the main control unit 300 determines that it is not in the electric support state, the special figure prefetching process is executed for the special figure 1 start information similar to the special figure 2 start information. The special figure prefetching process is executed by referring to the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the validity determination, but a special determination table may be used for the prefetching process. It should be noted that the special figure prefetching process may be executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217).

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. Flags such as a probability variation flag are prepared. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on. When the probability fluctuation flag is on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 5A is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. If the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, The special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the special figure E, 2R large flag is on when the general figure probability fluctuation flag is on. , Special figure probability fluctuation flag is off Special figure F when the normal probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, special figure H when the first small hit flag is on, special figure H, the first off flag The 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I is turned on when it is on, and the special figure J is turned on when the second off flag is on. In the setting area of the RAM 308, a setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs fixed display of any one of the special figures A to J.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag. Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for holding the member 234a in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the opening / closing control of the door member 234a is repeated a predetermined number of times (in the present embodiment, both in the case of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 are 15 rounds or 2 rounds), and the special figure 2 state update that starts at the end timing is repeated. The processing is provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for informing the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. The information indicating the production standby period is set in the storage area of the production standby time management timer. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. If the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. It is executed by using the first special figure 2 start information in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. It is executed by using the first special figure 1 start information in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is one or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game (for example, special figure 2 variable game) with a high advantage is played with priority over a special figure variable game (for example, special figure 1 variable game) with a low advantage. For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 acquires the special figure 2 starting information from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Whether or not to make a big hit using the determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc. And whether to make a small hit or not. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure 2 symbol determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM 306 to determine a symbol (stopped symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 and stores it in the ROM 306. The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game is determined using the special figure 2 variable display time determination table (not shown).

  After fetching the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the reserved figure number 2 in the reserved number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game and special figure 1 variable game, and the start opening prize is started in the order in which the special figure variable games related to the holding of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are held at the start opening. It may be a forward variation. In the starting order winning order fluctuation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2. In some cases, the substantial upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and the lottery results may be displayed separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special drawings may be displayed in one area. In addition, when fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Information that can specify the type of command, etc.), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a special symbol design change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, various small hit flags, various outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. It includes information indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure variation game selected in the lottery process, and in the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, various big hit flags, various small hit flags, various outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation This includes the value of the flag, etc., including the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the case of the winning effect start command and the end effect start command, and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the case of the jackpot round number designation command. In addition, information indicating the number of big hit rounds is included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. Contains information indicating. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information indicating the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit, etc. Included.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, command data includes values such as various big hit flags, various small hit flags, various outlier flags, and special figure probability variation flags stored in the RAM 308, special figure related lottery processes. And the information which shows the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game selected by the special figure 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game which are held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, various small hit flags, various lost flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc. that are held is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  Next, processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S301 in FIG. 8A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309 after step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311 following step S309, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136. Further, in the chance button control process, when the pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137. I do.

  In step S313 following step S311, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315 following step S313, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S317 following step S315, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S303.

  FIG. 8B is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 8C is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 subsequent to step S501, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other processing random number update processing Etc.

  FIG. 8D is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S313) of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Sets an instruction to start data transfer The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603 following step S601, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601. , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607 following step S605, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609 following step S607, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703 subsequent to step S701, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. . In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S707 following step S705, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709 subsequent to step S707, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S711 following step S709, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713 subsequent to step S711, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the various movable bodies 550, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S703.

  FIG. 9B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 9C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S901 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 subsequent to step S901, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. In addition, in description using FIG. 10 thru | or FIG. 12, and FIG. 13 thru | or FIG. 44 mentioned later, a vertical direction (it may be called an up-down direction) or a horizontal direction is the state in which the pachinko machine 100 was installed in island equipment, for example Refers to the vertical or horizontal direction. Similarly, the horizontal direction refers to the horizontal direction toward the game board 200 in the horizontal direction. Further, the front-rear direction is a direction perpendicular to the game board 200 (the board surface of the transparent game board 810) in the horizontal direction, and the direction from the game board 200 toward the transparent plate member 118 is the front direction, and the opposite is the rear direction. Call.

  In FIG. 10 to FIG. 38, double-headed arrows having “upper” and “lower” indicate the vertical direction, “upper” indicates the upper vertical direction, and “lower” indicates the lower vertical direction. Also, in FIGS. 10 to 38, the double arrows having the notations “left” and “right” indicate the left-right direction, “left” indicates the left direction, and “right” indicates the right direction. Also, in FIGS. 10 to 38, the double arrows with “front” and “rear” indicate the front-rear direction, “front” indicates the front direction, and “rear” indicates the rear direction.

  FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 shows a state in which the game board 200 is viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left. The game board 200 has a three-layer structure including a rail decoration member 800, a transparent game board 810, and an accessory unit 820.

  The rail decoration member 800 includes an outer rail member 802, an outer frame member 804, a center decoration member 806, and a game board decoration member 808. The outer rail member 802 is integrally formed of a resin material, for example, and has a left base portion 802a and an upper base portion 802b. The left base 802a has an arc shape with the inner end side from the bottom to the top centering around the center of the game board 200. The upper base portion 802b is formed to extend rightward from the upper end of the left base portion 802a, and has an arcuate shape in which the inner end side from the left to the right is centered around the center of the game board 200. The outer rail member 802 is molded so that the inner edge of the left base 802a and the inner edge of the upper base 802b are continuous. An outer rail 202 is disposed on the inner side edges of the left base portion 802a and the upper base portion 802b. The outer end of the gaming area 124 is defined by the outer rail 202 of the outer rail member 802.

  The outer frame member 804 is molded from, for example, a resin material, and has a curved shape in which an inner edge extending from the right to the lower right matches the curve of the lower right edge of the game area 124. The game area 124 is surrounded by the outer rail member 802 and the outer frame member 804.

  The center decoration member 806 is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material. The center decoration member 806 has an annular shape with a predetermined contour, and the entire surface in the annular shape is opened. Further, the center decoration member 806 has a warp device 242 and a front stage 244 shown in FIG. The center decoration member 806 may be provided with a wall on the rear side of the front stage 244 so that a game ball that has entered the front stage 244 does not fall to the rear side.

  The game board decoration member 808 is molded from, for example, a transparent resin material, and has an arcuate shape whose outer end side is centered around the center of the game board 200. An inner rail 204 is disposed on the outer side edge of the game board decoration member 808. Further, on the front side of the inner side of the inner rail 204 of the game board decoration member 808, a general winning opening 226, a special figure 1 start opening 230, and a special figure 2 start opening 232 shown in FIG. 3 (the blade member 232a is not shown). A variable winning port 234, an out port 240, and a second out port 241 are provided. Further, the front side of the game board decoration member 808 is provided with a decorative pattern by unevenness.

  The transparent game board 810 is formed of a transparent resin material, for example, and has a thin plate shape. The outer rail member 802 and the outer frame member 804 are fixed to the front surface of the transparent game board 810 with screws, and are arranged so as to surround the game area 124. A plurality of game nails (not shown) and a hitting direction changing member (not shown) are arranged on the front side of the transparent game board 810. Further, the transparent game board 810 has an opening 810a that is opened in accordance with the contour shape of the center decoration member 806 at the center. The center decoration member 806 is fitted into the opening 810a and is fixed to the transparent game board 810 with a screw. The transparent gaming board 810 has an opening 810b opened in a predetermined shape at the lower right of the opening 810a, and has openings 810c and 810d opened in a predetermined shape at the lower left of the opening 810a. Yes. The openings 810c and 810d are formed in this order from the left side of the transparent game board 810. The special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the variable prize winning port 234, and the out port 240 correspond to the opening 810b, and the second out port 241 and the one below the second out port 241 are provided. The gaming board decoration member 808 is fixed to the transparent gaming board 810 with screws so that the general winning opening 226 corresponds to the opening 810c and the two general winning openings 226 correspond to the opening 810d. In addition, a ball passage unit (not shown) is disposed on the rear side (back side) of the openings 810b, 810c, and 810d of the transparent game board 810, and a general winning opening 226, a special figure 1 start opening 230, and a special figure 2 start opening. A game ball that has entered the H.232, variable prize winning port 234, out port 240, or second out port 241 is discharged to the island facility.

  The accessory unit 820 has a unit main body 822 molded from a transparent resin material. The unit main body 822 has a substantially rectangular shape on the front side, and has an opening 822a that is opened in a rectangular shape that is long in the horizontal direction at the center. In the unit main body 822, the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3 is visible from the player side through the opening 822a. The unit body 822 of the accessory unit 820 includes a logo accessory 900, an upper front ornament accessory 1000, an upper rear ornament accessory 1100 (not shown in FIG. 10), an upper right side accessory 1200, and an upper left side accessory. An object 1300, a lower right side accessory 1400, a lower left side accessory 1500, and a center lower accessory 1600 are attached. These various accessories will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

  Also, an upper right end portion 822b, a right lower end portion 822c, a left lower end portion 822d, and a left upper end portion 822e are provided at the four corners on the front side of the unit main body 822, respectively. The upper right end 822b, the right lower end 822c, the left lower end 822d, and the left upper end 822e are formed on the same virtual plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction. The transparent game board 810 is fixed to the upper right end 822b, the right lower end 822c, the left lower end 822d, and the left upper end 822e of the unit main body 822 with screws. Further, various types of accessories are attached to the rear side of the virtual plane including the upper right end 822b, the right lower end 822c, the left lower end 822d, and the left upper end 822e. This prevents the transparent game board 810 from contacting with various accessories.

  FIG. 11 is an external view of the game board 200 as viewed from the rear side (back side). Through the opening 822a of the unit main body 822, the center decorative member 806, the upper front decoration accessory 1000, the upper rear decoration accessory 1100, the upper right side accessory 1200, the upper left side accessory 1300, and the lower right side accessory 1400. A part of the rear surface side of the lower left side accessory 1500 and the central lower accessory 1600 is visually recognized.

  FIG. 12 is an external view of the gaming board 200 when the accessory unit 820 is removed from the gaming board 200 shown in FIG. FIG. 12 shows a ball passage unit 700 connected to the second out port 241 and the three general winning ports 226.

  Next, a ball passage unit 700 used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The ball passage unit 700 forms a ball passage through which a game ball that has entered the general prize opening 226 or the second out-port 241 can pass, and the rear side (rear side) of the transparent gaming board 810 shown in FIG. Is provided.

  FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the ball passage unit 700 used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the upper right rear to the lower left front. In FIG. 13, the vertical direction of the paper surface represents the vertical vertical direction, the direction extending from the upper right to the lower left of the paper represents the left-right direction, and the direction extending from the upper left to the lower right of the paper represents the front-back direction. FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the ball passage unit 700 as viewed from the upper left rear toward the lower right front. In FIG. 14, the vertical direction of the paper surface represents the vertical vertical direction, the direction extending from the upper right to the lower left of the paper surface represents the front-rear direction, and the direction extending from the lower right to the upper left of the paper surface represents the left-right direction. The thick broken lines shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 show an example of the trajectory of the game ball that rolls down in the ball passage of the ball passage unit 700. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the ball passage unit 700 as viewed from the rear to the front. In FIG. 15, the vertical direction of the paper surface represents the vertical vertical direction, and the horizontal direction of the paper surface represents the left-right direction toward the front surface of the transparent game board 810. A solid line with an arrow in the figure shows an example of a trajectory of a game ball that rolls down in the ball passage of the ball passage unit 700. Further, the coordinates indicated by the double arrows in FIGS. 13 to 15 indicate the ball passage when the pachinko machine 100 to which the ball passage mechanism including the ball passage unit 700 is attached is installed in an island facility or the like of a game shop. The installation state of the unit 700 is shown. In FIG. 13 to FIG. 15, the spherical passage unit 700 is transparently shown for easy understanding of the structure of the spherical passage unit 700.

  In the game board decoration member 808 disposed on the front side (front side) of the transparent game board 810 to which the ball passage unit 700 is attached on the rear side, an out port 240 provided at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204 as shown in FIG. In addition, a second out port 241 is provided. The second out port 241 is provided on the upper left side in the vicinity of the uppermost general winning port 226 among the three general winning ports 226. According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, since the second out port 241 is higher than the general winning port 226, the out ball may be discharged using the back side of the game area 124. is there. The ball passage unit 700 is used to discharge game balls entering the second out port 241 and the three general winning ports 226 to the game island side at the rear side (back side) of the transparent game board 810.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, a front wall W <b> 1 is disposed on the front side of the ball passage unit 700. The front wall W1 has a flat plate shape parallel to a plane including the left and right direction and the up and down direction (a plane perpendicular to the front and rear direction). As shown in FIG. 12, the ball passage unit 700 is attached to the back side of the transparent game board 810 with the front wall surface of the front wall W1 facing the back side of the transparent game board 810. In the front wall W1, three circular openings 701A, 701B, and 701C that are opened to a size that allows a game ball to pass are arranged corresponding to the arrangement positions of the three general winning ports 226. The opening 701B is located at the lower right of the opening 701A. The opening 701C is located near the lower right of the opening 701B. Further, for example, a circular opening 702A that is opened to a size that allows a game ball to pass therethrough is disposed above the opening 701A of the front wall W1 in correspondence with the position of the second out port 241. The ball passage unit 700 has a transparent game board such that the opening 701A and the opening 702A are arranged in the opening 810c of the transparent game board 810, and the openings 701B and 701C are arranged in the opening 810d of the transparent game board 810. Screwed to the back of 810.

  In the ball passage unit 700 of this example, four openings 701A to 701C and 702A are provided corresponding to each of the three general winning openings 226 and one second out opening 241, but the number of openings is not limited. Can be changed according to the number of winning entries and the number of second outlets. The opening shapes of the openings 701A to 701C and 702A are not limited to a circle, and may be a triangle, a quadrangle, or a polygonal shape of a quadrangle or more.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, a rear wall W2 is disposed behind the front wall W1 in parallel with the front wall W1. The rear wall W2 has a flat plate shape parallel to a plane including the left-right direction and the up-down direction. The width in the front-rear direction of the rear side wall surface of the front wall W1 and the front side wall surface of the rear wall W2 is longer than the diameter of at least one game ball.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the outline shapes (outer circumferences) of the front wall W <b> 1 and the rear wall W <b> 2 viewed in the front-rear direction are substantially the same and overlap in the overall view. In the outer contour portions of the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, side walls (for example, upper side walls 701au, 701bu, etc.) that connect the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2 substantially perpendicular to the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2 are provided. Is provided. The side walls are arranged so as to substantially follow the outer contour shapes of the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, and surround the outer contour portions of the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2 except for the ball discharge port 703E for discharging the game balls.

  Further, an internal space formed by the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2 and a side wall surrounding the outer contour of the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2 is further divided into three spaces, and the front wall Side walls (for example, a lower side wall 701ad and a left side wall 701al) are provided between W1 and the rear wall W2 so as to be substantially perpendicular to the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2. The three spaces function as a first ball passage 701 through which a game ball flows down, a part of the second ball passage 702, and a third ball passage 703, respectively.

  The first ball passage 701 is used to flow down the game balls that have passed through the openings 701A, 701B, and 701C of the front wall W1 from the front to the rear and guide them to the third ball passage 703. The second ball passage 702 is used to flow down the game ball that has passed through the opening 702A of the front wall W1 from the front to the rear and guide it to the third ball passage 703. The third ball passage 703 is used to join the game ball that has passed through the first ball passage 701 and the game ball that has passed through the second ball passage 702 to flow down and guide them to the ball discharge port 703E.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the first spherical passage 701 has six side walls (a right side wall 701ar, an upper side wall 701au, an oblique side wall 701bu, and a right side wall 701br) surrounding a part of the outer contour of the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2. , Lower side wall 701bd, left side wall 701cl) and five side walls (left side wall 701al, lower side wall 701ad, left side wall 701bl, lower side wall 701bd ′, right side wall 701cr) defining an internal space.

  The right side wall 701ar and the left side wall 701al are disposed extending in parallel downward from the opening 701A. The right side wall 701ar and the left side wall 701al are connected at the upper part of the opening 701A. The width in the left-right direction of the left side wall surface of the right side wall 701ar below the opening 701A and the right side wall surface of the left side wall 701al has a length longer than the diameter of at least one game ball.

  The lower end of the right side wall 701ar is connected to the left end of the upper side wall 701au. The upper side wall 701au is inclined with a gentle downward slope, and the right end is connected to the upper left end of the oblique side wall 701bu. On the other hand, the lower end of the left side wall 701al is connected to the left end of the lower side wall 701ad among the side walls branched in two. The lower side wall 701ad is inclined downward to the right, and the right end is connected to the upper end of the left side wall 701bl. The width between the lower side wall surface of the upper side wall 701au and the upper side wall surface of the lower side wall 701ad has a length longer than the diameter of one game ball at the shortest.

  A ball in which a game ball entered from the opening 701A flows downward and further flows diagonally downward to the lower right by the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, the right side wall 701ar and the left side wall 701al, and the upper side wall 701au and the lower side wall 701ad. A passage 701a is formed.

  The oblique side wall 701bu is inclined downward to the right at an inclination angle of about 45 °, and the lower right end is connected to the upper end of the right side wall 701br. The right side wall 701br extends downward and then gently turns to the left, and the left end is connected to the right end of the lower side wall 701bd. The lower side wall 701bd is gently inclined downward to the left, and the left end is connected to the right end of the lower side wall 701bd ′. The lower side wall 701bd ′ is gently inclined downward to the left, and the left end is connected to the upper end of the right side wall 701cr. On the other hand, the left side wall 701bl is slanted with a steep downward slope, and the lower end is connected to the upper end of the left side wall 701cl.

  A space defined by the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, the oblique side wall 701bu, the right side wall 701br, the lower side wall 701bd, the lower side wall 701bd ′, and the left side wall 701bl is a spherical passage 701b. In a plane parallel to the front wall W1 of the ball passage 701b, the game ball has a width enough to roll. The opening 701B is disposed on the front wall W1 in the vicinity of the center of the oblique side wall 701bu of the spherical passage 701b. The opening 701C is disposed on the front wall W1 in the vicinity of the center of the right side wall 701br of the ball passage 701b. Therefore, game balls from the opening 701B and the opening 701C directly enter the ball passage 701b, and a game ball from the opening 701A reaches the ball passage 701b through the ball passage 701a.

  The right side wall 701cr extends downward and has a lower end located at a boundary with the third spherical passage 703. The left side wall 701cl extends downward, and the lower end is connected to the upper end of the left side wall 731al at the boundary with the third spherical passage 703. The width in the left-right direction of the left wall surface of the right wall 701cr and the right wall surface of the left wall 701cl is at least longer than the diameter of one game ball. In addition, an opening X701 having a rectangular shape with a size that allows the ball detection sensor S to pass therethrough is opened on the rear wall W2 near the lower end of the right side wall 701cr. The lower end side of the opening X701 is located at the boundary with the third spherical passage 703. Therefore, as shown by a broken-line square shape in FIG. 13, at the boundary with the third spherical passage 703, the lower end side of the right wall 701cr and the lower end side of the opening X701, the rear side wall surface of the front wall W1, and An opening Y713 that opens in the vertical direction is formed with the right side wall surface of the left side wall 731al.

  The front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, and the right side wall 701cr and the left side wall 701cl form a ball passage 701c through which a game ball can flow downward. As shown in FIGS. 13 and 15, an opening Y713 connected to the third spherical passage 703 is provided at the lower end of the spherical passage 701c. The opening Y713 serves as a boundary between the first sphere passage 701 and the third sphere passage 703. Thus, the 1st ball passage 701 has ball passages 701a-701c.

  A sphere detection sensor S is disposed between the right side wall 701cr and the left side wall 701cl in the vicinity of the upper portion of the opening Y713. The sphere detection sensor S is inserted in the front-rear direction through the opening X701 of the rear wall W2, and is arranged such that the tip of the sphere detection sensor S abuts against the rear side wall surface of the front wall W1. The ball passage port (detection port) of the ball detection sensor S is located above the opening Y713 and is provided in the ball passage 701c of the first ball passage 701 so that the game ball reaches the third ball passage 703. The game ball can be detected before the game. A ball passage port (detection port) of the ball detection sensor S is opened in a substantially circular shape having an inner diameter through which a game ball can pass. When the distance from the ball passage opening to the tip of the sphere detection sensor S is long, an opening is provided by opening the front wall W1 at the position where the tip contacts, and the tip of the sphere detection sensor S is You may make it penetrate an opening part.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, all of the game balls that have entered the plurality of general winning ports 226 have the same number of winning balls and pass through the first ball passage 701. Therefore, the first ball passage In some cases, the game balls can be discharged together simply by providing one ball detection sensor S at 701. In addition, since the number of arranged sphere detection sensors S can be reduced, the cost may be reduced.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, a rear wall W3 is arranged behind the rear wall W2 in parallel with the rear wall W2. The rear wall W3 has a flat plate shape parallel to a plane including the left-right direction and the up-down direction. The width in the front-rear direction of the rear side wall surface of the rear wall W2 and the front side wall surface of the rear wall W3 has a length longer than the diameter of at least one game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 15, a game ball is connected to the rear wall W2 by connecting a space created between the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2 and a space created between the rear wall W2 and the rear wall W3. Two, for example, rectangular openings X702b and X702d that are opened to a size that can pass through are arranged. The opening X702b is located below the opening 702A. The opening X702d is located on the right side of the sphere detection sensor S.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the outer shape (outer periphery) of the rear wall W3 viewed in the front-rear direction has a shape that gently bends to the right and extends downward as viewed in the whole view. The outer contour portion of the rear wall W3 includes three side walls (upper side walls 702bu, 702cu, lower side wall 702cd) that connect the rear wall W3 and the rear wall W2 substantially perpendicularly to the rear wall W3 and the rear wall W2. The rear lower wall 702dbd connecting the rear wall W3 and the rear wall W2 in an arc shape, and the six side walls connecting the rear wall W3 and the front wall W1 substantially perpendicular to the rear wall W3 and the front wall W1. (Lower left side walls 702bldf, 702bldb, right side walls 702drf, 702drb, left side walls 702dlf, 702dlb) are provided. The wall thicknesses of the front wall W1, the rear wall W2, and the rear wall W3 may be the same or different from each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the second spherical passage 702 has a spherical passage 702a, a spherical passage 702b, a spherical passage 702c, and a spherical passage 702d.

  The spherical passage 702a includes a front wall W1 and a rear wall W2, and a right side wall 702ar and a left side wall 702al. The left side wall 702al and the right side wall 702ar extend in parallel to each other downward from the opening 702A and then extend downward in parallel to each other. The left side wall 702al and the right side wall 702ar are connected at the upper part of the opening 702A.

  The left side wall 702al extends to the vicinity of the opening X702b of the rear wall W2, and the lower end is connected to the upper end of the lower left side wall 702bldf. The right side wall 702ar extends to the vicinity of the opening X702b of the rear wall W2, and the lower end is connected to the upper end of the right side wall 702br. The width in the left-right direction of the right side wall surface of the left side wall 702al below the opening 702A and the left side wall surface of the right side wall 702ar has a length longer than at least the diameter of one game ball.

  The ball passage 702a is in the same position as the first ball passage 701 in the front-rear direction. That is, the ball passage 702a is in a space formed between the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2 as in the first ball passage 701.

  The ball passage 702a is the same as the left wall 701al of the ball passage 701a in the section to the branch point where the right wall 702ar extends downward and branches into two hands, and the first ball The left side wall 701al and the side wall of the ball path 701a of the path 701 are shared.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, a part of the ball path 701a of the first ball path 701 and a part of the ball path 702a of the second ball path 702 are adjacent to each other, and the partition wall is shared. Since the wall of the thick ball passage is shared in the left-right direction, space saving in the left-right direction of the ball passage unit 700 may be achieved. In addition, the side wall is shared means that the partition wall of the portion where the ball passages are adjacent to each other is shared.

  The lower end of the spherical passage 702a is connected to the spherical passage 702b. The ball path 702b changes the course of the game ball flowing down in the ball path 702a to the rear, and passes the game ball through the opening X702b disposed in the rear wall W2 and sends it to the subsequent ball path 702c. It is provided for. In other words, the ball passage 702b connects the ball passage 702a provided between the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2 and the ball passage 702c provided between the rear wall W2 and the rear wall W3. Are provided in the front-rear direction.

  The spherical passage 702b includes a front wall W1, a rear wall W3, a right side wall 702br, a left lower side wall 702bldf, 702bldb, and an upper side wall 702bu.

  The front end of the lower left side wall 702bldf is connected to the front wall W1. The rear end of the lower left side wall 702bldb is connected to the rear wall W3. The rear end of the left lower side wall 702bldf is connected to the front end of the left lower side wall 702bldb, and the left lower side wall 702bldf and the left lower side wall 702bldb are included in one plane parallel to the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 15, the lower left side wall 702bldf and the lower left side wall 702bldb bend in a convex arc shape on the lower left side while ensuring a space through which a game ball can pass from the upper left end to the lower right end when viewed in the front-rear direction. Is formed. The length of the radius of the arc is longer than the length of one game ball. The width in the front-rear direction of the lower left side wall 702bldf is longer than the width in the front-rear direction of the front side wall surface of the front wall W1 and the front side wall surface of the rear wall W2. The width of the lower left side wall 702bldb in the front-rear direction is longer than the width in the front-rear direction of the rear side wall surface of the rear wall W2 and the front side wall surface of the rear wall W3. The shape of the left lower side wall 702bldf and the left lower side wall 702bldb when viewed in the front-rear direction may not be an arc shape. For example, the wall surface extending downward from the upper left end and the wall surface extending leftward from the lower right end Also good. The angle between both wall surfaces at that time may be a right angle or an obtuse angle wider than that.

  The upper left end of the lower left side wall 702bldf is connected to the lower end of the left side wall 702al. The lower right end of the lower left side wall 702bldf is connected to the lower end of the right side wall 702br. On the other hand, the upper left end of the lower left side wall 702bldb is connected to the left end of the upper side wall 702bu. The lower right end of the lower left side wall 702bldb is connected to the left end of the lower side wall 702cd. The upper side wall 702bu is gently inclined downward to the right, and the right end is connected to the left end of the upper side wall 702cu.

  Since the lower left side wall 702bldf, 702bldb of the spherical passage 702b is disposed substantially perpendicular to the rear wall W3 and the front wall W1, the inside of the passage is not inclined in the front-rear direction. Further, the connection portion between the lower left side wall 702bldb and the rear wall W3 is a right angle when viewed in the vertical direction. Thus, direction change projections Z1 and Z2 are provided in the ball passage 702b so that the smooth flow of the game ball is not hindered. As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, when the opening X702b is viewed from the rear to the front, the direction changing projection Z1 extends downward from the front wall W1 located substantially at the center of the opening X702b. It has a plate shape connected to the corner of the side wall 702bldf. Further, the direction changing projection Z1 has an inclined surface from the front upper side to the rear lower side at an inclination angle of about 45 ° when viewed in the left-right direction. The game ball that has flowed down the ball passage 702a by the direction changing projection Z1 rolls down the slope of the direction changing projection Z1, changes the rolling direction to the rear, and passes through the opening X702b. Note that the upper side wall 702bu may be disposed somewhat higher upward in order to sufficiently secure the path of the game ball in the ball path 702b. When the lower left side wall 702bldf, 702bldb has an inclined surface that slopes downward from the front to the rear so that the game ball that has passed through the ball passage 701a can flow down and roll backward in the ball passage 701b, The direction changing projection Z1 may not be provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, when the opening X702b is viewed from the back to the front, the direction changing projection Z2 extends to the left from the portion of the rear wall W3 located slightly below the center of the opening X702b. It has a plate shape connected to the side surface of the side wall 702bldf. Further, the direction changing projection Z2 has an inclined surface from the front left to the rear right at an inclination angle of about 45 ° when viewed in the vertical direction. With the direction changing projection Z2, the game ball that has passed through the opening X702b changes the rolling direction to the right while rolling on the slope of the direction changing projection Z2, and passes through the ball passage 702b. When the lower left side wall 702bldb has an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the left to the right so that it can roll down in the right direction in the ball passage 701b, the direction changing projection Z2 is not provided. Good.

  In the ball passage 702b shown in FIG. 15, the double circle in which the inner circle is painted black indicates that the game ball advances from the front to the rear. In addition, illustration of direction change protrusion Z1, Z2 is abbreviate | omitted in FIG.

  The lower end of the spherical passage 702b is connected to the spherical passage 702c. The ball passage 702c is provided to change the backward path of guiding the game ball that has passed through the ball passage 702b in the lower right direction downward. The spherical passage 702c includes a rear wall W2 and a rear wall W3, and an upper side wall 702cu and a lower side wall 702cd.

  The upper side wall 702cu gently inclines to the right and then bends downward, and the lower end is connected to the upper end of the right side wall 702drb. The lower side wall 702cd gently inclines to the right and then bends downward, and the lower end is connected to the upper end of the left side wall 702dlb. The widths of the inner facing surfaces of the upper side wall 702cu and the lower side wall 702cd have a length that is at least longer than the diameter of one game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the ball passage section defined by the left side wall 701bl and the lower side wall 701bd ′ of the first ball passage 701 among the ball passages 702c of the second ball passage 702 is first viewed in the front-rear direction. It is a portion that overlaps with one spherical passage 701. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, a part of the first ball passage 701 and the second ball passage 702 overlap in the front-rear direction on the back side of the transparent game board 810. Can be provided. In some cases, a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 and a game ball that has entered the second out port 241 can be distinguished and passed through different ball paths. Furthermore, since a plurality of ball passages are provided in the front-rear direction, space saving in the left-right direction and the vertical direction of the ball passage unit 700 may be achieved.

  Moreover, the said site | part exists in the space made between the back side of the 1st ball | bowl channel | path 701, ie, the rear wall W2 and the rear wall W3. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, a part of the second ball passage 702 overlaps the rear side of the first ball passage 701. Thereby, the layout (arrangement) of the first ball passage 701 is not disturbed by the second ball passage 702, so that the game balls passing through the first ball passage 701 are quickly discharged (detected by the ball detection sensor S). ) May be able to.

  Further, in this portion, the front wall of the second ball passage 702 is the same as the rear wall of the first ball passage 701. That is, in this portion, the rear wall W2 is shared by the first ball passage 701 and the second ball passage 702. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, since the thick rear wall W2 is shared in the front-rear direction, space saving in the front-rear direction can be achieved in addition to the space saving in the left-right direction and the vertical direction of the ball passage unit 700. May be possible. In addition, the front wall W4 may be separately provided in the second ball passage 702 so that the rear wall W2 is not shared by the first ball passage 701 and the second ball passage 702. By doing so, the constituent members of the ball passage unit 700 may be easily molded. Further, it may be possible to facilitate the manufacture of the ball passage unit 700 and reduce the cost.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, the safe ball passes through the first ball passage 701 and the out ball passes through the second ball passage 702, so that the safe ball and the out ball are discharged separately. Can do. Further, since the safe sphere moves only in the space formed between the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, the safe sphere is discharged more quickly than the moving out sphere in the space formed between the rear wall W2 and the rear wall W3. There are cases where it is possible.

  The lower end of the spherical passage 702c is connected to the spherical passage 702d. The ball path 702d changes the course of the game ball flowing down from the ball path 702c forward, passes the game ball through the opening X702d disposed in the rear wall W2, and then passes through the third ball path 703. It is provided for sending out. In other words, the spherical passage 702d includes a spherical passage 702c provided between the rear wall W2 and the rear wall W3, and a third spherical passage 703 provided between the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2. In order to connect, it is provided in the front-rear direction.

  The spherical passage 702d includes a front wall W1, a rear lower wall 702dbd, right side walls 702drf, 702drb, and left side walls 702dlf, 702dlb.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the rear lower wall 702dbd is bent in a convex arc shape in the rear lower direction while securing a width through which a game ball can pass from the rear upper end to the front lower end when viewed in the left-right direction. Is formed. The length of the radius of the arc is longer than the length of one game ball. The rear upper end of the rear lower wall 702dbd is connected to the lower end of the rear wall W3. The front lower end of the rear lower wall 702dbd is connected to the lower end of the opening X702d of the rear wall W2. Note that the shape of the rear lower wall 702dbd viewed in the left-right direction may not be an arc shape, and may be, for example, a shape in which a wall surface extending downward from the rear upper end and a wall surface extending rearward from the front lower end intersect. The angle between both wall surfaces at that time may be a right angle or an obtuse angle wider than that. In addition, a direction changing projection may be provided on the inner wall surface of the rear lower wall 702dbd so that the flow direction of the game ball is directed to the front side.

  As shown by the broken rhombus shape in FIG. 13, the front lower end of the rear lower wall 702dbd, the lower end of the right side wall 702drf, the lower end of the left side wall 702dlf, and the rear side wall surface of the front wall W1 are opened in the vertical direction. Y723 is formed. The game ball that has passed through the ball passage 702d falls at the opening Y723 and reaches the third ball passage 703. The opening Y723 serves as a boundary between the second sphere passage 702 and the third sphere passage 703.

  The front end of the left side wall 702dlf is connected to the front wall W1. The upper end portion of the left side wall 702dlf is connected to the right side wall surface of the right side wall 701cr. The upper end of the left side wall 702dlb is connected to the lower end of the lower side wall 702cd. The rear upper end to the front lower end of the left side wall 702dlb are connected to the left side of the rear lower wall 702dbd following the arc shape of the rear lower wall 702dbd. The rear end of the left side wall 702dlf is connected to the front end of the left side wall 702dlb, and the left side wall 702dlf and the left side wall 702dlb are included in one plane parallel to the front-rear direction. The width in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 702dlf is longer than the width in the front-rear direction of the front side wall surface of the front wall W1 and the front side wall surface of the rear wall W2.

  The front end of the right side wall 702drf is connected to the front wall W1. The upper end of the right side wall 702drf is connected to the lower side wall surfaces of the lower side walls 701bd and 701bd ′. The upper end of the right side wall 702drb is connected to the lower end of the lower side wall 702cu. The rear upper end to the front lower end of the right wall 702drb are connected to the right side portion of the rear lower wall 702dbd following the arc shape of the rear lower wall 702dbd. The rear end of the right side wall 702drf and the front end of the right side wall 702drb are connected, and the right side wall 702drf and the right side wall 702drb are included in one plane parallel to the front-rear direction. The width in the front-rear direction of the right side wall 702drf is longer than the width in the front-rear direction of the rear side wall surface of the front wall W1 and the front side wall surface of the rear wall W2.

  In the ball passage 702d shown in FIG. 15, a circle with an inward mark indicates that the game ball advances from the rear toward the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the third spherical passage 703 has five side walls (an upper side wall 703au, a right side wall 703br, a left side wall 731al, and a part of the outer contours of the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2. A lower side wall 703ad and a left side wall 703bl).

  The upper end of the left side wall 731al is connected to the lower end of the left side wall 701cl. The left side wall 731al extends downward and then turns to the right and is inclined with a gentle downward slope. The right end is connected to the left end of the lower side wall 703ad.

  The front wall W1, the rear wall W2, and the left side wall 731al pass through the first ball passage 701 and the ball passage 713 through which the game ball that has passed through the opening Y713 further flows downward, and the second ball passage 702. A ball passage 723 through which the game ball that has passed and passed through the opening Y723 further flows downward is configured. The width of the ball passage 713 and the ball passage 723 in the vertical direction has a length equal to or greater than the sum of the diameters of the two game balls.

  The right end of the spherical passage 713 is connected to the spherical passage 723. A game ball that has passed through the first ball passage 701 in which the ball detection sensor S is provided and has flowed down the ball passage 713 and a game ball that has passed through the second ball passage 702 and has flowed down the ball passage 723 are: 723 joins in the vicinity of the joining position J712 in 723 and passes through the subsequent spherical passage 703a.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, safe balls and out balls can be discharged separately. Also, the safe ball that has passed through the out-ball and the ball detection sensor S is merged in the third ball passage 703, whereby the third ball passage 703 for the safe ball and the third ball passage 703 for the out-ball are separated. There is no need to provide it. Thereby, space saving of the 3rd ball passage 703 may be attained.

  The left end of the upper side wall 703au is connected to the lower end of the right side wall 702drf. The upper side wall 703au is inclined with a gentle downward rightward and then extends downward, and the lower end is connected to the upper end of the right side wall 703br. The lower side wall 703ad is inclined slowly downward to the right and then extends downward, and the lower end is connected to the upper end of the left side wall 703bl.

  The right end of the spherical passage 723 is connected to the spherical passage 703a. The spherical passage 703a includes a front wall W1 and a rear wall W2, and an upper side wall 703au and a lower side wall 703ad. The width of the ball passage 703a in the vertical direction is longer than the sum of the diameters of the two game balls.

  The upper end of the right side wall 703br is connected to the lower end of the upper side wall 703au. The right side wall 703br extends downward. The upper end of the left side wall 703bl is connected to the lower end of the lower side wall 703ad. The left side wall 703bl extends downward. The ball outlet 703E includes a lower end of the front wall W1 and a lower end of the rear wall W2, and a lower end of the right side wall 703br and a lower end of the left side wall 703bl. The width of the ball passage 703b in the left-right direction is equal to or longer than the sum of the diameters of the two game balls.

  The lower end of the spherical passage 703a is connected to the spherical passage 703b. The spherical passage 703b includes a front wall W1 and a rear wall W2, and a right side wall 703br and a left side wall 703bl. The game ball that has passed through the ball passage 703b is guided to the ball discharge port 703E. The lower end of the ball passage 703a may be the ball discharge port 703E without providing the ball passage 703b.

  In each of the first to third ball passages 701 to 703, a cross-sectional opening (closed surrounded by an inner wall surface) at a passage cross section (hereinafter referred to as "passage cross section") cut along a plane perpendicular to the flow-down direction of the game ball. The size (opening area) of the region may vary depending on the position of each cross-section of the first to third spherical passages 701 to 703. A cross-sectional opening 701O indicated by a broken-line quadrangle in FIG. 13 indicates the size of the cross-sectional opening in the cross-section of the passage at the lower end position of the spherical passage 701a of the first spherical passage 701. Similarly, the cross-sectional opening 702O indicates the size of the cross-sectional opening in the cross section of the passage at the substantially central position of the spherical passage 702c of the second spherical passage 702. Similarly, the cross-sectional opening 703O indicates the size of the cross-sectional opening in the cross section of the passage at the substantially central position of the spherical passage 703a of the third spherical passage 703. The size of the sectional opening 701O of the first spherical passage 701 is substantially the same as the size of the sectional opening 702O of the second spherical passage 702. On the other hand, the size of the sectional opening 703O of the third spherical passage 703 is larger than the size of the sectional opening 701O of the first spherical passage 701. The size of the cross-sectional opening 703O of the third spherical passage 703 is larger than the size of the cross-sectional opening 702O of the second spherical passage 702.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, cross-sectional openings of the ball path 703a and the ball path 703b of the third ball path 703 after the game balls that have passed through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 have joined. The opening area of 703O is larger than, for example, the opening area of the sectional opening 701O of the spherical passage 701a and the opening area of the sectional opening 702O of the spherical passage 702c before joining. Thereby, it may be possible to prevent the game balls from being clogged in the third ball passage 703 after joining (particularly the ball passage near the joining position J712).

  The front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, the left side wall 701ad and the left side wall 701bl, the right side wall 702ar and the right side wall 702br below the bifurcating branch point, and the lower right end of the left lower side wall 702bldf and the upper end of the left side wall 701cl. A region surrounded by a lower wall (not shown) to be connected is a hollow region. This hollow region can be variously modified. For example, the lower end wall connecting the right lower end of the left lower side wall 702bldf and the lower end of the left side wall 701bl may be provided as an open end without providing a lower side wall. Alternatively, the cavity region may be embedded by filling the cavity with a resin material. Moreover, you may open the front wall W1 of a cavity area | region. Moreover, you may open parts other than the area | region shared as a front wall of the spherical channel | path 702c among the rear walls W2 of a cavity area | region.

  Further, the left side wall 701ad and the left side wall 701bl may not be provided. By carrying out like this, it can replace with the structure of the ball path 701a and the ball path 701b, and can make one wide area ball path connected to the ball path 701c. The wide-area sphere passage includes the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, the right side wall 701ar, the side wall 701au, the oblique side wall 701bu, the right side wall 701br, the lower side wall 701bd, the lower side wall 701bd ′, the left side wall 701al, the right side wall 702br, and the left lower side wall 702bldf. The space is defined by a lower side wall (not shown) connecting the lower right end and the upper end of the left side wall 701cl. Note that the lower end of the left side wall 701al is connected to the upper end of the right side wall 702br.

  Further, the width in the front-rear direction of the rear side wall surface of the front wall W1 and the front side wall surface of the rear wall W2 may have a length equal to or greater than the sum of the diameters of the two game balls. Further, the width in the front-rear direction of the rear side wall surface of the rear wall W2 and the front side wall surface of the rear wall W3 may have a length equal to or greater than the sum of the diameters of the two game balls. In addition, since the front wall W1, the rear wall W2, the rear wall W3, and each side wall are formed of a transparent resin material, a store clerk or the like of the amusement shop is in a situation of dirt inside the ball passage during maintenance of the ball passage unit, etc. It becomes easy to grasp. The front wall W1, the rear wall W2, the rear wall W3, and the side walls may be made of an opaque resin material. In addition, linear grooves or linear protrusions may be formed on the inner wall in the ball passage along the direction in which the game ball flows down. By doing so, there is a case where the game ball can be smoothly and quickly rolled by reducing friction between the inner wall of the ball passage and the game ball. Further, a step may be provided on the slope of the spherical passage, or a slit may be provided on the wall of the spherical passage. By doing so, the flow velocity of the game ball may be adjusted.

  Next, the movement of the game ball passing through the ball passage of the ball passage unit 700 will be described. The game ball guided to the opening 701A flows down through the ball passage 701a and further down to the lower right. Next, the ball moves to the lower right through the ball passage 701b and further flows downward to the lower left. Next, the ball falls downward through the ball passage 701c and passes through the ball detection sensor S. Next, it passes through the opening Y713 and flows down further through the spherical passage 713. Next, it passes through the joining position J712 and flows down to the lower right through the ball passage 703a. Next, it flows down through the ball passage 703b and is discharged from the ball discharge port E. Since the operation of the game ball guided to the openings 701B and 701C is the same as that of the opening 701A, the description thereof is omitted.

  The game ball guided to the opening 702A flows downward through the ball passage 702a. Next, the rolling direction is changed rearward by the direction changing projection Z1 provided in the spherical passage 702b through the spherical passage 702b, and passes through the opening X702b. Next, the rolling direction is changed to the right by the direction changing projection Z2. Next, it moves to the lower right through the ball passage 702c and further flows downward. Next, it moves forward and downward through the ball passage 702d and passes through the opening X702d. Next, it passes through the opening Y723 and flows down further through the spherical passage 723. Next, it passes through the joining position J712 and flows down to the lower right through the ball passage 703a. Next, it flows down through the ball passage 703b and is discharged from the ball discharge port E.

Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15 again.
(A1)
A plurality of passages (for example, a first ball passage 701, a second ball passage 702, and a third ball passage 703) through which game balls discharged from the game area (for example, the game area 124) can pass are provided. A playground,
At least one of the plurality of passages (hereinafter referred to as “second passage” (for example, the second ball passage 702)) is different from the second passage of the plurality of passages. At least one (hereinafter, referred to as “first passage” (for example, the first ball passage 701)) and at least a part in the front-rear direction (for example, the left side wall 701bl of the first ball passage 701 in the ball passage 702c). And a spherical passage section defined by the lower wall 701bd ′) and a passage overlapping each other,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming table, the first ball passage 701 and the second ball passage 702 partially overlap in the front-rear direction on the back side of the transparent gaming board 810, so that it is possible to provide a gaming table characterized by a ball passage. In some cases, a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 and a game ball that has entered the second out port 241 can be distinguished and passed through different ball paths. Furthermore, since a plurality of ball passages are provided in the front-rear direction, space saving in the left-right direction of the ball passage unit 700 may be achieved.

(A2)
A gaming machine as set forth in (A1) above,
A part of at least one of the plurality of passages (hereinafter referred to as a “third passage” (for example, a third ball passage 703)) is a game ball that has passed through the first passage and the first passage. It is a passage (for example, ball passage 703a, ball passage 703b) after the game balls that have passed through the second passage merge.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above game table, the safe ball and the out ball can be discharged separately.

A gaming machine as set forth in (A2) above,
The first passage is a passage provided with at least a game ball detection means (for example, a ball detection sensor S),
The first passage and the second passage are passages where game balls join at a first position (for example, a joining position J712),
The first position is a position that is at least downstream (for example, below the opening Y713) at least downstream of the position (for example, the vicinity above the opening Y713) where the game ball detection unit is provided.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A3)
A gaming machine as set forth in (A2) above,
The first passage is a passage provided with at least a game ball detection means (for example, a ball detection sensor S),
A prize ball granting unit (for example, a payout device 152) capable of at least awarding a prize ball (for example, a ball to be paid out to a player based on a winning prize) in association with detection of a game ball by the game ball detecting unit. Prepared,
The first passage is a passage through which a game ball that has entered the first region (for example, the general winning opening 226) can pass,
The second passage is a passage through which a game ball that has entered a second region (for example, the second out port 241) can pass,
The game ball that has entered the second area is guided to the third passage without being detected by the game ball detection means,
The game ball that has entered the first area is guided to the third passage after being detected by the game ball detection means.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above game table, the third ball passage 703 for the safe ball and the third ball for the out ball are joined by joining the safe ball that has passed the out ball and the ball detection sensor S in the third ball passage 703. There is no need to provide the ball passage 703 separately. Thereby, space saving of the 3rd ball passage 703 may be attained. Further, since the safe sphere moves only in the space formed between the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, the safe sphere is discharged more quickly than the moving out sphere in the space formed between the rear wall W2 and the rear wall W3. May be.

(A4)
A gaming machine as set forth in (A3) above,
The first area is an area provided in the gaming area,
The second area is an area provided in the gaming area,
The second area is an area provided above the first area (for example, above the general winning opening 226).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above game console, the second out port 241 is higher than the general winning port 226, so that the out ball may be discharged using the back side of the game area 124 in some cases.

(A5)
The game stand according to (A3) or (A4) above,
The first passage is a passage through which a game ball that has entered a plurality of areas (for example, three general winning holes 226) can pass,
At least one of the plurality of areas is the first area (for example, a general winning opening 226 for guiding a game ball to the opening 701A),
At least one of the plurality of regions is a third region (for example, a general winning port 226 for guiding a game ball to the opening 701B and a general winning port 226 for guiding the game ball to the opening 701C),
The second region is a region not included in the plurality of regions,
The game ball detection means is a means provided only in the first passage,
The game ball detection means is a means capable of detecting at least a game ball that has entered the first area,
The game ball detection means is a means capable of detecting at least a game ball that has entered the third area,
The prize ball giving means is a means capable of giving the same number (for example, 10) of prize balls when a game ball enters the first area and when a game ball enters the third area. is there,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, all the game balls entered into the plurality of general winning holes 226 have the same number of prize balls and pass through the first ball path 701. In some cases, the game balls can be discharged together simply by providing two ball detection sensors S. In addition, since the number of arranged sphere detection sensors S can be reduced, the cost may be reduced.

(A6)
The game stand according to any one of (A2) to (A5) above,
The size of the cross-sectional opening of the first passage (for example, the cross-sectional opening 701O) is the first size,
The size of the sectional opening of the second passage (for example, the sectional opening 702O) is the second size,
The size of the sectional opening of the third passage (for example, the sectional opening 703O) is the third size,
The third size is larger than the first size,
The third size is greater than the second size;
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming table, the opening of the cross-sectional opening 703O of the ball path 703a and the ball path 703b of the third ball path 703 after the game balls that have passed through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 merge. The area is larger than, for example, the opening area of the cross-sectional opening 701O of the spherical passage 701a and the opening area of the cross-sectional opening 702O of the spherical passage 702c before merging. Thereby, it may be possible to prevent the game balls from being clogged in the third ball passage 703 after joining (particularly the ball passage near the joining position J712).

A gaming machine as set forth in (A6) above,
The first size is a size of the cross-sectional opening of a region through which only a game ball that has entered one of the plurality of regions in the most upstream area can pass.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A7)
The game stand according to any one of (A1) to (A6) above,
The second passage is a passage constituted by a plurality of portions (for example, a ball passage 702a, a ball passage 702b, a ball passage 702c, and a ball passage 702d),
At least one of the plurality of portions (hereinafter referred to as “first portion” (for example, a ball passage 702a)) has a position in the front-rear direction at the same position as the first passage (for example, the front portion). A part in the space created between the wall W1 and the rear wall W2.
At least one of the plurality of portions (hereinafter referred to as “second portion” (for example, a ball passage 702c)) is located at a position overlapping the first passage in the front-rear direction (for example, the rear wall W2). In the space created between the rear wall W3 and the rear wall W3,
The second passage is the first passage in at least a part of the first portion (for example, a ball passage section to a branch point where the right side wall 702ar of the ball passage 702a extends downward and branches in two directions). The passage and the side walls are shared (for example, the portion of the right side wall 702ar of the section is the same as the left side wall 701al of the ball passage 701a and the side walls are shared),
The second passage is the at least part of the second portion (for example, a spherical passage section defined by a left side wall 701bl and a lower side wall 701bd ′ of the first spherical passage 701 of the spherical passage 702c). The rear wall of the first passage (for example, the rear wall W2 on the rear side of the front wall W1) and the front wall of the second passage (for example, the rear wall W2 on the front side of the rear wall W3) are shared.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, a part of the ball path 701a of the first ball path 701 and a part of the ball path 702a of the second ball path 702 are adjacent to each other, and the partition wall is shared. Since the wall of the thick ball passage is shared in the left-right direction, space saving in the left-right direction of the ball passage unit 700 may be achieved. In addition, the side wall is shared means that the partition wall of the portion where the ball passages are adjacent to each other is shared.

  In addition, according to the above gaming table, a part of the first ball passage 701 and the second ball passage 702 overlap in the front-rear direction on the back side of the transparent gaming board 810, so that a gaming table having a characteristic of the ball passage is provided. it can. Furthermore, since a plurality of ball passages are provided in the front-rear direction, space saving in the left-right direction of the ball passage unit 700 may be achieved.

  In addition, the ball passage section defined by the left side wall 701bl and the lower side wall 701bd ′ of the first ball passage 701 among the ball passages 702c of the second ball passage 702 is the first ball passage 701 when viewed in the front-rear direction. It is a part which overlaps. In this part, the front wall of the second spherical passage 702 is the same as the rear wall of the first spherical passage 701. That is, in this portion, the rear wall W2 is shared by the first ball passage 701 and the second ball passage 702. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, since the thick rear wall W2 is shared in the front-rear direction, the space saving in the front-rear direction can be achieved in addition to the space saving in the left-right direction of the ball passage unit 700. There is.

(A8)
The game stand according to any one of (A1) to (A7) above,
The second passage has at least a part (for example, a spherical passage section defined by the left side wall 701bl and the lower side wall 701bd ′ of the first spherical passage 701 of the spherical passage 702c) after the first passage. A passage that overlaps the side,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, a part of the second ball passage 702 overlaps the rear side of the first ball passage 701. Thereby, the layout (arrangement) of the first ball passage 701 is not disturbed by the second ball passage 702, so that the game balls passing through the first ball passage 701 are quickly discharged (detected by the ball detection sensor S). ) May be able to.

(A9)
The game stand according to any one of (A1) to (A8) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.
For example, a configuration in which three or more passages overlap in the front-rear direction may be used.
Both the first passage and the second passage may be safe ball passages, or both may be out ball passages.
At least one of the first passage and the second passage may be a passage mounted on a winning device or an entry area without a prize ball.
The first passage may be configured to overlap the rear side of the second passage, or the both passages may alternately overlap the front and rear.
As long as both the first passage and the second passage are safe ball passages and the number of winning balls when winning is the same, the third passage may include a game ball detecting means.
The opening area (cross-sectional opening) of the first passage and the second passage in the passage cross section may be larger than the opening area of the third passage in the passage cross section. By doing so, it may be possible to guide the game balls by aligning them in the third passage after quickly discharging the game balls into the third passage.
Another game ball detecting means may be provided in the third passage. For example, the count switch may be configured to count the total number of game balls that have passed through all the passages (used for game area grapes and effect switching by counting).
The second out port may be at a lower position than the general winning port.
A safe ball passage may be used as the passage (rear side) overlapping the back.
The passage through which at least the game ball discharged from the game area can pass includes not only the game table but also a portion of the path that is discharged from the game table itself and supplied again to the ball tank of the game table, such as an island facility. May be. In other words, by making the ball passage unit of the present invention applicable to the game island itself including the game stand, the space efficiency of the passage of the game ball may be improved.
In addition, in the case of overlapping in the front-rear direction, the first passage and the second passage may overlap in the front-rear direction, and a case of a three-dimensional intersection in which the passages three-dimensionally intersect each other may be included.

  Note that the configuration described as “at least ... possible” in the above embodiment can be interpreted by replacing this part with “... only possible”. For example, the game ball detection means described as “at least a game ball that has entered the first prize area can be detected” is replaced with a game ball detection means that “only a game ball that has entered the first prize area can be detected”. Can also be interpreted.

  In addition, the configuration described as “... possible” in the above-described embodiment is interpreted by replacing the part with “... may not be included, or necessarily includes ...” You can also For example, the configuration described as “at least a game ball that has entered the first prize area can be detected” may be “a game ball that has entered the first prize area may not be detected, or It can be interpreted by replacing “means including a configuration that is always detected”.

The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Appendix a1)
A game stand having a plurality of passages through which game balls discharged from the game area can pass,
At least one of the plurality of passages (hereinafter referred to as “second passage”) is at least one of the plurality of passages different from the second passage (hereinafter referred to as “first passage”). A passage that is at least partially overlapped in the front-rear direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a2)
A game machine according to appendix a1,
Part of at least one of the plurality of passages (hereinafter referred to as “third passage”) is a combination of a game ball that has passed through the first passage and a game ball that has passed through the second passage. The passage after the
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a3)
A game machine according to appendix a2,
The first passage is a passage provided with at least a game ball detection means,
A prize ball granting means capable of giving at least a prize ball in association with the detection of a game ball in the game ball detection means;
The first passage is a passage through which a game ball that has entered the first region can pass,
The second passage is a passage through which a game ball that has entered the second region can pass,
The game ball that has entered the second area is guided to the third passage without being detected by the game ball detection means,
The game ball that has entered the first area is guided to the third passage after being detected by the game ball detection means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a4)
A gaming machine according to appendix a3,
The first area is an area provided in the gaming area,
The second area is an area provided in the gaming area,
The second region is a region provided above the first region.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a5)
The game stand according to appendix a3 or a4,
The first passage is a passage through which game balls that have entered a plurality of areas can pass,
At least one of the plurality of regions is the first region;
At least one of the plurality of regions is a third region;
The second region is a region not included in the plurality of regions,
The game ball detection means is a means provided only in the first passage,
The game ball detection means is a means capable of detecting at least a game ball that has entered the first area,
The game ball detection means is a means capable of detecting at least a game ball that has entered the third area,
The prize ball granting means is a means capable of giving the same number of prize balls when a game ball enters the first area and when a game ball enters the third area.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a2 to a5,
The size of the cross-sectional opening of the first passage is the first size,
The size of the cross-sectional opening of the second passage is the second size,
The size of the cross-sectional opening of the third passage is the third size,
The third size is larger than the first size,
The third size is greater than the second size;
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a6,
The second passage is a passage constituted by a plurality of parts,
At least one of the plurality of parts (hereinafter referred to as “first part”) is a part having a position in the front-rear direction at the same position as the first passage,
At least one of the plurality of parts (hereinafter referred to as “second part”) is a part at a position overlapping the first passage in the front-rear direction,
The second passage has a side wall shared with the first passage in at least a part of the first portion,
In the second passage, the rear wall of the first passage and the front wall of the second passage are shared in at least a part of the second portion.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a7,
The second passage is a passage at least partially overlapping the rear side of the first passage.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a8,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  Next, various types of accessories used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 16 is an external view of the accessory unit 820 as viewed from the front side (front side). In FIG. 16, the upper right end 822b, the lower right end 822c, the lower left end 822d, and the upper left end 822e of the unit main body 822 are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 16, various kinds of accessories are arranged around the opening 822 a of the unit main body 822. A logo accessory 900 is disposed above the opening 822a. Further, the logo accessory 900 has a logo movable body 902 that can move in the vertical direction. In the state shown in FIG. 16, the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position. The initial position of the logo movable body 902 is above the upper side of the rectangular image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the decorative symbol display device 208 is installed on the back side of the unit main body 822. When the logo accessory 900 is located at the initial position, it may be configured such that at least a part thereof overlaps with the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction, or the entirety of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The image display area may not overlap in the front-rear direction. When the logo movable body 902 is positioned at the initial position, at least a part of the logo movable body 902 is positioned higher than the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the logo movable body 902 is movable upward and downward from the initial position. When the logo movable body 902 moves upward from the initial position, the logo movable body 902 moves away from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, when the logo movable body 902 moves downward from the initial position, at least a part of the logo movable body 902 overlaps with the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction.

  An upper front decoration accessory 1000 is disposed behind the logo accessory 900, and an upper rear decoration accessory 1100 (not shown in FIG. 16, refer to FIG. 17) is disposed behind the upper front ornament accessory 1000. . Further, the upper front decoration object 1000 has an upper front movable body 1002 that can move in the vertical direction, and the upper rear decoration object 1100 can move in the vertical direction. The upper rear movable body 1102 (see FIGS. 26 and 28). have. In the state shown in FIG. 16, the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 are located at the initial positions. In this state, the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 overlap in the front-rear direction, and the upper rear movable body 1102 is hidden by the logo accessory 900 and the upper front decoration accessory 1000 and forward. Cannot be seen from the side. In the present embodiment, after the logo movable body 902 moves upward, the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 move downward. The upper rear movable body 1102 is visible from the front side after moving downward.

  Further, the order of arrangement of the logo accessory 900, the upper front ornament accessory 1000, and the upper rear ornament accessory 1100 in the front-rear direction is as follows: from the front, the upper front ornament accessory 1000, the upper rear ornament accessory 1100, and the logo accessory 900. The order may be the order of the upper back decoration object 1100, the logo object 900, the upper front decoration object 1000, the logo object 900, the upper back decoration object 1100, the upper front. The order of the decorative object 1000 may be used, or the order of the upper front decorative object 1000, the logo object 900, and the upper rear decoration object 1100 may be used. The upper rear decorative object 1100, and the upper front object. The order may be 1000 and the logo accessory 900.

  An upper right side accessory 1200 is disposed on the right side of the logo accessory 900, and an upper left side accessory 1300 is disposed on the left side of the logo accessory 900. FIG. 16 shows a state in which the upper right side movable body 1201 of the upper right side accessory 1200 moves to the lower left and the upper left side movable body 1301 of the upper left side accessory 1300 is located at the initial position. . The vertical positions of the initial positions of the upper right side movable body 1201 and the upper left side movable body 1301 are the same.

  Further, a lower right side accessory 1400 is disposed at the lower right portion of the opening 822a, and a lower left side accessory 1500 is disposed at the lower left portion of the opening 822a. Further, a central lower part 1600 is disposed between the lower right side part 1400 and the lower left side part 1500 at the lower center of the opening 822a.

  A decorative member 830 is disposed at the right end of the unit main body 822. The decorative member 830 is molded from a resin material and has a shape imitating the head of a beast. For example, the decoration member 830 is molded from a resin material. A decorative member 832 molded from a resin material is disposed at the left end of the unit main body 822.

  FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the accessory unit 820 shown in FIG. FIG. 17 shows a state in which the accessory unit 820 is viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left. In FIG. 17, similarly to FIG. 16, the upper right end 822b, the right lower end 822c, the left lower end 822d, and the left upper end 822e of the unit main body 822 are not shown.

  The upper front decoration accessory 1000 and the upper rear decoration accessory 1100 are attached to a common upper accessory base 850. The upper accessory base 850 is fixed to the upper portion of the unit main body 822 with a screw. Further, a logo accessory 900 is arranged in front of the upper front ornament accessory 1000, and an accessory base portion 966 of the logo accessory 900 is fixed to the unit main body with a screw.

  The base portion 1254 of the upper right side accessory 1200 is fixed to the front base portion 1456 and the middle base portion 1460 of the lower right side accessory 1400 with screws. The middle base portion 1460 is fixed to the right end of the unit main body 822 with a screw. As a result, the upper right side accessory 1200 and the lower right side accessory 1400 are attached to the unit main body 822.

  Similarly, the base portion 1354 of the upper left side accessory 1300 is fixed to the front base portion 1556 and the middle base portion 1560 of the lower left side accessory 1500 with screws. The middle base portion 1560 is fixed to the left end of the unit main body 822 with a screw. Accordingly, the upper left side accessory 1300 and the lower left side accessory 1500 are attached to the unit main body 822.

  Further, the base portion 1662 of the center lower accessory 1600 is fixed to the center lower portion of the unit main body 822 with a screw.

  A decorative member 830 is fixed to the right end of the unit main body 822 with a screw. A decorative member 832 is fixed to the left end portion of the unit main body 822 with a screw.

  Logo feature 900, upper front ornament feature 1000, upper rear ornament feature 1100, upper right side feature 1200, upper left side feature 1300, lower right side feature 1400, lower left side feature 1500, and lower center Each accessory 1600 includes a movable body, and performs various effects using each movable body. As an effect using each movable body, an effect of a special figure variable game, an effect of a normal figure variable game, an effect of a big hit game, a demonstration effect, or the like can be given. More specifically, a notice effect for the special figure variable game being executed (the notice effect), a notice effect for the reserved special figure variable game (pre-read notice effect), a reach effect, a special figure 1 small hit effect, a special effect FIG. 2 includes a small hit effect, a universal winning effect, a pre-reading notice effect, a 2R jackpot game effect, a 15R special jackpot game effect, and an effect related to the operation of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137. Hereinafter, the various types of accessories will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the logo accessory 900 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration of the logo accessory 900 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the logo accessory 900. FIG. 18 shows a state in which the logo accessory 900 is viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left. As shown in FIG. 18, the logo accessory 900 is roughly composed of a logo movable body 902, a base portion 904, and a drive portion 906.

  The logo movable body 902 has a character decoration portion 902a and a rotation link mechanism 902b. The character decoration portion 902a is disposed in the forefront of the logo accessory 900. The character decoration portion 902a includes a first character portion 910, a second character portion 912, a third character portion 914, a fourth character portion 916, a fifth character portion 918, a sixth character portion 920, and a seventh character portion 922. ing. The first character portion 910 to the seventh character portion 922 are arranged in this order from the left.

  The configuration of the first character portion 910 to the seventh character portion 922 will be described by taking the first character portion 910 as an example. The first character portion 910 includes a dial plate 910a, a decorative plate 910b, an LED substrate 910c, and a rear cover 910d. The dial plate 910a, the decorative plate 910b, the LED substrate 910c, and the rear cover 910d are arranged in this order from the front.

  The dial 910a is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a concave-convex shape representing a predetermined character on the front side (in this example, a character shape representing a character “C”, see FIG. 19). A decorative plate 910b is disposed on the rear side of the dial 910a. The decorative plate 910b is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a decorative pattern with unevenness on the front side. The decorative pattern of the decorative plate 910b is visible from the front side through the dial plate 910a and decorates the dial plate 910a. An LED substrate 910c is disposed on the rear side of the decorative plate 910b. A plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted on the LED substrate 910c, and the logo movable body 902 can emit light from the first character portion 910 using the plurality of LEDs. The LEDs on the LED board 910c are included in the game board lamp 532 shown in FIG. 4 and are driven by the game board lamp drive circuit 530. A rear cover 910d is disposed on the rear side of the LED substrate 910c. The rear cover 910d is formed of, for example, a resin material, and the dial 910a, the decorative plate 910b, and the LED substrate 910c are fixed to the rear cover 910d with screws.

  Similarly to the first character portion 910, the second character portion 912 to the seventh character portion 922 include a dial plate, a decorative plate, an LED substrate, and a rear cover. In this example, the dial of the second character portion 912 has an uneven shape representing the letter “R”, and the dial of the third character portion 914 has an uneven shape representing the lightning symbol, A concavo-convex shape representing the character “Y” is formed on the dial plate of the fourth character portion 916, and an concavo-convex shape representing the character “SH” is formed on the dial plate of the fifth character portion 918. A concavo-convex shape representing the character “Mu” is formed on the dial plate of the character portion 920, and a concavo-convex shape representing the character “Ne” is formed on the dial plate of the seventh character portion 922 (see FIG. 19). .

  As described above, the character decoration portion 902a of the logo movable body 902 has a character shape representing “CR (lightning symbol) yoshimine” which is the model name of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment.

  The character decoration portion 902a includes cylindrical metal guide bars 924, 926, 928, 930, and 932 extending in the vertical direction. The guide bars 924 to 932 are arranged in parallel to each other.

  A guided portion 912d1 is provided at the left end of the rear cover of the second character portion 912, and the rear cover of the second character portion 912 is attached so that the guided portion 912d1 surrounds the guide rod 924 and is slidable. It has been. An upper end fixing portion 910d1 for fixing the upper end of the guide rod 924 is provided at the upper right end of the rear cover 910d of the first character portion 910, and a lower end fixing portion for fixing the lower end of the guide rod 924 at the lower right end of the rear cover 910d. 910d2 is provided. The upper end of the guide rod 924 is fixed to the upper end fixing portion 910d1, and the lower end of the guide rod 924 is fixed to the lower end fixing portion 910d2. As a result, the first character portion 910 and the second character portion 912 are connected via the guide bar 924. Further, the upper end fixing part 910d1 functions as a mechanical end of the second character part 912. The function of the mechanical end will be described later.

  Similarly, a guided portion 914d1 is provided at the left end of the rear cover of the third character portion 914, and the guided portion 914d1 slides around the guide rod 926 on the rear cover of the third character portion 914. It is attached as possible. An upper end fixing portion 912d2 for fixing the upper end of the guide rod 926 is provided at the upper right end of the rear cover of the second character portion 912, and a lower end fixing portion for fixing the lower end of the guide rod 926 at the lower right end of the rear cover. 912d3 is provided. The upper end of the guide rod 926 is fixed to the upper end fixing portion 912d2, and the lower end of the guide rod 926 is fixed to the lower end fixing portion 912d3. As a result, the second character portion 912 and the third character portion 914 are connected via the guide rod 926. The upper end fixing portion 912d2 functions as a mechanical end of the third character portion 914.

  Similarly, a guided portion 916d1 is provided at the left end of the rear cover of the fourth character portion 916, and the rear cover of the fourth character portion 916 slides with the guided portion 916d1 surrounding the guide rod 928. It is attached as possible. An upper end fixing portion 914d2 for fixing the upper end of the guide rod 928 is provided at the upper right end of the rear cover of the third character portion 914, and a lower end fixing portion for fixing the lower end of the guide rod 928 at the lower right end of the rear cover. 914d3 is provided. The upper end of the guide rod 928 is fixed to the upper end fixing portion 914d2, and the lower end of the guide rod 928 is fixed to the lower end fixing portion 914d3. As a result, the third character portion 914 and the fourth character portion 916 are connected via the guide rod 928. The upper end fixing part 914d2 functions as a mechanical end of the fourth character part 916.

  An oval guide hole 916d2 extending in the vertical direction (parallel to the guide rods 924 to 932) is provided at the right end of the rear cover of the fourth character portion 916. In addition, a columnar guided portion 918d1 is provided on the rear side of the rear cover of the fifth character portion 918. The rear cover of the fifth character portion 918 is attached to the rear cover of the fourth character portion 916 so that the guided portion 918d1 can move in the guide hole portion 916d2. For this attachment, for example, a screw with a washer is used. The washer portion of the screw with the washer is larger than the width of the guide hole portion 916d2, and the guided portion is prevented from being detached from the guide hole portion 916d2.

  Also, a guided portion 918d2 is provided at the right end of the rear cover of the fifth character portion 918. The rear cover of the fifth character portion 918 is slidable by the guided portion 918d2 surrounding the guide rod 930. Is attached. An upper end fixing portion 920d2 for fixing the upper end of the guide rod 930 is provided at the upper left end of the rear cover of the sixth character portion 920, and a lower end fixing portion for fixing the lower end of the guide rod 930 at the lower left end of the rear cover. 920d3 is provided. The upper end of the guide rod 930 is fixed to the upper end fixing portion 920d2, and the lower end of the guide rod 930 is fixed to the lower end fixing portion 920d3. Thereby, the fifth character portion 918 and the sixth character portion 920 are connected via the guide rod 930. Further, the upper end fixing portion 920d2 functions as a mechanical end of the fifth character portion 918.

  Similarly, a guided portion 920d1 is provided at the right end of the rear cover of the sixth character portion 920. The rear cover of the sixth character portion 920 slides with the guided portion 920d1 surrounding the guide rod 932. It is attached as possible. An upper end fixing portion 922d2 for fixing the upper end of the guide rod 932 is provided at the upper left end of the rear cover of the seventh character portion 922, and a lower end fixing portion for fixing the lower end of the guide rod 932 at the lower left end of the rear cover. 922d3 is provided. The upper end of the guide rod 932 is fixed to the upper end fixing portion 922d2, and the lower end of the guide rod 932 is fixed to the lower end fixing portion 922d3. As a result, the sixth character portion 920 and the seventh character portion 922 are connected via the guide rod 932. Further, the lower end fixing portion 922d3 functions as a mechanical end of the sixth character portion 920.

  Thus, the character decoration part 902a has the adjacent character parts connected to each other. During the moving operation of the logo movable body 902, the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 are guided by the guide rods 924 to 932 and the guide hole portion 916d2, and can move in parallel in the vertical direction. Yes.

  Next, the rotation link mechanism 902b arrange | positioned at the back side of the character decoration part 902a is demonstrated. A rotational motion by a motor 970, which will be described later, is transmitted as a linear motion to the character decoration portion 902a via the rotational link mechanism 902b. The rotary link mechanism 902 b includes a left crank 940, a right crank 942, and a link member 944.

  The left crank 940 has a left crank base 940a and a left crank cover 940b. The left crank base portion 940a is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a length that is about half of the character decoration portion 902a in the left-right direction. Further, the right side edge of the left crank base 940a is formed in an arc shape protruding rightward, and a gear 940a1 is formed on the right side edge. Further, a left crank cover 940b is fixed with a screw on the rear side of the left crank base portion 940a, and each of the second character portion 912 and the third character portion 914 is provided between the left crank base portion 940a and the left crank cover 940b. A wiring (not shown) connected to the LED substrate can be accommodated.

  The left crank 940 is formed with three oval guide holes (for example, guide holes 940a2, see FIG. 20). On the rear side of each rear cover of the second character portion 912, the third character portion 914, and the fourth character portion 916, a cylindrical guided portion is provided. The rear covers of the second character portion 912, the third character portion 914, and the fourth character portion 916 are attached to the left crank 940 so that the guided portion can move in the guide hole portion. For this attachment, for example, a screw with a washer is used. The washer portion of the screw with the washer is larger than the width of the guide hole portion, and prevents the guided portion from being detached from the guide hole portion.

  The right crank 942 has a right crank base 942a and a right crank cover 942b. The right crank base portion 942a is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a length that is about half that of the character decoration portion 902a in the left-right direction. Further, the left end side of the right crank base 942a is formed in an arc shape protruding leftward, and a gear 942a1 is formed on the left end side. A right crank cover 942b is fixed to the rear side of the right crank base portion 942a with a screw, and each of the fourth character portion 916 to the sixth character portion 920 is provided between the right crank base portion 942a and the right crank cover 942b. A wiring (not shown) connected to the LED substrate can be accommodated.

  The right crank 942 has three oval guide holes. A cylindrical guided portion is provided on the rear side of each rear cover of the fourth character portion 916, the fifth character portion 918, and the sixth character portion 920. The rear covers of the fourth character portion 916, the fifth character portion 918, and the sixth character portion 920 are attached to the right crank 942 so that the guided portion can move in the guide hole portion. For this attachment, for example, a screw with a washer is used. The washer portion of the screw with the washer is larger than the width of the guide hole portion, and prevents the guided portion from being detached from the guide hole portion.

  Further, the gear 940a1 of the left crank base 940a and the gear 942a1 of the right crank base 942a are engaged with each other at the center. Further, the left crank 940 and the right crank 942 are formed of, for example, a resin material and are connected by an elongated link member 944 that is long in the left-right direction. A circular fixing hole is formed at the left end of the link member 944, and the link member 944 is screwed to the left crank base 940a through the fixing hole. The link member 944 is formed with an oval guide hole extending in the left-right direction from the right end toward the left. A cylindrical guided portion is provided on the rear side of the right crank 942. The link member 944 is attached to the right crank 942 so that the guided portion can move in the guide hole. For this attachment, for example, a screw with a washer is used. The washer portion of the screw with the washer is larger than the width of the guide hole portion, and prevents the guided portion from being detached from the guide hole portion. The link member 944 connects the left crank 940 and the right crank 942 so that the meshing between the gear 940a1 of the left crank 940 and the gear 942a1 of the right crank 942 is not shifted or disengaged. As a result, the left crank 940 and the right crank 942 can be stably linked.

  Next, the base 904 of the logo accessory 900 will be described. The base 904 is disposed on the rear side of the rotary link mechanism 902b, and includes a central decorative member 960, a left decorative member 962, a right decorative member 964, and an accessory base 966.

  The central decorative member 960 is formed of, for example, a resin material, has a curved shape that is convex upward as a whole, and is provided with a predetermined pattern by unevenness. The left decorative member 962 and the right decorative member 964 are molded of, for example, a resin material and have shapes that are symmetrical to each other. The accessory base 966 is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a predetermined pattern with unevenness on the surface. The central decorative member 960, the left decorative member 962, and the right decorative member 964 are fixed to the front side of the accessory base 966 with screws. The accessory base 966 is fixed to the unit main body 822 shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 with screws. Further, the lower end of the center of the accessory base 966 is formed in a semicircular shape that is recessed upward. When various kinds of accessories are attached to the unit main body 822, an upper front decoration accessory 1000 to be described later is arranged below the central lower end of the accessory base 966.

  The first character portion 910 is fixed to the left side of the accessory base portion 966 with a screw, and the seventh character portion 922 is fixed to the right side of the accessory base portion 966 with a screw. For this reason, the first character portion 910 and the seventh character portion 922 are not moved even during the movement operation of the logo movable body 902.

  Next, the drive unit 906 for driving the logo movable body 902 will be described. The drive unit 906 is disposed on the rear side of the accessory base 966 of the base 904. The drive unit 906 includes a motor 970, a base member 972, a spur gear 974, a sector gear 976, a left substrate 980, a right substrate 982, and a photo sensor 984.

  The motor 970 is a drive source for executing the moving operation of the logo movable body 902. In the present embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 970. The rotation shaft of the motor 970 extends in the front-rear direction, and the base member 972 has a through hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 970 passes. The motor 970 is fixed to the rear side of the base member 972 with a screw so that the rotation shaft passes through the through hole. A spur gear 974 accommodated on the front side of the base member 972 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 970.

  A sector gear 976 is disposed below the spur gear 974 and is accommodated in the base member 972. The sector gear 976 is used to transmit the power of the motor 970 to the rotary link mechanism 902b via the spur gear 974. The sector gear 976 has a gear portion 976a and a mounting portion 976b that are integrally molded. The gear portion 976a is meshed with the spur gear 974. The attachment portion 976b is disposed below the gear portion 976a and is fixed to the left end of the left crank base portion 940a of the left crank 940 with a screw. In addition, a circular through hole is formed substantially at the center of the attachment portion 976b. Similarly, a circular through hole is formed at the left end of the left crank base 940 a and the lower left of the accessory base 966. A cylindrical metal rod 990 extending in the front-rear direction is disposed in the through hole of the attachment portion 976b, the left crank base portion 940a, and the accessory base portion 966. The metal rod 990 has a front end fixed to the rear cover 910 d of the first character portion 910 and a rear end fixed to the base member 972 of the drive unit 906. The left crank 940 and the sector gear 976 can rotate integrally with a metal rod 990 as a rotation center. Accordingly, in conjunction with the rotational operation of the sector gear 976, the left crank 940 can rotate by a predetermined angle within a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction with the metal rod 990 as the rotational center.

  A circular through hole is formed at the right end of the right crank base 942a of the right crank 942. A cylindrical metal rod 992 extending in the front-rear direction is disposed in the through hole. The metal rod 992 has a front end fixed to the rear cover of the seventh character portion 922 and a rear end fixed to the lower right of the accessory base 966 of the base 904. Further, as described above, since the gear 940a1 of the left crank base 940a and the gear 942a1 of the right crank base 942a are engaged with each other, the right crank 942 rotates the metal rod 992 in conjunction with the rotation operation of the left crank 940. It can rotate about a predetermined angle in a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction.

  A torsion coil spring 994 is disposed between the right crank 942 and the accessory base 966. A metal rod 992 passes through the coil center of the torsion coil spring 994. One end of the torsion coil spring 994 is fixed to the right crank cover 942b of the right crank 942, and the other end is fixed to the accessory base 966. When the right crank 942 rotates counterclockwise, a force acts on the torsion coil spring 994 in the direction of winding the spring. The torsion coil spring 994 rotates clockwise to the right crank 942 when the right crank 942 rotates clockwise. Torque is applied to assist the right crank 942 in rotating clockwise.

  A left substrate 980 is fixed to the left rear surface of the accessory base 966 with a screw, and a right substrate 982 is fixed to the right rear surface of the accessory base 966 with a screw. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front side of the left substrate 980 and the right substrate 982, and the base 904 can emit light using the LEDs. These LEDs are included in the game board lamp 532 shown in FIG. 4 and are driven by the game board lamp drive circuit 530.

  The left substrate 980 is connected to the motor 970 and the LED substrates of the first character portion 910 to the third character portion 914 by wires (not shown). The motor 970 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 4 through the left board 980, and the LED boards of the first character part 910 to the third character part 914 are driven through the left board 980 as shown in FIG. Connected to circuit 530. In addition, the LED boards of the fourth character portion 916 to the seventh character portion 922 are connected to the right substrate 982 by wiring (not shown). The LED boards of the fourth character portion 916 to the seventh character portion 922 are connected to the game board lamp drive circuit 530 shown in FIG. Thereby, the movement operation of the logo movable body 902 of the logo accessory 900 and the light emission operation of the LED (light emitting means) are controlled by the second sub-control unit 500. In addition, wiring between the logo accessory 900 and the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 can be consolidated.

  In addition, a photosensor 984 is fixed to the base member 972 with screws. The photosensor 984 is included in the various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 4, and is connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. The photosensor 984 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit that are arranged to face each other in the vertical direction across the space. Further, a light shielding piece (not shown) made of, for example, a black resin material is provided on the rear side of the gear portion 976a of the sector gear 976. When the logo movable body 902 is located at the uppermost movable position, the light shielding piece enters between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion of the photosensor 984. In the present embodiment, the photo sensor 984 detects the presence or absence of a light shielding piece of the sector gear 976, and the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the light shielding piece is detected by the photo sensor 984 and the logo movable body 902 is at the uppermost position. When the photo sensor 984 does not detect the light shielding piece, it is determined that the logo movable body 902 is located at a position other than the uppermost position.

  Next, operation | movement of the logo movable body 902 of the logo accessory 900 is demonstrated using FIG. 19 and FIG. FIG. 19 is an external view of the logo accessory 900 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 20 is an external view of the logo accessory 900 viewed from the rear side.

  FIG. 19A and FIG. 20A show a state where the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position, the first character portion 910 to the seventh character portion 922 of the character decoration portion 902a are arranged in a substantially straight line in the left-right direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 20A, when the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position, the longitudinal directions of the left crank 940, the right crank 942 and the link member 944 of the rotary link mechanism 902b are directed in the left-right direction. It has become. Further, the gear 940a1 of the left crank 940 and the gear 942a2 of the right crank 942 are meshed at the center.

  FIGS. 19B and 20B show a state in which the logo movable body 902 moves upward from the initial position and is positioned at the uppermost position in the movement range. The logo movable body 902 is driven by the motor 970 of the drive unit 906 and can perform an operation of moving from the initial position to the uppermost position.

  When moving the logo movable body 902 upward, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the motor 970 to rotate the rotation axis of the motor 970 clockwise toward the paper surface of FIG. 19 (toward the paper surface of FIG. 20). Rotate counterclockwise). As a result, the spur gear 974 fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 970 rotates clockwise, and the sector gear 976 engaged with the spur gear 974 rotates counterclockwise. Further, the left crank 940 fixed to the sector gear 976 rotates counterclockwise, and the right crank 942 including the gear 942a2 meshed with the gear 940a1 of the left crank 940 rotates clockwise. As shown in FIG. 20B, the guided portion provided on the rear side of the right crank 942 has an oval guide hole portion of the link member 944 corresponding to the amount of displacement of the right crank 942 in the left direction. Is moved to the left (to the right in FIG. 20). Further, the link member 944 also moves upward in accordance with the operations of the left crank 940 and the right crank 942.

  Next, the movement operation of the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 of the character decoration portion 902a during the upward movement operation of the logo movable body 902 will be described using the fourth character portion 916 as an example. As shown in FIG. 20, the fourth character portion 916 has an oval guide hole in which a guided portion 916d4 provided on the rear side of the rear cover of the fourth character portion 916 is provided in the left crank base portion 940a. The portion 940a2 is attached to the left crank base 940a so as to be movable.

  An imaginary straight line passing through the long axis of the oval guide hole 940a2 passes through the center of rotation of the left crank 940. Similarly, an imaginary straight line passing through the major axes of two oval guide holes provided in the left crank 940 passes through the center of rotation of the left crank 940. Similarly, an imaginary straight line passing through the major axes of the two oval guide holes provided in the right crank 942 passes through the center of rotation of the right crank 942.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, when the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position, the longitudinal direction of the guide hole 940a2 is directed to the upper left (in FIG. 20, the upper right toward the paper surface). ing. When the upward movement of the logo movable body 902 is executed, the left crank 940 rotates counterclockwise (in FIG. 20, clockwise toward the paper surface), and the guide hole 940a2 is a circle centering on the rotation axis of the left crank 940. It moves to the upper left (in FIG. 20, the upper right toward the page) while drawing a movement trajectory in an arc. At this time, the guided portion 916d4 is moved upward by being guided by the guide hole portion 940a2. Further, the fourth character portion 916 is moved upward by being guided by the guide bar 928 extending in the vertical direction shown in FIG. Further, as described above, the upper end fixing portion 914d2 of the guide rod 928 of the third character portion 914 functions as a mechanical end of the fourth character portion 916. The fourth character portion 916 is stopped when the guided portion 916d1 of the fourth character portion 916 sliding on the guide rod 928 contacts the upper end fixing portion 914d2 of the third character portion 914. Further, as shown in FIG. 20B, the fourth character portion 916 stops before the guided portion 916d4 comes into contact with the right end of the guide hole portion 940a2 (the left end toward the paper surface in FIG. 20).

  Thus, the rotational motion of the motor 970 is transmitted to the fourth character portion 916 as a vertical motion through the guide hole 940a2 provided in the left crank 940. The operation principle of the second character portion 912, the third character portion 914, the fifth character portion 918, and the sixth character portion 920 is the same as that of the fourth character portion 916. The rotational motion of the motor 970 is transmitted as a linear motion to the second character portion 912 and the third character portion 914 via the left crank 940 and is linearly transmitted to the fifth character portion 918 and the sixth character portion 920 via the right crank 942. It is transmitted as movement. As a result, the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 move linearly upward. As shown in FIG. 20B, the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 are guided by guide bars 924 to 932 arranged in parallel with each other, and thus move upward in parallel with each other. Moreover, since the 1st character part 910 and the 7th character part 922 are being fixed to the accessory base 966 as mentioned above, they do not move.

  As described above, when the upward movement operation of the logo movable body 902 is performed, the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 which are a plurality of portions of the logo movable body 902 move upward in parallel with each other.

  Further, the left crank 940 performs a rotation operation when the upward movement operation of the logo movable body 902 is performed, and the operation amount is larger in a portion farther than a portion near the rotation center. In this example, a first character portion 910 to a fourth character portion 916 are attached from the side closer to the rotation center of the left crank 940. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 19B, the amount of movement when the logo moving body 902 is moved upward is increased in the order of the second character portion 912, the third character portion 914, and the fourth character portion 916. It has become.

  Similarly, the right crank 942 performs a rotation operation when the upward movement of the logo movable body 902 is performed, and the amount of operation in the portion far from the portion near the rotation center is larger. In this example, a sixth character portion 920 and a fifth character portion 918 are attached from the side closer to the rotation center of the right crank 942. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 19B, the movement amount when the logo moving body 902 is moved upward is increased in the order of the sixth character portion 920 and the fifth character portion 918.

  In addition, the absolute values of the rotation angles of the left crank 940 and the right crank 942 when the upward movement of the logo movable body 902 is performed are substantially equal, and the third character portion 914 and the third character portion 914 arranged next to the fourth character portion 916 are the same. The movement amount of the fifth character portion 918 is substantially equal, and the movement amounts of the second character portion 912 and the sixth character portion 920 are substantially equal. Further, the movement amount of the fourth character portion 916 is the largest among the logo movable bodies 902.

  Next, an operation in which the logo movable body 902 moves from the initial position to the lowest position in the movement range will be described. FIG. 19C and FIG. 20C show a state in which the logo movable body 902 is located at the lowest position. The logo movable body 902 is driven by the motor 970 of the drive unit 906 and can perform an operation of moving from the initial position to the lowest position.

  When the logo movable body 902 is driven to execute the downward movement operation, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the motor 970 and rotates the rotation axis of the motor 970 counterclockwise toward the paper surface of FIG. (Clockwise toward the paper surface of FIG. 20). As a result, the spur gear 974 fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 970 rotates counterclockwise, and the sector gear 976 engaged with the spur gear 974 rotates clockwise (counterclockwise toward the plane of FIG. 20). . Further, the left crank 940 fixed to the sector gear 976 rotates clockwise, and the right crank 942 including the gear 942a2 meshed with the gear 940a1 of the left crank 940 rotates counterclockwise. Further, as shown in FIG. 20C, the guided portion provided on the rear side of the right crank 942 has an oval guide hole portion of the link member 944 by the amount of displacement of the right crank 942 in the left direction. Are moved in the right direction (leftward toward the paper surface of FIG. 20). Further, the link member 944 also moves downward in accordance with the operations of the left crank 940 and the right crank 942.

  Next, the movement operation of the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 of the character decoration portion 902a when the downward movement operation of the logo movable body 902 is executed will be described by taking the fourth character portion 916 as an example. When the downward movement operation of the logo movable body 902 is executed, the left crank 940 rotates clockwise (in FIG. 20, counterclockwise toward the paper surface), and the guide hole 940a2 is a circle centered on the rotation axis of the left crank 940. The movement trajectory is drawn in an arc shape and moves to the lower left (lower right toward the page in FIG. 20). At this time, the guided portion 916d4 is moved downward by being guided by the guide hole portion 940a2. Further, the fourth character portion 916 is moved downward by being guided by the guide bar 928 extending in the vertical direction shown in FIG.

  When the downward movement operation of the logo movable body 902 is performed, the guide hole portion 940a2 functions as a mechanical end of the fourth character portion 916. The fourth character portion 916 stops when the guided portion 916d4 of the fourth character portion 916 contacts the right end portion of the guide hole portion 940a2 (the left end portion toward the paper surface in FIG. 20).

  As described above, when the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position, the longitudinal direction of the guide hole portion 940a2 is directed to the upper left (upper right toward the paper surface in FIG. 20). For this reason, when the downward movement of the logo movable body 902 in which the left crank 940 rotates clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 20), the left crank 940 rotates counterclockwise (toward the paper in FIG. 20). The movement distance of the guided portion 916d4 is smaller than that when the upward moving operation of the logo movable body 902 rotating clockwise is performed. Therefore, when the downward movement operation of the logo movable body 902 is performed, the rotation angle of the left crank 940 is smaller than when the upward movement operation is performed, and the movement amount of the fourth character portion 916 is also small.

  The operation principle of the second character portion 912, the third character portion 914, the fifth character portion 918, and the sixth character portion 920 is the same as that of the fourth character portion 916. As shown in FIG. 20 (c), the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 are guided by guide bars 924 to 932 arranged in parallel with each other, and are lowered downward in parallel with each other. Moreover, since the 1st character part 910 and the 7th character part 922 are being fixed to the accessory base 966 as mentioned above, they do not move.

  Further, since the left crank 940 rotates when the logo moving body 902 is moved downward, as shown in FIG. 19C, the second character portion 912, the third character portion 914, and the fourth character portion 904 are moved. The operation amount increases in the order of the character portion 916.

  Similarly, the right crank 942 rotates when the logo movable body 902 is moved downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19C, the sixth character portion 920 and the fifth character portion 918 are arranged in this order. The amount of movement increases.

  In addition, the absolute values of the rotation angles of the left crank 940 and the right crank 942 when the downward movement of the logo movable body 902 is performed are substantially equal, and the third character portion 914 and the third character portion 914 arranged next to the fourth character portion 916 The movement amount of the fifth character portion 918 is substantially equal, and the movement amounts of the second character portion 912 and the sixth character portion 920 are substantially equal. Further, the movement amount of the fourth character portion 916 is the largest among the logo movable bodies 902.

  Thus, when the downward movement operation of the logo movable body 902 is performed, the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 which are a plurality of portions of the logo movable body 902 move downward in parallel with each other.

  The initial position of the logo movable body 902 is a position after the operation confirmation of the logo movable body 902 is performed when the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. When the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, the logo movable body 902 moves to the lowermost position shown in FIG. 19C, then moves to the uppermost position shown in FIG. 19B, and then moves to FIG. Move to the initial position shown in (a) and stop. It should be noted that the upper front ornament character 1000, the upper rear ornament character 1100, the upper right side character 1200, the upper left side character 1300, the lower right side character 1400, the lower left side character 1500, and the central lower character 1600. As for the movable bodies included in the apparatus, operation confirmation is performed when the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, and these movable bodies stop at the initial position after the operation confirmation.

  In the present embodiment, the moving amount of the logo movable body 902 from the initial position to the uppermost position is larger than the moving amount from the initial position to the lowermost position. More specifically, the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920, which are a plurality of movable portions of the logo movable body 902, are located at the uppermost position from the initial position rather than the amount of movement from the initial position to the lowermost position. The amount of movement until moving to is larger. In addition, compared with the same movable part among the plurality of movable parts of the logo movable body 902, the movement amount until moving from the initial position to the uppermost position is larger than the movement amount until moving from the initial position to the lowermost position. It only has to be bigger. In addition, the whole of the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 that are a plurality of portions of the logo movable body 902 may be movable in parallel with each other, or the second character portion 912 that is a plurality of movable portions. -A part of the sixth character part 920 may be movable in parallel with each other.

  The uppermost position of the logo movable body 902 is a position away from the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lowermost position of the logo movable body 902 is a position overlapping the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the moving amount of the logo movable body 902 that is farthest away from the decorative symbol display device 208 is larger than the downward moving amount that approaches the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the moving amount of the logo movable body 902 in the direction away from the decorative symbol display device 208 may be smaller than the moving amount in the direction approaching the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, the logo movable body 902 may include a sub display device smaller than the decorative symbol display device 208. Sub display devices include liquid crystal display devices, dot matrix display devices, 7 segment display devices, organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display devices, reel (drum) display devices, leaf display devices, plasma displays, and other displays including projectors. Devices can be used. The sub display device may be controlled by the first sub control unit 400, may be controlled by the second sub control unit 500, and the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 are the same. Alternatively, a display control unit may be provided and controlled by the display control unit.

  Further, the logo movable body 902 may be capable of rotating the first character portion 910 to the seventh character portion 922, may be capable of rotating after the upward movement operation, or may be upward after the rotational operation. It may be moved, may be able to rotate after the downward movement, or may be moved downward after the rotation is performed.

  Moreover, the logo movable body 902 may be movable to a position below the lower end of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a downward movement operation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the logo movable body 902 overlaps in the front-rear direction of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when it is located at the initial position. Note that the logo movable body 902 does not have to overlap in the front-rear direction of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when it is located at the initial position. The entire logo movable body 902 may be positioned above the upper end of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when it is positioned at the initial position.

  Further, the logo movable body 902 may be an integral movable body having a plurality of movable portions. For example, a movable part including a sub display device and another movable part movable in the vicinity of the sub display device may be formed as an integral movable body.

  Further, the logo movable body 902 of the present embodiment has a character shape representing a title logo including at least a part of the model name of the game machine. In addition, the logo movable body 902 includes, as characters other than the title logo, for example, characteristic characters related to the characteristics of the game table and the title and motif of the game table (if the game table has a latent probability change in the game state, “ If it is a game machine with historical drama motifs such as “submarine” and “mystery”, “war and struggle” can be cited. The number of characters may be one character or two or more characters.

  Further, the logo movable body 902 may emit light in a single color or may emit light in a plurality of colors. Moreover, the logo movable body 902 may not be provided with the light emitting means. Moreover, the structure which at least 1 character part emits light among the 1st character part 910-the 7th character part 922 may be sufficient.

  Further, the logo movable body 902 is configured not to perform a multi-stage operation, and may be movable only by movement.

  Further, the logo movable body 902 may be capable of executing at least a movement operation in the front-rear direction. In this case, the logo movable body 902 may include a front and rear drive unit 1004 described later. Further, the logo movable body 902 may be movable in the front-rear direction when positioned at the initial position, or may be movable in the front-rear direction when positioned at the uppermost position, or may be positioned at the lowermost position. It may be possible to move in the front-rear direction.

  In the present embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 970, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used.

  In the present embodiment, a motor is used as a drive source for the logo movable body 902, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various actuators such as a solenoid may be used as a drive source for the logo movable body 902.

  Next, the upper front ornament 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration of the upper front ornament 1000 will be described with reference to FIG. 23 and FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 are exploded perspective views of the upper front ornament accessory 1000. FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 show a state in which the upper front decorative accessory 1000 is viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left. Note that FIG. 22 shows a part of an upper rear decoration accessory 1100 described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the upper front ornament 1000 is roughly divided into an upper front movable body 1002, a front / rear drive unit 1004, a vertical drive unit 1006, and an upper front movable body base unit 1008. Yes.

  First, the upper front movable body 1002 will be described with reference to FIG. The upper front movable body 1002 includes a lens movable body 1002a and a base portion 1002b. The lens movable body 1002a includes a front decoration portion 1010, an outer decoration portion 1012, an inner decoration portion 1014, a lower decoration portion 1016, and a lens 1018, and is disposed in the forefront of the upper front decoration accessory 1000. The lens movable body 1002a is movable forward from the base portion 1002b.

  The front decoration part 1010 has ten movable parts 1010a to 1010j. The movable parts 1010a to 1010j are individually molded with a transparent resin material, for example, have the same size and the same shape, and are arranged in an annular shape. Moreover, the decoration by the unevenness | corrugation is given to the front side of movable part 1010a-1010j.

  The outer decoration portion 1012 is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, has a circular shallow vessel shape, is arranged so that the bottom surface faces forward, and the surface is decorated with unevenness. The outer decorative portion 1012 has a circular opening 1012a at the center of the bottom surface. Further, the outer decorative portion 1012 can accommodate an inner decorative portion 1014 described later.

  The inner decorative portion 1014 has a base portion 1014a, a rotating disc 1014b, and a long hole disc 1014c. The base 1014a, the rotating disk 1014b, and the long holed disk 1014c are molded of, for example, a resin material, have a thin annular shape, and have substantially equal inner and outer diameters. The base 1014a, the rotating disk 1014b, and the long holed disk 1014c are arranged so as to overlap in this order from the rear side so that the opening centers coincide with each other. A circular opening 1014d is disposed so as to be surrounded by the base 1014a, the rotating disk 1014b, and the long holed disk 1014c.

  The base portion 1014a, the rotating disc 1014b, and the long hole disc 1014c are accommodated in the outer decorative portion 1012. Further, the base 1014a and the long hole disk 1014c are fixed to the outer decorative portion 1012 with screws, and the outer decorative portion 1012 is fixed to the right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044 described later with screws. For this reason, the base 1014a and the long hole disc 1014c are not rotatable. The rotating disk 1014b is sandwiched between the base 1014a and the long holed disk 1014c and is not fixed with a screw or the like, and can rotate within a predetermined angle range with the center of the opening 1014d as the center of rotation. Yes. In addition, the rotating disk 1014b has a relatively small contact area with the base 1014a and the long hole disk 1014c, and the frictional force between the base 1014a and the long hole disk 1014c is reduced.

  A gear portion 1014b1 is provided on the right rear surface of the rotating disk 1014b. The gear portion 1014b1 is formed so that teeth having the same shape and the same pitch are arranged in a circumferential direction and face rearward. Further, a notch (not shown) is provided on the outer periphery of the base portion 1014a in accordance with the operating range of the gear portion 1014b1. This prevents the gear portion 1014b1 and the base portion 1014a from coming into contact with each other and hinders the rotational operation of the rotating disk 1014b, and allows the gear portion 1014b1 to mesh with the spur gear 1024 disposed rearward. .

  Further, the rotating disk 1014b has a guide hole 1014b2 (not shown in FIG. 21, see FIG. 23). The guide hole portion 1014b2 has an oval shape extending so as to obliquely intersect from the upper left to the lower right with respect to a virtual circumference passing through the middle between the inner edge and the outer edge of the rotating disk 1014b. The rotating disk 1014b has nine guide hole portions (not shown) similar to the guide hole portions 1014b2. These guide holes are arranged at equal intervals.

  Further, the long hole disc 1014c has an oval long hole portion 1014c1 extending in the radial direction of the outer circumference of the long hole disc 1014c. Further, the long hole disc 1014c has nine long hole portions similar to the long hole portion 1014c1. These long hole portions are arranged at equal intervals.

  The guide hole part of the rotating disk 1014b and the long hole part of the long holed disk 1014c are arranged such that the lower ends overlap in the front-rear direction. For example, the lower end of the guide hole 1014b2 of the rotating disk 1014b and the long hole 1014c1 of the long holed disk 1014c are arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the inner decoration portion 1014 further includes a movable portion support portion 1014e. The movable portion support portion 1014e has a thin plate shape as a whole, and is arranged so that the plate surface is orthogonal to the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the movable portion support portion 1014e is formed of, for example, a resin material, and is integrally molded. The mounting portion 1014e1 protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the front side to the front, and a circular portion from the rear side to the rear. And a guided portion 1014e2 protruding in a column shape. The inner decoration portion 1014 has nine movable portion support portions similar to the movable portion support portion 1014e.

  The mounting portion 1014e1 projects forward from the opening 1012a of the outer decorative portion 1012 and is fixed to the lower end of the rear surface of the movable portion 1010a disposed in front of the outer decorative portion 1012 with a screw. Similarly, the movable parts 1014b to 1014j are fixed to the nine movable part support parts other than the movable part support part 1014e one by one with screws.

  The movable portion support portion 1014e is attached so that the guided portion 1014e2 can move in the guide hole portion 1014b2 of the rotating disc 1014b and in the long hole portion 1014c1 of the long hole disc 1014c. For this attachment, for example, a screw with a washer is used. The washer portion of the screw with the washer is larger than the width of the guide hole portion 1014b2 and the long hole portion 1014c1, and the guided portion 1014e2 is prevented from being detached from the guide hole portion 1014b2 and the long hole portion 1014c1. Similarly, the nine movable portion support portions other than the movable portion support portion 1014e have washers so that the guided portion can move in the guide hole portion of the rotating disc 1014b and in the long hole portion of the long hole disc 1014c. It can be attached with attached screws. The rotating disk 1014b, the long holed disk 1014c, and the movable part support part 1014e are used for operating the movable parts 1010a to 1010j.

  In addition, the lower decorative portion 1016 is fixed to the lower end of the outer decorative portion 1012 with a screw. The lower decorative portion 1016 is molded with, for example, a transparent resin material and decorated with unevenness.

  A lens 1018 is fixed to the rear side of the base portion 1014a of the inner decorative portion 1014 with a screw. The lens 1018 has a substantially circular shape, and the center of the lens 1018 and the centers of the openings 1012a and 1014d overlap in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, a convex lens is used as the lens 1018, but a concave lens may be used.

  In addition, an LED substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is disposed on the rear side of the base 1014a. The LED substrate has an annular shape similar to that of the base portion 1014a, and is disposed so that the central opening portion overlaps the opening portion 1014d. The lens movable body 1002a can emit light using the plurality of LEDs. The plurality of LEDs are included in the game board lamp 532 shown in FIG. 4 and are driven by the game board lamp drive circuit 530.

  A base portion 1002b is disposed behind the lens movable body 1002a. The base portion 1002b is integrally formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has an upper base portion 1002b1, a lower base portion 1002b2, a right base portion 1002b3, a left base portion 1002b4, and an opening portion 1002b5. The upper base portion 1002b1 is disposed on the upper portion of the base portion 1002b, and the lower base portion 1002b2 is disposed on the lower portion of the base portion 1002b. The upper base portion 1002b1 and the lower base portion 1002b2 are arranged in the same plane whose front surfaces are orthogonal to the front-rear direction.

  The right base portion 1002b3 and the left base portion 1002b4 are arranged to face each other in the left-right direction with the upper base portion 1002b1 and the lower base portion 1002b2 interposed therebetween. The right base portion 1002b3 is disposed to extend rearward from the right rear end of the upper base portion 1002b1 and the lower base portion 1002b2. Further, the left base portion 1002b4 extends rearward from the left rear ends of the upper base portion 1002b1 and the lower base portion 1002b2.

  The lower end side of the upper base portion 1002b1 is formed in a shape matching the upper contour of the lens 1018, and the upper end side of the lower base portion 1002b2 is formed in a shape matching the lower contour of the lens 1018. An opening 1002b5 having a contour that is the same as the contour shape of the lens 1018 is disposed so as to be surrounded by the upper base portion 1002b1 and the lower base portion 1002b2. The lens movable body 1002a is disposed in front of the base portion 1002b so that the lens 1018 and the opening portion 1002b5 overlap in the front-rear direction. The opening portions 1012b and 1014d, the lens 1018, and the opening portion 1002b5 form a visual recognition area where the rear of the lens movable body 1002a can be visually recognized, and the lens 1018 is disposed in the visual recognition area. Accordingly, the rear of the upper front movable body 1002 can be visually recognized from the front side through the openings 1012b and 1014d, the lens 1018, and the opening 1002b5.

  In addition, the lower end side of the lower base portion 1002b2 is formed in a shape that matches the upper surface of the lower decorative portion 1016. When the lens movable body 1002a is attached to the base portion 1002b, the lower decorative portion 1016 is positioned below the lower base portion 1002b2, and the base portion 1002b hinders the longitudinal movement of the lens movable body 1002a. There is no such thing.

  Next, the front / rear drive unit 1004 will be described. The front / rear drive unit 1004 is used to move the lens movable body 1002a in the front / rear direction. The front / rear drive unit 1004 includes a drive source unit 1004a, a right drive unit 1004b, a left drive unit 1004c, and a movable unit drive unit 1004d.

  The drive source unit 1004 a includes a motor 1020, a mounting member 1022, a spur gear 1024, a shaft 1026, and spur gears 1028, 1030, and 1032. The motor 1020 is a drive source for executing a moving operation of the lens movable body 1002a in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 1020. The motor 1020 is arranged with the rotation axis extending in the left-right direction.

  The mounting member 1022 is formed of, for example, a resin material and is used to mount the motor 1020 to the right side surface of the right base portion 1002b3 of the base portion 1002b. A through hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1020 passes is formed in the mounting member 1022. The motor 1020 is fixed to the right side surface of the mounting member 1022 with a screw so that the rotation shaft passes through the through hole. The attachment member 1022 is fixed to the right side surface of the right base portion 1002b3 with a screw.

  A spur gear 1024 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1020. The spur gear 1024 is disposed on the left side of the motor 1020 and between the mounting member 1022 and the right base portion 1002b3. In addition, a metal columnar shaft 1026 extending in the left-right direction is rotatably attached to the upper base portion 1002b1 of the base portion 1002b. The shaft 1026 has a length substantially the same as the length of the upper base portion 1002b1 in the left-right direction, and a spur gear 1028 is fixed to the right end. The spur gear 1028 is meshed with a spur gear 1024 to which the rotation shaft of the motor 1020 is fixed. A spur gear 1032 is fixed to the left end of the shaft 1026.

  A spur gear 1032 is rotatably attached to the left side surface of the left base portion 1002b4 of the base portion 1002b. The spur gear 1032 is meshed with a spur gear 1030 fixed to the left end of the shaft 1026. The spur gear 1032 is arranged so that the position in the vertical direction is the same as that of the spur gear 1024.

  The spur gears 1024, 1028, 1030, and 1032 are arranged so that the rotation axis faces the left-right direction. Further, the spur gear 1024 and the spur gear 1032 have the same pitch circle diameter, the same shape, and the same number of teeth. The spur gear 1028 and the spur gear 1030 have the same pitch circle diameter, the same shape, and the same number of teeth. The spur gears 1024 and 1032 have a larger pitch circle diameter and a larger number of teeth than the spur gears 1028 and 1030. The gear ratio between the spur gear 1024 and the spur gear 1028 and the gear ratio between the spur gear 1030 and the spur gear 1032 are both equal and less than one.

  Therefore, the rotational motion by the motor 1020 is transmitted to the spur gear 1028 via the spur gear 1024 with the rotational speed increased at a predetermined ratio. Further, since the spur gear 1028 and the spur gear 1030 are fixed to the shaft 1026, they rotate in the same direction at the same rotational speed. The rotational motion of the spur gear 1030 is transmitted to the spur gear 1032 after the rotational speed is reduced by a predetermined ratio. Thereby, the rotational speed of the spur gear 1032 is the same as the rotational speed of the spur gear 1024. Further, the rotation directions of the spur gear 1024 and the spur gear 1032 are the same. The drive source unit 1004a can transmit the rotational motion of the motor 1020 to the spur gear 1024 and the spur gear 1032 with the same rotational direction and the same rotational speed.

  Next, the right drive unit 1004b and the left drive unit 1004c will be described. The right drive unit 1004b and the left drive unit 1004c are used to convert the rotational motion of the motor 1020 into a linear motion and transmit it to the lens movable body 1002a.

  The right drive unit 1004b includes a right guide rod 1034, a right guide rod fixing member 1036, and a right moving member 1038. The right guide rod 1034 is made of metal, has a cylindrical shape, and is arranged extending in the front-rear direction. The front end of the right guide rod 1034 is fixed to the right front portion of the right base portion 1002b3 of the base portion 1002b, and the rear end is fixed to the right rear portion of the right base portion 1002b3 by the right guide rod fixing member 1036.

  The right moving member 1038 is disposed on the right side of the right base portion 1002b3 and below the spur gear 1024. The right moving member 1038 is molded of a resin material, has a thin plate rectangular shape as a whole, and is arranged such that the longitudinal direction is parallel to the front-rear direction and the plate surface is orthogonal to the left-right direction. On the upper end side of the right moving member 1038, a rack portion 1038a in which identical teeth are cut at the same pitch and arranged in the front-rear direction is provided. The rack portion 1038 a is meshed with the spur gear 1024. Further, a guided portion 1038b having a cylindrical through hole is provided on the right side surface of the right moving member 1038. The right moving member 1038 is attached such that the guided portion 1038b surrounds the right guide rod 1034 and is slidable. The right moving member 1038 receives the rotational motion of the spur gear 1024 by the rack portion 1038a and converts it into linear motion, and is guided by the right guide rod 1034 so as to be linearly movable in the front-rear direction.

  Further, a front groove 1038c and a rear groove 1038d extending in the vertical direction are provided on the right side surface of the right moving member 1038. The front groove 1038c and the rear groove 1038d extend in parallel with the same length. The functions of the front groove 1038c and the rear groove 1038d will be described later.

  The left drive unit 1004c includes a left guide rod 1040, a left guide rod fixing member 1042, and a left moving member 1044. The left guide rod 1040 is made of metal and has a cylindrical shape, and is arranged extending in the front-rear direction. The left guide rod 1040 is arranged in parallel with the right guide rod 1034 at the same vertical position as the right guide rod 1034. The front end of the left guide rod 1040 is fixed to the left front portion of the left base portion 1002b4 of the base portion 1002b, and the rear end is fixed to the left rear portion of the left base portion 1002b4 by the left guide rod fixing member 1042.

  The left moving member 1044 is disposed on the left side of the left base 1002b4 and below the spur gear 1032. The left moving member 1044 is molded of a resin material, has a thin plate rectangular shape as a whole, and is arranged such that the longitudinal direction is parallel to the front-rear direction and the plate surface is orthogonal to the left-right direction. The left moving member 1044 has the same vertical position and front / rear position as the right moving member 1038 and is arranged in parallel with the right moving member 1038. On the upper end side of the left moving member 1044, a rack portion 1044a is provided in which teeth of the same shape are engraved at the same pitch and arranged in the front-rear direction. The rack portion 1044a is meshed with the spur gear 1032. Further, a guided portion (not shown) similar to the guided portion 1038b is provided on the left side surface of the left moving member 1044. The left moving member 1044 is attached so that the guided portion surrounds the left guide rod 1040 and is slidable. The left moving member 1044 receives the rotational motion of the spur gear 1032 by the rack portion 1044a and converts it into a linear motion, and is guided by the left guide rod 1040 so as to be linearly movable in the front-rear direction.

  The right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044 have the same size. The rack portion 1038a and the rack portion 1044a have the same shape, and the tooth pitch and the number of teeth are equal. Further, when the motor 1020 is driven, the spur gear 1024 and the spur gear 1032 rotate in the same direction at the same rotational speed. The rack portion 1038a is meshed with the spur gear 1024, and the rack portion 1044a is meshed with the spur gear 1032. Therefore, when the motor 1020 is driven, the right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044 have the same speed in the same direction. It is designed to move linearly parallel to each other in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the right rear surface of the base portion 1014a of the inner decorative portion 1014 of the lens movable body 1002a is fixed to the front side edge of the right moving member 1038 with a screw. Similarly, the left rear surface of the base portion 1014a of the inner decorative portion 1014 of the movable lens body 1002a is fixed to the front end side of the left moving member 1044 with a screw. For this reason, the lens movable body 1002a moves linearly in the front-rear direction in conjunction with the linear movement of the right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044.

  When the lens movable body 1002a moves forward from the base portion 1002b, the front end portion of the guided portion 1038b of the right moving member 1038 comes into contact with the front end of the right base portion 1002b3 of the base portion 1002b. Similarly, when the lens movable body 1002a moves forward from the base portion 1002b, the front end portion of the guided portion of the left moving member 1044 comes into contact with the front end of the left base portion 1002b4 of the base portion 1002b. Yes. Thus, the guided portion 1038b of the right moving member 1038 and the guided portion (not shown) of the left moving member 1044 function as a mechanical end of the lens movable body 1002a.

  Next, the movable unit driving unit 1004d will be described. The movable portion drive unit 1004d is used to drive the movable units 1010a to 1010j of the front decoration unit 1010 when the lens movable body 1002a moves in the front-rear direction.

  The movable portion drive unit 1004d includes a guided member with rack 1050, a guided shaft 1052, a slide bearing 1054, a spur gear 1056, a mounting member 1058, and a decorative member 1060 with a guide groove.

  The guided member with rack 1050 is integrally formed of a resin material and has an attachment portion 1050a and a rack portion 1050b. The attachment portion 1050a has a thin plate shape and is disposed so that the plate surface is orthogonal to the left-right direction. Further, a front groove 1038c and a rear groove 1038d extending in the vertical direction are provided on the right side surface of the right moving member 1038, and two protrusions (not shown) are provided on the left side surface of the mounting portion 1050a. The guided member with rack 1050 is attached to the right moving member 1038 so that one projection can slide in the front groove 1038c and the other guided portion can slide in the rear groove 1038d. Accordingly, the guided member with rack 1050 is movable in the vertical direction along the front groove 1038c and the rear groove 1038d of the right moving member 1038.

  A rack portion 1050b is disposed at the front end portion of the attachment portion 1050a. The rack portion 1050b has the same shape of teeth formed at the same pitch, and the tooth tip faces forward.

  A left end of a guided shaft 1052 made of a columnar metal and extending in the left-right direction is fixed to the right side surface of the mounting portion 1050a. A cylindrical resin sliding bearing 1054 is attached to the right end of the guided shaft 1052.

  A spur gear 1056 is attached to the right side surface of the right side moving member 1038 so as to be rotatable in a plane parallel to the front-rear direction. The spur gear 1056 is disposed in front of the rack portion 1050b so that the rotation shaft is directed in the left-right direction, and meshed with the rack of the rack portion 1050b.

  A mounting member 1058 is arranged on the right side of the guided member with rack 1050 and the spur gear 1056. The attachment member 1058 is integrally molded with a light shielding piece 1058a made of, for example, a black resin material. The attachment member 1058 is fixed to the right moving member 1038 by a screw that passes through the circular opening at the center of the spur gear 1056.

  The spur gear 1056 is meshed with the gear portion 1014b1 of the inner decoration portion 1014. Thus, when the spur gear 1056 rotates, the rotating disk 1014b of the inner decorative portion 1014 rotates in conjunction with it.

  In addition, a decorative member 1060 with a guide groove, which is molded of a transparent resin material, for example, is fixed below the right side surface of the right base portion 1002b3 of the base portion 1002b with a screw. A guide groove 1060a (not shown in FIG. 21, see FIG. 23) is provided on the surface (left side surface) of the decorative member 1060 with guide groove facing the right base portion 1002b3. The guide groove 1060a is formed to extend from the lower rear to the upper front. A slide bearing 1054 is disposed so as to be slidable in the guide groove 1060a. A slide bearing 1054 is fixed to one end of the guided shaft 1052, a guided member with rack 1050 is fixed to the other end of the guided shaft 1052, and the guide groove 1060a has a moving direction of the guided member 1050 with rack. You can guide.

  When the right moving member 1038 moves forward from the initial position, the guided member with rack 1050 is guided by the guide groove 1060a and moves upward along the front groove 1038c and the rear groove 1038d. As a result, the spur gear 1056 meshed with the rack of the rack portion 1050b of the guided member with rack 1050 rotates, and the rotating disk 1014b of the inner decorative portion 1014 provided with the gear portion 1014b1 meshed with the spur gear 1056. Rotates. The movable portions 1010a to 1010j are operated in conjunction with the rotating operation of the rotating disk 1014b. This operation principle will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, a photosensor 1062 is fixed to the attachment member 1022 with a screw. The photosensor 1062 is used to detect the position of the lens movable body 1002a. The photosensor 1062 is included in the various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 4 and is connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. The photosensor 1062 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit that are arranged to face each other in the vertical direction across the space.

  The mounting member 1058 fixed to the right moving member 1038 that operates integrally with the lens movable body 1002a is provided with a light shielding piece 1058a made of, for example, a black resin material. Note that the entire attachment member 1058 may be integrally formed of a black resin material. In the case where the lens movable body 1002a is located at the rearmost position starting from the base portion 1002b, the light shielding piece 1058a enters between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion of the photosensor 1062. In the present embodiment, the photo sensor 1062 detects the presence or absence of the light shielding piece 1058a that moves integrally with the lens movable body 1002a, and the first sub-control unit 400 detects the lens when the photo sensor 1062 detects the light shielding piece 1058a. When it is determined that the movable body 1002a is located at the rearmost position and the photosensor 1062 does not detect the light shielding piece, it is determined that the lens movable body 1002a is located at a position other than the rearmost position.

  A substrate 1064 is fixed to the left side surface of the left base portion 1002b4 of the base portion 1002b with screws. The motor 1020, the LED substrate (not shown) provided in the inner decoration portion 1014, and the photosensor 1062 are connected to the substrate 1064 by wiring not shown. The motor 1020 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 4 through the board 1064, the LED board is connected to the game board lamp drive circuit 530 shown in FIG. 4 through the board 1064, and the photo sensor 1062 is connected through the board 1064. Are connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. Thereby, the wiring which connects the upper front ornament 1000 and the 1st sub control part 400 and the 2nd sub control part 500 can be collected.

  The upper front movable body 1002 having the lens movable body 1002a and the base portion 1002b is attached to the upper front movable body base portion 1008. The upper front movable body base portion 1008 is made of metal and is integrally formed, and has a left base portion 1008a and an upper base portion 1008b. The left base portion 1008a extends in the up-down direction and is disposed on the left side of the base portion 1002b. The upper base 1008b is disposed to extend rightward from the upper end of the left base 1008a. The upper base portion 1008b is disposed above the base portion 1002b.

  In addition, a cylindrical metal guide rod 1066 extending in the vertical direction is attached to the left base portion 1008a. An upper end fixing portion 1008a1 is provided at the upper end of the left base portion 1008a, and a lower end fixing portion 1008a2 is provided at the lower end of the left base portion 1008a. The upper end of the guide rod 1066 is fixed to the upper end fixing portion 1008a1, and the lower end of the guide rod 1066 is fixed to the lower end fixing portion 1008a2. The lower end fixing portion 1008a2 functions as a mechanical end of the upper front movable body 1002.

  In addition, on the left side surface of the left base portion 1002b4 of the base portion 1002b, for example, a decorative member 1068 with a guided portion molded by a transparent resin material is fixed with a screw. A guided portion 1068a is provided on the upper portion of the decorative member with guided portion 1068, and the guided portion 1068a is slidably attached to the guide rod 1066. The upper front movable body 1002 is driven by a vertical driving unit 1006 described later, and is guided by a guide rod 1066 so as to be movable in the vertical direction.

  The upper front movable body base portion 1008 to which the upper front movable body 1002 is attached is fixed to the upper accessory base portion 850 with screws as shown in FIG. The upper accessory base 850 is used to attach the upper front ornament 1000 and an upper rear ornament 1100 described later to the unit main body 822. The upper accessory base 850 is integrally formed of, for example, a resin material, and has a right base 850a, a center base 850b, and a left base 850c. Specifically, the left base portion 1008a of the upper front movable body base portion 1008 is fixed to the right end of the left base portion 850c of the upper accessory base portion 850 with a screw, and the upper base portion 1008b of the upper front movable body base portion 1008 is It is fixed to the upper left side of the right base 850a of the accessory base 850 with a screw.

  Next, the vertical drive unit 1006 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. The vertical drive unit 1006 is used to move the upper front movable body 1002 in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 22, the vertical drive unit 1006 includes a motor 1070, a spur gear 1072, a power transmission unit 1074, an outer rail 1078, an upper photosensor 1084, and a lower photosensor 1086, and as shown in FIG. A rack mounting member 1076, an inner rail 1080, and tension coil springs 1082r and 1082l are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the motor 1070, the spur gear 1072, the power transmission unit 1074, the outer rail 1078, the upper photosensor 1084, and the lower photosensor 1086 are attached to the right base 850 a of the upper accessory base 850.

  The motor 1070 is a drive source for executing a vertical movement operation of the upper front movable body 1002. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 1070. The motor 1070 has a rotation shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a spur gear 1072 fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1070 is disposed behind the motor 1070. Spur gear 1072 is rotatably attached to right base 850a.

  The power transmission unit 1074 is used to convert the rotational motion of the motor 1070 into a linear motion and transmit it to the upper front movable body 1002. The power transmission unit 1074 includes a rack 1074a, a guided member 1074b, a rack cover 1074c, and spur gears 1074d1 to 1074d3. The rack 1074a is formed of a resin material, has an elongated shape, and has flexibility that allows bending. The rack 1074a is embedded with an iron core wire (not shown) extending in the length direction to obtain a required strength. In this embodiment, the rack 1074a is bent and used so as to draw an upwardly convex arcuate curve. Inside the rack 1074a bent so as to protrude upward, teeth of the same shape are carved at the same pitch, and the rack 1074a is meshed with the spur gear 1072.

  Further, a guided member 1074b, which is molded with, for example, a resin material and includes a rack having the same shape and the same pitch as the rack 1074a, is attached to the lower right end portion of the rack 1074a. The guided member 1074b and the rack 1074a are engaged with each other, and the rack 1074a and the guided member 1074b operate integrally.

  The rack cover 1074c is formed of, for example, a resin material, and has a shape in which the character “shi” is inverted vertically and horizontally when viewed from the front. A guide groove (not shown) extending along the shape of the rack cover 1074c is provided on the rear side (middle side) of the rack cover 1074c, and the rack 1074a and the guided member 1074b are accommodated in the guide groove. Yes. The guided member 1074b is movably disposed while being guided by the guide groove. The rack 1074a is movable along the shape of the rack cover 1074c in conjunction with the guided member 1074b. Further, the rack cover 1074c is fixed to the right base 850a with screws, and covers the rack 1074a and the guided member 1074b so as not to be detached from the right base 850a.

  The spur gears 1074d1, 1074d2, and 1074d3 are rotatably attached to the right base 850a and are covered with a rack cover 1074c. The spur gears 1074d1, 1074d2, and 1074d3 are arranged along the guide groove in the rack cover 1074c and meshed with the rack 1074a. The spur gears 1074d1, 1074d2, and 1074d3 are used to allow the rack 1074a to move smoothly along the guide groove. A roller may be used so that the rack 1074a can move smoothly along the guide groove in the rack cover 1074c.

  Further, the lower left end of the rack 1074a is exposed from the rack cover 1074c, and is fixed to the right side surface of the right base portion 1002b3 of the base portion 1002b by a rack mounting member 1076 shown in FIG. As a result, the power transmission unit 1074 converts the rotational motion of the motor 1070 transmitted via the spur gear 1072 to the linear motion by the rack 1074a and transmits it to the base portion 1002b of the upper front movable body 1002.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 22, a metallic outer rail 1078 extending in the vertical direction is fixed to the left end of the right base 850a with a screw. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, a metal inner rail 1080 extending in the vertical direction is fixed to the rear surface of the right base portion 1002b3 of the base portion 1002b with screws. The inner rail 1080 is attached to the inner side of the outer rail 1078 so as to be movable along the outer rail 1078. A plurality of steel balls (not shown) are arranged on the rail contact surfaces of the outer rail 1078 and the inner rail 1080 so that the friction between the rails is reduced and the inner rail 1080 can slide smoothly. The outer rail 1078 and the inner rail 1080 are used to guide the upper front movable body 1002 in the vertical direction. Further, the upper end and the lower end of the outer rail 1078 function as a mechanical end of the upper front movable body 1002.

  As described above, the upper front movable body 1002 receives the rotational motion by the motor 1070 converted into the linear motion via the spur gear 1072 and the rack 1074a and is transmitted to the guide rod 1066, the outer rail 1078, and the inner rail 1080. Therefore, linear movement in the vertical direction is possible.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the tension coil spring 1082r has an upper end fixed to the upper base 1008b of the upper front movable body base 1008 and a lower end fixed to the right base 1002b3 of the base 1002b so that it can expand and contract in the vertical direction. Fixed to the rear side. Similarly, the tension coil spring 1082l has an upper end fixed to the upper base portion 1008b of the upper front movable body base portion 1008 and a lower end fixed to the rear side of the left base portion 1002b4 of the base portion 1002b so that it can expand and contract in the vertical direction. The

  The tension coil springs 1082r and 1082l have a natural length when the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position (initial position), and are natural when the upper front movable body 1002 is located at a position lower than the initial position. It becomes the state extended from the long. The tension coil springs 1082r and 1082l use the restoring force to assist the power of the motor 1070 for the upper front movable body 1002 to return to the initial position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22, an upper photosensor 1084 and a lower photosensor 1086 are fixed to the right base portion 850a with screws on the right side of the outer rail 1078. The upper photosensor 1084 is disposed so that the upper end of the outer rail 1078 is substantially the same in the vertical direction, and the lower photosensor 1086 is disposed so that the lower end of the outer rail 1078 is substantially the same in the vertical direction. . The upper photosensor 1084 and the lower photosensor 1086 are used to detect the position of the upper front movable body 1002. The upper photosensor 1084 and the lower photosensor 1086 are included in various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 4, and are connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG.

  The upper photosensor 1084 and the lower photosensor 1086 have a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion that are arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction across the space portion. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the mounting member 1022 fixed to the base portion 1002b of the upper front movable body 1002 is provided with a light shielding piece (not shown) formed of a light impermeable member. When the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position (initial position), the light shielding piece enters between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion of the upper photosensor 1084, and the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position. When located at the position, the light shielding piece enters between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion of the lower photosensor 1086. In the present embodiment, the upper photosensor 1084 and the lower photosensor 1086 detect the position of the upper front movable body 1002. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the initial position when the upper photosensor 1084 detects the light shielding piece provided on the mounting member 1022, and the lower photosensor 1086 When the light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the lowest position.

  A substrate 1088 is fixed to the right base 850a with screws. The motor 1070, the upper photosensor 1084, and the lower photosensor 1086 are connected to the substrate 1088 by wiring (not shown). The motor 1070 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 4 through the substrate 1088, and the upper photosensor 1084 and the lower photosensor 1086 are connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. 4 through the substrate 1088. The wiring connecting the substrate 1088 and the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 is accommodated in a wiring cover 850a1 fixed with screws to the rear side of the right end of the right base 850a. Thereby, the wiring which connects the upper front ornament 1000 and the 1st sub control part 400 and the 2nd sub control part 500 can be collected.

  Next, the operation of the lens movable body 1002a and the movable portions 1010a to 1010j will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 shows a state in which the upper front movable body 1002 is viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left. In FIG. 23, the upper front movable body 1002 is disassembled into a lens movable body 1002a and a base portion 1002b, and the lens movable body 1002a is further disassembled into an outer decorative portion 1012 and an inner decorative portion 1014. In FIG. 23, the movable portion 1010a and the movable portion support portion 1014e are illustrated as being removed from the inner decoration portion 1014. In FIG. 23, the principle of operation of the movable part 1010a to the movable part 1010j will be described by taking the movable part 1010a and the movable part support part 1014e as examples.

  FIG. 23A shows a state where the lens movable body 1002a is located at the end of the movement range. The lens movable body 1002a is located at the end in the initial state. The lens movable body 1002a is driven by the front / rear drive unit 1004 and can move forward from the rearmost position. Further, the movable portions 1010a to 1010j can be moved in conjunction with the moving operation of the lens movable body 1002a. When the lens movable body 1002a is located at the rearmost position, the movable portions 1010a to 1010j are located at the initial positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23A, when the lens movable body 1002a is located at the rearmost position, the front portion of the rack portion 1038a of the right moving member 1038 meshes with the spur gear 1024. Similarly, the front portion of the rack portion 1044 a of the left moving member 1044 meshes with the spur gear 1032. The guided member with rack 1050 is positioned at the lowermost end, and the upper portion of the rack portion 1050 b is engaged with the spur gear 1056. Further, the lower end portions of the guide hole portion 1014b2 of the rotating disk 1014b and the long hole portion 1014c1 of the long hole disk 1014c overlap in the front-rear direction. When the movable portion 1010a is located at the initial position, the guided portion 1014e2 of the movable portion support portion 1014e is at the lower end of the guide hole portion 1014b2 of the rotating disc 1014b and the lower end of the elongated hole portion 1014c1 of the long hole disc 1014c. It comes to contact.

  FIG. 23B shows a state where the lens movable body 1002a has moved to the forefront position in the movement range. The movable lens body 1002a is configured such that the rotational motion of the motor 1020 is converted into a linear motion and transmitted, and is linearly movable in the front-rear direction.

  Specifically, the motor 1020 is driven, and the rotation shaft of the motor 1020 and the spur gear 1024 fixed to the rotation shaft rotate clockwise as viewed from the right to the left. As a result, the right moving member 1038 having the rack portion 1038 a meshed with the spur gear 1024 is guided by the right guide rod 1034 and moved forward. Further, the spur gear 1028 meshed with the spur gear 1024, the shaft 1026, and the spur gear 1030 rotate counterclockwise. A spur gear 1032 is meshed with the spur gear 1030, and a rack portion 1044 a of the left moving member 1044 is meshed with the spur gear 1032. For this reason, the left moving member 1044 is guided by the left guide rod 1040 and moves forward.

  The right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044 move forward in parallel with each other at the same speed. In addition, the lens movable body 1002a is fixed to the front end portions of the right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044. Therefore, the movable lens body 1002a can move forward in conjunction with the forward movement of the right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044.

  As the right moving member 1038 moves forward, the guided member with rack 1050 attached to the right moving member 1038 rises while moving forward. Specifically, a slide bearing 1054 attached to the guided member with rack 1050 via the guided shaft 1052 is guided and moved by the guide groove 1060a of the decorative member 1060 with guide groove. Since the decorative member 1060 with the guide groove is fixed to the base portion 1002b, it does not move in conjunction with the movement operation of the lens movable body 1002a in the front-rear direction. The guide groove 1060a extends obliquely from the lower rear to the upper front. For this reason, the slide bearing 1054 is guided by the guide groove 1060a and moves upward. With this moving operation, the guided member with rack 1050 moves upward along the front groove 1038c and the rear groove 1038d provided in the right moving member 1038 and extending in the front-rear direction. As the guided member with rack 1050 moves upward, the spur gear 1056 meshed with the rack portion 1050b of the guided member with rack 1050 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the right to the left. Thereby, the rotating disk 1014b including the gear portion 1014b1 meshed with the spur gear 1056 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front.

  In conjunction with the clockwise rotation of the rotating disk 1014b, the movable portions 1010a to 1010j are linearly moved toward the outer periphery of the inner decorative portion 1014. Next, the operation principle of the movable parts 1010a to 1010j will be described by taking the movable part 1010a as an example. As described above, the movable portion 1010a is fixed to the movable portion support portion 1014e.

  By the clockwise rotation of the rotating disk 1014b, the guide hole portion 1014b2 of the rotating portion 1010b moves clockwise. The guided portion 1014e2 is guided by a guide hole portion 1014b2 extending in a direction intersecting obliquely from the upper left to the lower right with respect to a virtual circumference passing through the middle of the inner edge and the outer edge of the rotating disk 1014b. Move from the lower right corner to the upper left corner. At this time, the movable portion support portion 1014e is provided along the long hole portion 1014c1 that is fixed to the outer decorative portion 1012 and is not rotated and is provided in the long hole portion 1014c1 that extends in the radial direction of the outer periphery of the long hole circular plate 1014c. The inner decorative portion 1014 moves from the inner peripheral side to the outer peripheral side. Thereby, the movable part 1010a fixed to the movable part support part 1014e moves from the inner peripheral side of the inner decorative part 1014 to the outer peripheral side. In this manner, the movable portion support portion 1014e linearly moves toward the outer periphery in conjunction with the clockwise rotation operation of the rotating disk 1014b.

  Similarly, the movable parts 1010b to 1010j are moved from the inner peripheral side to the outer peripheral side of the inner decorative part 1014 in conjunction with the clockwise rotation of the rotary disk 1014b. In this way, in conjunction with the forward movement of the lens movable body 1002a, the front decoration unit 1010 can perform an opening operation such as opening an umbrella. The operating principle of the front decoration 1010 is the same as the operating principle of the movable body 1425 shown in FIG. 30 and described later.

  Naturally, the lens movable body 1002a can move backward from the position shown in FIG. 23 (b) to the position shown in FIG. 23 (a). In this case, the motor 1020 and the spur gears 1024, 1028, 1030, and 1032 rotate reversely to the case where the lens movable body 1002a moves forward, and the right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044 move backward. Further, the guided member with rack 1050 moves downward, and the spur gear 1056 and the rotating disk 1014b rotate in the reverse direction to the case where the lens movable body 1002a moves forward. Thereby, the movable parts 1010a to 1010j return to the initial positions.

  Next, the vertical movement operation of the upper front movable body 1002 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is an external view of the upper front ornament 1000 as viewed from the front side. The upper front movable body 1002 is driven by the vertical drive unit 1006 and can move in the vertical direction. Further, as described above, the lens movable body 1002a is included in the upper front movable body 1002.

  FIG. 24A shows a state where the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the initial position (upper position). The initial position of the upper front movable body 1002 is the uppermost position in the movement range of the upper front movable body 1002.

  FIG. 24B shows a state where the upper front movable body 1002 has moved to an intermediate position between the uppermost position and the lowermost position. When the upper front movable body 1002 moves downward, the rotation shaft of the motor 1070 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front side. As a result, the spur gear 1072 fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor 1070 rotates counterclockwise, the lower right end of the rack 1074a meshed with the spur gear 1072 is raised, and the lower left end is lowered. At this time, the rack 1074a includes a portion that moves while being guided linearly and a portion that moves while being guided in an arc shape. Since the lower left end of the rack 1074a is fixed to the upper front movable body 1002, the upper front movable body 1002 is guided by the guide rod 1066, the outer rail 1078, and the inner rail 1080 in conjunction with the operation of the rack 1074a. Moving.

  FIG. 24C shows a state where the upper front movable body 1002 has moved to the lowest position. The lower end fixing portion 1008a2 that fixes the guide rod 1066 functions as a mechanical end, and the upper front movable body 1002 is stopped.

  Naturally, the upper front movable body 1002 can move upward from the lowermost position shown in FIG. 24C toward the uppermost position (initial position) shown in FIG. When the upper front movable body 1002 moves upward, the rotation shaft and the spur gear of the motor 1070 rotate clockwise as viewed from the front side, the lower right end of the rack 1074a is lowered, and the lower left end is raised. In conjunction with this, the upper front movable body 1002 is guided by the guide rod 1066, the outer rail 1078, and the inner rail 1080 and moves upward. When the upper front movable body 1002 moves upward, the upper end of the outer rail 1078 functions as a mechanical end.

  Next, operations of the upper front movable body 1002 and the lens movable body 1002a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is an external view of the upper front ornament 1000 viewed from the front side.

  In order to avoid contact with the logo movable body 902 described above, the lens movable body 1002a is moved in the front-rear direction when the logo movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position and the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position. It is supposed to move. FIG. 25 shows a state where the lens movable body 1002a has moved forward, similarly to the state shown in FIG. As the lens movable body 1002a moves forward, as described above, the movable portions 1010a to 1010j of the front decorative portion 1010 move toward the outer periphery of the lens movable body 1002a, and the front decorative portion 1010 opens. Thereby, it can be shown to a player as the lens movable body 1002a became large.

  In the present embodiment, stepping motors are used for the motors 1020 and 1070, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used.

  In this embodiment, the motor is used as the drive source for the lens movable body 1002a and the upper front movable body 1002, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various actuators such as solenoids may be used as driving sources for the lens movable body 1002a and the upper front movable body 1002.

  In this embodiment, a convex lens (biconvex lens) is used as the lens 1018, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various lenses such as a plano-convex lens, a positive meniscus lens, a concave lens (biconcave lens), a plano-concave lens, and a negative meniscus lens can be used.

  Further, instead of the lens 1018, a transparent resin plate (for example, an acrylic plate) or a glass plate may be disposed.

  Further, instead of the tension coil springs 1082r and 1082l, an elastic member such as a spiral spring, a leaf spring, or rubber may be used.

  The upper front movable body 1002 may include a sub display device smaller than the decorative symbol display device 208. Sub display devices include liquid crystal display devices, dot matrix display devices, 7 segment display devices, organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display devices, reel (drum) display devices, leaf display devices, plasma displays, and other displays including projectors. Devices can be used. The sub display device may be controlled by the first sub control unit 400, may be controlled by the second sub control unit 500, and the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 are the same. Alternatively, a display control unit may be provided and controlled by the display control unit.

  Next, the positional relationship between the logo movable body 902 and the upper front movable body 1002 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 24. When the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position shown in FIG. 19A, the area occupied by the logo movable body 902 is set as the first area, and is located at the uppermost position shown in FIG. 19B. In this case, the area occupied by the logo movable body 902 is defined as a third area. Further, when the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the initial position shown in FIG. 24A, the area occupied by the upper front movable body 1002 is set as the second area, and is located at the lowermost position shown in FIG. In this case, a region occupied by the upper front movable body 1002 is set as a fourth region. The area occupied by the lens movable body 1002a when the lens movable body 1002a moves forward and the upper front movable body 1002 moves forward is also included in the fourth area. The fourth region is a region including at least a part of the first region. As described above, the upper front movable body 1002 can move to a region where the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position. As a result, the logo movable body 902 and the upper front movable body 1002 can be associated with each other to perform various operations.

  When the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position and the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the upper front movable body 1002 is located behind the logo movable body 902, and the logo movable body 902 and the upper front movable body are located. It overlaps with the body 1002 in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the fourth area occupied by the upper front movable body 1002 when the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the lowest position overlaps with the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction.

  In addition, when the logo movable body 902 is located at the lowermost position shown in FIG. 19C, the area occupied by the logo movable body 902 is a fifth area. It includes an area in front of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fifth region includes at least a part of the fourth region.

  The pachinko machine 100 may include a sub display device smaller than the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub display device may be fixed to the game board 200. Sub display devices include liquid crystal display devices, dot matrix display devices, 7 segment display devices, organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display devices, reel (drum) display devices, leaf display devices, plasma displays, and other displays including projectors. Devices can be used. The sub display device may be controlled by the first sub control unit 400, may be controlled by the second sub control unit 500, and the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 are the same. Alternatively, a display control unit may be provided and controlled by the display control unit.

  The sub display device may be disposed behind the third region occupied by the logo movable body 902. In other words, the third region is a region including a region in which at least a part of the region is in front of the display region of the sub display device. Thereby, since the sub display device exists at the destination of the upward movement of the logo movable body 902, it may be possible to naturally pay attention to the upward movement operation of the logo movable body 902.

  Further, the logo movable body 902 may be disposed behind the upper front movable body 1002. In this case, the upper front movable body 1002 may be movable backward.

  Further, the upper front movable body 1002 may be movable upward from the initial position.

  Next, the upper back decoration accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 26 to 28. First, the configuration of the upper back decoration accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 22. 26 and 22 are exploded perspective views of the upper rear decoration accessory 1100. FIG. 26 and 22 show a state in which the upper rear decoration accessory 1100 is viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left. Note that FIG. 22 shows a part of the above-mentioned upper front decoration accessory 1000.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 22, the upper rear decoration accessory 1100 is roughly composed of an upper rear movable body 1102 and a vertical drive unit 1104.

  First, the upper rear movable body 1102 will be described with reference to FIG. 27 and FIG. FIG. 27 shows a state in which the upper rear movable body 1102 is viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left. The upper rear movable body 1102 includes a front cover 1102a, a rotationally movable part 1102b, a base part 1102c, and a rotational drive part 1102d.

  The front cover 1102 a is disposed in the forefront of the upper rear decoration accessory 1100. The front cover is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, has a substantially rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, and has a circular opening 1102a1 at the center.

  A rotationally movable portion 1102b is disposed behind the front cover 1102a. The rotation movable portion 1102b includes a geared rotation member 1110, a first gear member 1114, a second gear member 1116, a rotation decoration support member 1118, metal rods 1120, 1128, and 1132, spur gears 1122, 1130, and 1134, and a rotation decoration portion 1124. A frame member 1126, a light shielding piece 1136, and a lens member 1138.

  First, the function of the rotary movable unit 1102b will be briefly described. The rotation movable part 1102b is used to produce a game by rotating the rotation decoration part 1124. The geared rotary member 1110 is rotatably accommodated in the front cover 1102a. A gear portion 1110 b is provided on the outer periphery of the rotating member with gear 1110. Further, a spur gear 1142 fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor 1140 fixed to the base portion 1102c is meshed with the gear portion 1110b. For this reason, when the rotation shaft of the motor 1140 rotates clockwise, the spur gear 1142 rotates clockwise and the geared rotating member 1110 rotates counterclockwise.

  Further, a first gear member 1114 and a second gear member 1116 are fixed to the rear inner side of the geared rotary member 1110. A metal rod 1120 is attached to the first gear member 1114, and a spur gear 1122 is fixed to one end of the metal rod 1120. When the first gear member 1114 rotates together with the geared rotating member 1110, the spur gear 1122 rotates and moves along the gear portion 1102c2 of the base portion 1102c. The spur gear 1122 and the gear portion 1102c2 mesh with each other, and the spur gear 1122 rotates about the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120 while rotating. Further, since one end of the metal rod 1120 is fixed to the spur gear 1122, the metal rod 1120 rotates as the spur gear 1122 rotates.

  A rotating decoration support member 1118 is disposed in an approximately hemispherical internal space 1115 (see FIG. 27) surrounded by the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116. Since the other end of the metal bar 1120 is fixed to the rotating decoration support member 1118, the rotation decoration support member 1118 rotates as the metal bar 1120 rotates.

  In addition, metal bars 1128 and 1132 are attached to the rotary decoration support member 1118. Spur gears 1130 and 1132 are fixed to one end of the metal rods 1128 and 1132, and a rotary decoration portion 1124 is fixed to the other end. As the rotary decoration support member 1118 rotates, the spur gear 1130 rotates and moves along the first gear portion 1114e, and the spur gear 1134 rotates and moves along the second gear portion 1116e. The spur gear 1130 meshes with the first gear portion 1114e, and the spur gear 1134 meshes with the second gear portion 1116e. Therefore, the spur gear 1130 rotates with the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1128 rotating as the rotation axis while rotating, and the spur gear 1134 rotates with the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1132 as the rotation axis while rotating. Along with this, the metal bars 1128 and 1132 rotate, and the rotation decoration portion 1124 rotates as the metal bars 1128 and 1132 rotate.

The rotation decoration unit 1124 can perform a complicated rotation operation in the three-dimensional space by driving the motor 1140.
First, the rotation decoration portion 1124 is centered around the center of the rotation decoration support member 1118 between the support ends (between the rotation axes of the metal bars 1120) (between the metal bars 1128 and 1132). Hereinafter, the rotation center is referred to as “the rotation center of the rotation decoration portion 1124”, and the rotation can be rotated around an axis that passes through the rotation center and is parallel to the front-rear direction (hereinafter referred to as “front-rear axis”). When the motor 1140 is driven, the rotating member 1110 with the gear rotates around the front-rear axis with the center of the opening 1110a as the center of rotation (coincides with the center of rotation of the rotating decorative portion 1124 when viewed in the front-rear direction). The first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 fixed to the member 1110 also rotate around the longitudinal axis. As a result, the rotary decoration portion 1124 housed inside the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 rotates around the front-rear axis.
Secondly, the rotation decoration unit 1124 can rotate around an axis (hereinafter referred to as “left-right axis”) that passes through the rotation center of the rotation decoration unit 1124 and is parallel to the left-right direction. The rotation axis of the metal rod 1120 is orthogonal to the front-rear direction. Therefore, the geared rotating member 1110 is rotated around the front-rear axis and adjusted so that the rotation axis of the metal rod 1120 is parallel to the left-right direction, and then the geared rotating member 1110 is restricted so that it cannot rotate about the front-rear axis. When the motor 1140 is driven, the base portion 1102c to which the motor 1140 is attached rotates about the front-rear axis, and the gear portion 1102c2 of the base portion 1102c rotates about the front-rear axis. The rotation of the spur gear 1122 meshing with the gear portion 1102c2 causes the metal rod 1120 to rotate around the left and right axis, and the rotating decoration support member 1118 connected to the metal rod 1120 rotates around the left and right axis. Thereby, the rotation decoration part 1124 can rotate around the left-right axis.
Thirdly, the rotation decoration part 1124 can rotate around an axis (hereinafter referred to as “vertical axis”) that passes through the rotation center of the rotation decoration part 1124 and is parallel to the vertical direction. The extending direction of the metal rods 1128 and 1132 is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the metal rod 1120. That is, the rotation axis of the rotary decoration support member 1118 is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the metal rod 1120. Therefore, in the state in which the rotation decoration portion 1124 is rotated around the left and right axes as described above, the base portion 1102c is rotated around the left and right axes at a predetermined rotation speed, and the extending direction of the metal rods 1128 and 1132 is set in the vertical direction. If it is adjusted to be parallel to the rotation ornament part 1124, the rotation decoration part 1124 can be rotated around the vertical axis.
As described above, the rotation decoration unit 1124 can simultaneously perform rotation around the three orthogonal coordinate axes in the three-dimensional orthogonal coordinate system having the rotation center of the rotation decoration unit 1124 as the origin.

  The geared rotating member 1110 is disposed inside the front cover 1102a. The rotating member with gear 1110 has a circular shallow vessel shape, is arranged so that the bottom surface faces forward, and a substantially circular opening 1110a is opened at the center of the bottom surface. The opening 1110a is smaller than the opening 1102a1 of the front cover 1102a, and is disposed so as to overlap the opening 1102a1 in the front-rear direction.

  A recess (not shown) that can accommodate the geared rotary member 1110 is provided inside the front cover 1102a, and the geared rotary member 1110 is disposed in the recess. The geared rotary member 1110 is attached to the front cover 1102a so as to be rotatable about a virtual straight line passing through the center of the opening 1110a in the front-rear direction.

  Four rollers 1112a to 1112d are used for attaching the geared rotary member 1110 to the front cover 1102a. The rollers 1112a to 1112d are formed of, for example, a resin material and have a circular shape, and are rotatably attached to the four corners on the rear side of the front cover 1102a with screws with washers. The rotation axes of the rollers 1112a to 1112d are parallel to the rotation axis of the geared rotation member 1110. The rollers 1112a to 1112d are in contact with the rear edge of the geared rotary member 1110 to prevent the geared rotary member 1110 from being detached from the front cover 1102a.

  On the outer surface of the geared rotary member 1110, there is provided a gear portion 1110b in which teeth of the same shape are engraved at the same pitch and arranged circumferentially. The tooth trace of the gear part 1110b is parallel to the rotational axis of the geared rotary member 1110.

  In addition, a first gear member 1114 and a second gear member 1116 are arranged inside the rotating member 1110 with gears.

  The first gear member 1114 is integrally formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and includes a fixed portion 1114a, positioning portions 1114b and 1114c, a side surface portion 1114d, and a first gear portion 1114e. The fixed portion 1114 a is disposed on the front side of the first gear member 1114. The positioning portions 1114b and 1114c are disposed on the rear side of the fixed portion 1114a. The side surface portion 1114d extends rearward from the fixed portion 1114a, and has a curved shape that protrudes rightward in FIG. Further, the side surface portion 1114d is provided with a circular through hole (not shown), and a first gear portion 1114e in which teeth of the same shape are engraved at the same pitch in an arc shape centering on the through hole is provided on the side surface portion 1114d. It is arranged on the inner edge of the. The first gear portion 1114e is formed so that the tooth tip faces opposite to the convex direction of the curved surface of the side surface portion 1114d. The center of the pitch circle of the first gear portion 1114e is the center of the through hole. The central angle of the arc-shaped first gear portion 1114e is about 210 degrees.

  The second gear member 1116 is integrally formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and includes a fixed portion 1116a, positioning portions 1116b and 1116c, a side surface portion 1116d, and a second gear portion 1116e. The fixed portion 1116 a is disposed on the front side of the second gear member 1116. The positioning portions 1116b and 1116c are disposed on the rear side of the fixing portion 1116a. The side surface portion 1116d extends rearward from the fixed portion 1116a, and has a curved surface shape convex leftward in FIG. Further, the side surface portion 1116d is provided with a circular through hole (not shown), and a second gear portion 1116e in which teeth of the same shape are engraved at the same pitch in an arc shape centering on the through hole is provided on the side surface portion 1116d. It is arrange | positioned at the inner edge part. The second gear portion 1116e is formed such that the tooth tip faces opposite to the convex direction of the curved surface of the side surface portion 1116d. The center of the pitch circle of the second gear portion 1116e is the center of the through hole. The central angle of the second gear portion 1116e is about 210 degrees. The second gear portion 1116e has the same number of teeth as the first gear portion 1114e, and the pitch circle radius is longer than that of the first gear portion 1114e.

  Further, the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 are arranged such that the convex direction of the curved surface of the side surface portion 1114d and the convex direction of the curved surface of the side surface portion 1116d are opposite to each other, in other words, the first gear member 1114e. The tooth tips and the second gear portion 1116e are arranged to face each other so that the tooth tips are opposed to each other. The positioning portion 1114b of the first gear member 1114 is disposed to face the positioning portion 1116b of the second gear member 1116, and the positioning portion 1114c of the first gear member 1114 is disposed to face the positioning portion 1116c of the second gear member 1116. Is done. The end portions of the positioning portion 1114b of the first gear member 1114 and the positioning portion 1116b of the second gear member 1116 are in contact with each other and are fixed to each other with screws. Similarly, the end portions of the positioning portion 1114c of the first gear member 1114 and the positioning portion 1116c of the second gear member 1116 are in contact with each other and are fixed to each other with screws.

  Thereby, the relative position of the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 is determined. Further, a substantially hemispherical internal space 1115 (see FIG. 27) is formed so as to be surrounded by the side surface portion 1114d of the first gear member 1114 and the side surface portion 1114d of the second gear member 1116. The inner space 1115 has an open front surface, and the contour shape of the opening end of the inner space 1115 is defined by the shapes of the inner end sides of the fixed portion 1114a and the fixed portion 1116a, and the opening 1110a of the rotating member with gear 1110a It becomes the same as the shape.

  The first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 attached to each other are arranged in the same plane in which the front surface of the fixed portion 1114a and the front surface of the fixed portion 1116a of the second gear member 1116 are orthogonal to the front-rear direction. The fixed portion 1114a and the fixed portion 1116a are fixed to the geared rotary member 1110 with screws so that the opening end of the internal space 1115 and the opening 1110a of the geared rotary member 1110 are aligned. The first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 rotate integrally with the geared rotary member 1110. The first gear portion 1114e and the second gear portion 1116e are arranged so that teeth are arranged rearward from the opening end of the internal space 1115. The first gear portion 1114e and the second gear portion 1116e are arranged in a concentric arc shape with a predetermined gap, and the central angle of the arc is about 210 degrees.

  In the internal space 1115 between the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116, a rotary decoration support member 1118 is disposed. The rotary decoration support member 1118 has a pair of base portions 1118a and a cover portion 1118b which are molded of a transparent resin material and have an annular shape. A cover portion 1118b is fixed to the front side of the base portion 1118a with a screw.

  Further, the base portion 1118a is provided with a columnar mounting portion 1118a1 extending outward from the outer end side. The attachment portion 1118a1 is fitted into the circular through hole provided in the side surface portion 1116d of the second gear member 1116. A virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 1118a1 passes through the center of the annular base portion 1118a.

  The metal rod 1120 passes through the circular through hole provided in the side surface portion 1114d of the first gear member 1114, and one end of the metal rod 1120 is exposed to the outside of the internal space 1115 from the side surface portion 1114d. doing. A spur gear 1122 is fixed to one end of the metal rod 1120 exposed from the internal space 1115. The rotation axis of the spur gear 1122 is a virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120.

  The other end of the metal rod 1120 is disposed in the internal space 1115 and is fixed to the base 1118 a of the rotary decoration support member 1118. The metal rod 1120 is fixed to the opposite side of the attachment portion 1118a1, and the virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120 passes through the center of the annular base portion 1118a and coincides with the virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 1118a1. . The rotating decoration support member 1118 is supported by the mounting portion 1118a1 and the metal rod 1120, and is rotatable about an imaginary straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120 in conjunction with the rotation of the spur gear 1122.

  In addition, inside the rotating decoration support member 1118, for example, a rotating decoration portion 1124 formed in a hemispherical shape with a transparent resin material is disposed. The rotating decoration portion 1124 has a curved front portion and a flat rear portion. A predetermined decoration is given to the front part and the rear part of the rotary decoration part 1124. In addition, a frame member 1126 that is formed in a ring shape having a diameter substantially the same as that of the rotation decoration portion 1124 using, for example, a transparent resin material is fixed to the rear end portion of the rotation decoration portion 1124 with a screw.

  Two through holes (not shown) are provided in the base portion 1118 a of the rotary decoration support member 1118. A metal rod 1128 is disposed in one circular through hole (not shown) of the base 1118a. A virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1128 is orthogonal to a virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120. One end of the metal rod 1128 is exposed to the outside of the rotary decoration support member 1118, and the spur gear 1130 is fixed. The rotation axis of the spur gear 1130 is a virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1128. Further, the other end of the metal bar 1128 is disposed inside the rotation decoration support member 1118, and the rotation decoration portion 1124 is fixed. The length of the line segment from the spur gear 1130 extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1128 to the center of the rotary decoration portion 1124 is substantially equal to the pitch circle radius of the first gear portion 1114e. Therefore, the spur gear 1130 can mesh with the first gear portion 1114e of the first gear member 1114. In other words, the first gear portion 1114e is formed along the movement locus of the spur gear 1130.

  Further, a metal rod 1132 is disposed in the other circular through hole (not shown) of the base 1118a. The virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal bar 1132 coincides with the virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal bar 1128 and is orthogonal to the virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal bar 1120. One end of the metal rod 1132 is exposed to the outside of the rotary decoration support member 1118, and the spur gear 1134 is fixed. The rotation axis of the spur gear 1134 is an imaginary straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1132. In addition, the other end of the metal rod 1132 is disposed inside the rotation decoration support member 1118, and the rotation decoration portion 1124 is fixed. The length of the line segment from the spur gear 1134 extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1132 to the center of the rotating decoration portion 1124 is substantially equal to the pitch circle radius of the second gear portion 1116e. Therefore, the spur gear 1134 can mesh with the second gear portion 1116e of the second gear member 1116. In other words, the second gear portion 1116e is formed along the movement locus of the spur gear 1134.

  The rotation decoration portion 1124 is supported by the metal rods 1128 and 1132 and can rotate around an imaginary straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rods 1128 and 1132. The spur gear 1130 and the spur gear 1134 have the same pitch radius, the same shape, and the same number of teeth.

  Further, on the rear side of the first gear member 1114, for example, a light shielding piece 1136 molded of a black resin material is fixed with a screw. The light shielding piece 1136 can be detected by an upper photosensor 1144 and a lower photosensor 1146 described later.

  In addition, a lens member 1138 is disposed at the end of the rotationally movable portion 1102b. The lens member 1138 has a circular convex lens disposed at the center, and is fixed to the rear side of the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 with screws.

  A base portion 1102c is disposed behind the rotationally movable portion 1102b. The rotationally movable portion 1102b is attached to the front cover 1102a, and the front cover 1102a is fixed to the base portion 1102c with screws. As a result, the rotationally movable portion 1102b is accommodated in a space surrounded by the front cover 1102a and the base portion 1102c.

  The base portion 1102c is molded, for example, from a resin material and has a contour shape that fits the front cover 1102a. A circular opening 1102c1 is provided at the center of the base portion 1102c. The first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 are accommodated in the opening 1102c1.

  Further, a gear portion 1102c2 is formed on the front surface of the base portion 1102c. The gear portions 1102c2 are formed so that teeth having the same shape and the same pitch are arranged in a circle and the tooth tips face forward. The gear part 1102c2 and the opening part 1102c1 are arranged concentrically. The pitch circle radius of the gear portion 1102c2 is equal to the length of the imaginary line segment extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120 from the center of the rotating decoration portion 1124 to the spur gear 1122, and the spur gear 1122 and the gear portion 1102c2 Are engaged.

  Further, a light shielding piece 1102c3 made of a light opaque material such as a black resin material is provided at the upper left end of the base portion 1102c. The light shielding piece 1102c3 can be detected by an upper photosensor 1176 and a lower photosensor 1178 described later. Note that the entire base portion 1102c may be integrally formed of a black resin material or the like.

  Next, the rotation drive unit 1102d will be described. The rotation drive unit 1102d is used to rotationally drive the rotation decoration unit 1124 of the rotation movable unit 1102b. The rotation drive unit 1102d includes a motor 1140, a spur gear 1142, an upper photo sensor 1144, and a lower photo sensor 1146.

  The motor 1140 is a drive source for executing the rotational drive of the rotary decoration unit 1124. In the present embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 1140. The rotation shaft of the motor 1140 extends in the front-rear direction, and a through-hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1140 passes is formed in the base portion 1102c. The motor 1140 is fixed to the rear side of the base portion 1102c with a screw so that the rotation shaft passes through the through hole. A spur gear 1142 disposed between the front cover 1102a and the base portion 1102c is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1140. The spur gear 1142 is meshed with the gear portion 1110 b of the geared rotary member 1110.

  When the motor 1140 is driven and the spur gear 1142 is rotated, the geared rotating member 1110 having the gear portion 1110b meshed with the spur gear 1142 is rotated, and the first gear member is fixed to the geared rotating member 1110. 1114 and the second gear member 1116 also rotate. When the first gear member 1114 rotates, the spur gear 1122 fixed to one end of the metal rod 1120 rotates and moves along the gear portion 1102c2 of the base portion 1102c. Since the spur gear 1122 meshes with the gear portion 1102c2, the spur gear 1122 rotates about the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120 while rotating along the gear portion 1102c2. As a result, the metal rod 1120 to which one end of the spur gear 1122 is fixed rotates, and the rotary decoration support member 1118 to which the other end of the metal rod 1120 is fixed rotates. As a result, the spur gear 1130 rotates and moves along the first gear portion 1114e, and the spur gear 1134 rotates and moves along the second gear portion 1116e. When the spur gear 1130 is exposed from the opening end of the internal space 1115 and is not engaged with the first gear portion 1114e, the spur gear 1134 is engaged with the second gear portion 1116e. When the spur gear 1134 is exposed from the opening end of the internal space 1115 and is not engaged with the second gear portion 1116e, the spur gear 1130 is engaged with the first gear portion 1114e. The spur gear 1130 rotates about the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1128 while rotating and moving along the first gear portion 1114e. Similarly, the spur gear 1134 rotates around the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1132 while rotating and moving along the second gear portion 1116e. The metal rod 1128 is rotated by the rotation of the spur gear 1130, and the metal rod 1132 is rotated by the rotation of the spur gear 1134. A rotation decoration portion 1124 is fixed to the other ends of the metal rod 1128 and the metal rod 1132, and the rotation decoration portion 1124 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the metal rod 1128 and the metal rod 1132.

  An upper photosensor 1144 is fixed to the upper rear portion of the base portion 1102c with a screw, and a lower photosensor 1146 is fixed to the lower rear portion of the base portion 1102c with a screw. The upper photosensor 1144 and the lower photosensor 1146 are used to detect whether the rotary decoration unit 1124 has the front side (curved surface side) facing forward or the rear surface side (plane side) facing forward. . The upper photosensor 1144 and the lower photosensor 1146 are included in the various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 4, and are connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG.

  The upper photosensor 1144 and the lower photosensor 1146 have a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion that are arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction across the space portion. The light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the upper photosensor 1144 and the lower photosensor 1146 are disposed so as to be exposed in the opening 1102c1.

  When the rotation decoration part 1124 is stopped with the front side facing forward, the light shielding piece 1136 enters between the light receiving part and the light emission part of the upper photosensor 1144, and the rotation decoration part 1124 has the rear side facing backward. When facing, the light shielding piece 1136 enters between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion of the lower photosensor 1146. In the present embodiment, the upper photosensor 1144 and the lower photosensor 1146 detect the orientation of the rotation decoration portion 1124. When the upper photo sensor 1144 detects the light shielding piece 1136, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the rotary decoration portion 1124 faces the front side forward, and the lower photo sensor 1146 detects the light shielding piece 1136. Determines that the rotary decoration 1124 has the rear side facing forward.

  A substrate 1148 is fixed to the rear side of the base portion 1102c with screws. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the substrate 1148, and the plurality of LEDs are arranged so as to overlap with the center portion of the opening 1102c1 in the front-rear direction. Using the plurality of LEDs, the upper rear movable body 1102 can emit light from the rotatable movable portion 1102b, in particular, the rotated decorative portion 1124. The LEDs of the board 1148 are included in the game board lamp 532 shown in FIG. 4 and are driven by the game board lamp drive circuit 530.

  In addition, a motor 1140, an upper photosensor 1144, and a lower photosensor 1146 are connected to the substrate 1148 by wiring (not shown). The substrate 1148 is connected to a substrate 852 shown in FIG. 22 and described later by a flexible substrate 1150, and the substrate 852 is connected to a substrate 1180 shown in FIG. 22 and described later by wiring (not shown). The motor 1140 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 4 through the boards 1148, 852, and 1180, and the LEDs on the board 1148 are connected to the game board lamp drive circuit 530 shown in FIG. The upper photosensor 1144 and the lower photosensor 1146 are connected to a sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. 4 through substrates 1148, 852, and 1180. Thereby, the wiring which connects the upper back decoration object 1100, the 1st sub control part 400, and the 2nd sub control part 500 can be collected.

  Next, the vertical drive unit 1104 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 22. The vertical drive unit 1104 is used to move the upper rear movable body 1102 up and down. As shown in FIG. 22, the vertical drive unit 1104 includes a motor 1152, a spur gear 1154, an outer rail 1170, a tension coil spring 1174, an upper photosensor 1176, and a lower photosensor 1178. As shown in FIG. A crank mechanism 1155 is provided.

  First, the drive source of the vertical drive unit 1104 will be described with reference to FIG. The vertical drive unit 1104 has a motor 1152 as a drive source for executing the moving operation of the upper rear movable body 1102. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 1152. The rotating shaft of the motor 1152 extends in the front-rear direction, and a through hole through which the rotating shaft of the motor 1152 passes is formed in the left base portion 850c of the upper accessory base portion 850. The motor 1152 is fixed with a screw to the front side of the left base so that the rotation shaft passes through the through hole. Further, a spur gear 1154 disposed on the rear side of the left base 850c is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1152.

  Next, the crank mechanism 1155 will be described with reference to FIG. The crank mechanism 1155 is used to convert the rotational motion of the motor 1152 transmitted via the spur gear 1154 into a linear motion and transmit it to the upper rear movable body 1102. As shown in FIG. 26, the crank mechanism 1155 includes a spur gear 1156, a crank 1158, a metal rod 1160, a slide bearing 1162, and a torsion coil spring 1168. In FIG. 26, the upper accessory base 850 is shown in a simplified manner as compared with FIG.

  The spur gear 1156 is rotatably mounted on the right side of the spur gear 1154 on the rear side of the left base 850 c and meshed with the spur gear 1154. A crank 1158 is disposed behind the spur gear 1156. The crank 1158 is formed of, for example, a resin material, and a circular through hole is provided at the left end. A cylindrical metal rod 1160 extending in the front-rear direction is disposed in the through-hole, the front end of the metal rod 1160 is fixed to the left base portion 850c, and the rear end of the metal rod 1160 is fixed to the wiring fixing portion 854 shown in FIG. Is done. The wiring fixing unit 854 is used to fix a wiring (not shown) that connects a substrate 852 and a substrate 1180 described later so that the wiring does not get entangled with the spur gear 1154 and the crank mechanism 1155.

  The crank 1158 is rotatable within a predetermined angle range in a plane perpendicular to the vertical direction with the metal rod 1160 as a rotation axis. The crank 1158 is provided with an oval guide hole 1158a and an oval long hole 1158b in this order from the left.

  A cylindrical guided shaft (not shown) protruding rearward is provided at the rear outer end portion of the spur gear 1156, and the guided shaft is movable in the guide hole portion 1158a of the crank 1158. ing. The crank 1158 is rotatable by the rotational movement of the motor 1152 transmitted through the guided shaft of the spur gear 1156. Further, a sliding bearing 1162 is fitted on the guided shaft and is attached with screws from the rear side. The slide bearing 1162 is used so that the guided shaft of the spur gear 1156 can move smoothly in the guide hole 1158a. The plain bearing 1162 is formed of, for example, a resin material and has a cylindrical shape whose bottom surface has a shorter diameter than the width of the guide hole 1158a, and a circular flange is provided at the rear end. The diameter of the flange of the slide bearing 1162 is larger than the width of the guide hole 1158a so that the slide bearing 1162 is not fitted into the guide hole 1158a.

  Further, an oval left guide hole portion 850b1 extending in the vertical direction is provided at the left end of the central base portion 850b of the upper accessory base portion 850. A columnar left guided shaft portion 1102c4 extending rearward from the rear surface is provided at the upper left end of the rear surface of the base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102. The base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102 is attached to the central base portion 850b so that the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 can move in the left guide hole portion 850b1. The rear end portion of the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 is exposed behind the left guide hole portion 850b1, reaches the inside of the long hole portion 1158b of the crank 1158, and is movable in the long hole portion 1158b.

  Further, the left sliding bearing portion 1164 is fitted into the left guided shaft portion 1102c4. The left sliding bearing portion 1164 includes a front sliding bearing 1164a and a rear sliding bearing 1164b. The front sliding bearing 1164a is used for smooth movement of the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 in the left guide hole portion 850b1. The front sliding bearing 1164a is fitted into the front portion of the left guided shaft portion 1102c4. The front sliding bearing 1164a is formed of a resin material, for example, has a cylindrical shape whose bottom surface has a shorter diameter than the width of the left guide hole 850b1, and a circular flange is provided at the front end. The diameter of the flange is larger than the width of the left guide hole 850b1, and the front slide bearing 1164a is not fitted into the left guide hole 850b1.

  The rear sliding bearing 1164b is used for smooth movement of the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 in the long hole portion 1158b of the crank 1158. The rear sliding bearing 1164a is fitted in the rear portion of the left guided shaft portion 1102c4. Similar to the front sliding bearing 1164a, the rear sliding bearing 1164b is formed of, for example, a resin material and has a cylindrical shape with a bottom diameter smaller than the width of the long hole portion 1158b, and a circular flange is provided at the rear end. ing. The diameter of the flange is larger than the width of the long hole portion 1158b, and the rear sliding bearing 1164b is not fitted into the long hole portion 1158b. The left sliding bearing portion 1164 is attached to the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 from the rear sliding bearing 1164b side with a screw with a washer.

  Further, a right guide hole 850b2 extending in the front-rear direction is provided at the right end of the central base 850b of the upper accessory base 850. The right guide hole 850b2 is formed in the same length in parallel with the left guide hole 850b1.

  A columnar right guided shaft portion 1102c5 extending rearward from the rear surface is provided at the upper right end of the rear surface of the base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102. The base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102 is attached to the central base portion 850b so that the right guided shaft portion 1102c5 can move in the right guide hole portion 850b2.

  Further, the right sliding bearing portion 1166 is fitted into the right guided shaft portion 1102c5. The right plain bearing portion 1166 is used for smooth movement of the right guided shaft portion 1102c5 in the right guide hole portion 850b2. The right sliding bearing portion 1166 includes a front sliding bearing 1166a and a rear sliding bearing 1166b. The front sliding bearing 1166a is disposed on the front side of the right guide hole 850b2, and the rear sliding bearing 1166b is disposed on the rear side of the right guiding hole 850b2.

  The front sliding bearing 1166a is fitted in the front portion of the right guided shaft portion 1102c5. The front sliding bearing 1166a is formed of, for example, a resin material, has a cylindrical shape whose bottom diameter is shorter than the width of the right guide hole 850b2, and a circular flange is provided at the front end. The diameter of the flange is larger than the width of the right guide hole 850b2, and the front slide bearing 1166a is not fitted into the right guide hole 850b2.

  The rear sliding bearing 1166b is fitted in the rear portion of the right guided shaft portion 1102c5. The rear slide bearing 1166b is formed of, for example, a resin material and has a cylindrical shape whose bottom surface has a shorter diameter than the width of the right guide hole portion 850b2, and a circular flange is provided at the rear end. The diameter of the flange is larger than the width of the right guide hole 850b2, and the front slide bearing 1166a is not fitted into the right guide hole 850b2.

  The rotational motion of the motor 1152 is transmitted to the crank mechanism 1155 via the spur gear 1154. The spur gear 1156 of the crank mechanism 1155 is meshed with the spur gear 1154 and rotates in conjunction with the spur gear 1154. Rotational motion of the spur gear 1156 is transmitted to the crank 1158 through a cylindrical guided shaft that protrudes rearward from the rear end of the rear surface of the spur gear 1156. Further, the rotational motion of the crank 1158 is transmitted to the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 of the base portion 1102c through the long hole portion 1158b. The left guided shaft portion 1102c4 is guided by the left guide hole portion 850b1 and linearly moves in the vertical direction. At this time, the distance between the rotation center of the crank 1158 and the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 changes, but the long hole portion 1158b serves as a relief hole for the left guided shaft portion 1102c4, and the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 The inside of the long hole portion 1158b is moved by the change in the distance from the rotation center. Accordingly, the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 can be moved in the vertical direction.

  The base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102 is movable in the vertical direction with the right guided shaft portion 1102c5 guided by the right guide hole portion 850b2. The upper rear movable body 1102 is guided by the left guide hole portion 850b1 and the right guide hole portion 850b2, and can stably move up and down.

  A torsion coil spring 1168 is disposed on the rear side of the crank 1158. A metal bar 1160 passes through the coil center of the torsion coil spring 1168. One end of the torsion coil spring 1168 is fixed to the rear surface of the left base 850c, and the other end is fixed to the rear surface of the crank 1158. The crank 1158 rotates to the right when the upper rear movable body 1102 moves downward, and rotates to the left when the upper rear movable body 1102 moves upward. A force is applied to the torsion coil spring 1168 in the direction in which the spring is wound when the crank 1158 rotates clockwise from the initial position. Torque is applied to assist the power of the motor 1152 that moves the upper rear movable body 1102 upward.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22, a metallic outer rail 1170 extending in the vertical direction is fixed with a screw to the right of the left guide hole 850b1 of the center base 850b. The outer rail 1170 extends in parallel to the left guide hole 850b1 and the right guide hole 850b2. As shown in FIG. 26, a metal inner rail 1172 extending in the vertical direction is fixed to the rear surface of the base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102 with screws. The inner rail 1172 is attached to the inner side of the outer rail 1170 so as to be movable along the outer rail 1170. A plurality of steel balls (not shown) are arranged on the rail contact surfaces of the outer rail 1170 and the inner rail 1172 so as to reduce friction between the rails and allow the inner rail 1172 to slide smoothly. The outer rail 1170 and the inner rail 1172 are used for stably guiding the upper rear movable body 1102 in the vertical direction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22, the tension coil spring 1174 has an upper end fixed above the central base 850b and a lower end on the rear side of the base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102 so that it can expand and contract in the vertical direction. Fixed. The tension coil spring 1174 has a natural length when the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the uppermost position (initial position), and has a natural length when the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at a position below the initial position. Become stretched. The tension coil spring 1174 uses the restoring force to assist the power of the motor 1152 for the upper rear movable body 1102 to return to the initial position.

  As shown in FIG. 22, an upper photosensor 1176 and a lower photosensor 1178 are fixed to the left base 850c with screws. The upper photosensor 1176 and the lower photosensor 1178 are used to detect the position of the upper rear movable body 1102. The upper photosensor 1176 and the lower photosensor 1178 are included in various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 4, and are connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG.

  The upper photosensor 1176 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit that are arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction across the space. As shown in FIG. 26, a light shielding piece 1102c3 formed of a light-impermeable member is provided on the base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102. When the upper rear movable body 1102 is positioned at the uppermost position (initial position), the light shielding piece 1102c3 enters between the light receiving unit and the light emitting unit of the upper photosensor 1176.

  Similarly, the lower photosensor 1178 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit that are arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction across the space. As shown in FIG. 26, the crank 1158 of the crank mechanism 1155 is provided with a light shielding piece 1158c formed of a light opaque member. When the upper rear movable body 1102 is positioned at the lowermost position, the light shielding piece 1158c enters between the light receiving unit and the light emitting unit of the lower photosensor 1178.

  In this embodiment, the position of the upper rear movable body 1102 is detected by the upper photosensor 1176 and the lower photosensor 1178. When the upper photosensor 1176 detects the light shielding piece 1102c3, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the initial position, and the lower photosensor 1178 detects the light shielding piece 1158c3. Determines that the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the lowest position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22, a substrate 1180 is fixed to the left base portion 850c with screws. The motor 1152, the upper photosensor 1176, and the lower photosensor 1178 are connected to the substrate 1180 by wiring (not shown). The motor 1152 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 4 through the substrate 1180, and the upper photosensor 1176 and the lower photosensor 1178 are connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. Thereby, the wiring which connects the upper back decoration object 1100, the 1st sub control part 400, and the 2nd sub control part 500 can be collected.

  Next, the operation of the rotary movable unit 1102b of the upper rear movable body 1102 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 shows a state in which the upper rear movable body 1102 is viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left. In FIG. 27, the front cover 1102a is removed from the base portion 1102c, and the geared rotary member 1110 is removed from the front cover 1102a, the first gear member 1114, and the second gear member 1116. Further, the rotation decoration support member 1118, the rotation decoration portion 1124, the frame member 1126, the metal rod 1128, and the spur gear 1130 are not shown.

  As described above, the motor 1140 is used to drive the rotary movable unit 1102b. When the motor 1140 is driven and the rotation shaft of the motor rotates, for example, clockwise when viewed from the front, the spur gear 1142 fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1140 rotates clockwise and is engaged with the spur gear 1142. The geared rotary member 1110 provided with the gear portion 1110b rotates counterclockwise. Since the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 are fixed to the geared rotary member 1110, the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 also rotate counterclockwise. Further, a spur gear 1122 is fixed to one end of the metal rod 1120 disposed in the through hole of the side surface portion 1114d of the first gear member 1114, and the spur gear 1122 becomes the base portion 1102c as the first gear member 1114 rotates. And rotates along the gear portion 1102c2. The spur gear 1122 is meshed with the gear portion 1102c2, and the spur gear 1122 rotates around the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120 while rotating and moving along the gear portion 1102c2. A rotating decoration support member 1118 is fixed to the other end of the metal bar 1120. The rotation decoration support member 1118 rotates together with the rotation decoration portion 1124 around an imaginary straight line passing through the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120.

  When the motor 1140 is driven, at least one of the spur gear 1130 and the spur gear 1134 meshes with the first gear portion 1114e or the second gear portion 1116e. For example, when the spur gear 1130 is exposed to the openings 1102a1 and 1110a from the internal space 1115 formed by being surrounded by the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116, the spur gear 1134 is the second gear. It meshes with the portion 1116e. FIG. 27 shows a state in which the spur gear 1134 is engaged with the second gear portion 1116e.

  The spur gear 1134 is fixed to one end of the metal rod 1132, and rotates and moves along the second gear portion 1116 e as the rotating decoration support member 1118 rotates. The spur gear 1134 is meshed with the second gear portion 1116e, and the spur gear 1134 rotates around the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1132 while rotating along the second gear portion 1116e. In addition, a rotation decoration portion 1124 is fixed to the other end of the metal rod 1132. The rotating decoration portion 1124 rotates around an imaginary straight line passing through the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1132.

  Further, when the spur gear 1134 is exposed to the openings 1102a1 and 1110a from the internal space 1115 formed by being surrounded by the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 through the opening end, the spur gear 1130 meshes with the first gear portion 1114e. The spur gear 1130 is fixed to one end of the metal rod 1128, and rotates and moves along the first gear portion 1114 e with the rotation of the rotary decoration support member 1118. The spur gear 1130 is engaged with the first gear portion 1114e. The spur gear 1130 rotates around the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1128 while rotating along the first gear portion 1114e. In addition, a rotation decoration portion 1124 is fixed to the other end of the metal rod 1128. The rotation decoration part 1124 rotates around an imaginary straight line passing through the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1128.

  A predetermined decoration is applied to the front side and the rear side of the rotary decoration unit 1124. The rotation movable part 1102b rotates the rotation decoration part 1124 to produce a game so that the player can see the front side or the rear side of the rotation decoration part 1124. Since the rotation decoration portion 1124 is attached to the rotation decoration support member 1118, it rotates as the rotation decoration support member 1118 rotates. The rotation decoration unit 1124 rotates with a virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120 as a rotation axis in accordance with the rotation of the rotation decoration support member 1118.

  Further, the rotation decoration portion 1124 is fixed to the metal rods 1128 and 1132. The rotation of the spur gears 1130 and 1134 causes the metal rods 1128 and 1132 to rotate, and the rotation decoration portion 1124 also rotates with a virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rods 1128 and 1132 as a rotation axis.

  In this way, the rotational decoration unit 1124 is given three rotational motions by different rotational axes by driving the motor 1140. The rotary movable unit 1102b may be able to make the player pay attention to the rotary decoration unit 1124 by three rotational movements.

  The upper rear movable body 1102 is disposed between the right base portion 1002b3 and the left base portion 1002b4 of the base portion 1002b of the upper front movable body 1002 shown in FIG. When the lens movable body 1002a of the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the rearmost position, when the rotary movable portion 1102b rotates, the spur gear 1130 or the spur gear 1134 exposed forward from the opening 1102a1 is moved to the upper front movable. The lens 1018 of the body 1002 comes into contact. For this reason, the rotation movable part 1102b is rotatable when the lens movable body 1002a is located in the foremost position.

  Next, the operation of the upper rear movable body 1102 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is an external view of the upper rear decoration accessory 1100 as viewed from the front side. The upper rear movable body 1102 is driven by the vertical drive unit 1104 and can move in the vertical direction.

  FIG. 28A shows a state where the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the initial position (upper position). The initial position of the upper rear movable body 1102 is the uppermost position in the movement range of the upper rear movable body 1102.

  FIG. 28B shows a state where the upper rear movable body 1102 has moved to an intermediate position between the uppermost position and the lowermost position. When the upper rear movable body 1102 moves downward, the rotation shaft of the motor 1152 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front side. As a result, the spur gear 1154 fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor 1152 rotates counterclockwise, and the spur gear 1156 of the crank mechanism 1155 meshed with the spur gear 1154 rotates clockwise. In conjunction with the rotation of the spur gear 1156, the crank 1158 rotates clockwise. The rotary motion of the motor 1152 is converted into a linear motion via the crank 1158 and transmitted to the upper rear movable body 1102. The upper rear movable body 1102 is guided by the left guide hole 850 b 1, the right guide hole 850 b 2, the outer rail 1170 and the inner rail 1172 and linearly moves downward.

  FIG. 28C shows a state where the upper rear movable body 1102 has moved to the lowest position. The left guide hole 850b1, the right guide hole 850b2, and the outer rail 1170 function as mechanical ends, and the upper rear movable body 1102 is stopped.

  Naturally, the upper rear movable body 1102 can move upward from the lowermost position shown in FIG. 28C toward the uppermost position (initial position) shown in FIG. When the upper rear movable body 1102 moves upward, the rotation shaft of the motor 1152 and the spur gear 1154 rotate clockwise as viewed from the front side, and the spur gear 1156 of the crank mechanism 1155 rotates counterclockwise, The crank 1158 rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the rotation of the gear 1156. The rotary motion of the motor 1152 is converted into a linear motion via a crank 1158 and transmitted to the upper rear movable body 1102, and the upper rear movable body 1102 has a left guide hole 850b1, a right guide hole 850b2, and an outer rail 1170. And it is guided by the inner rail 1172 and linearly moves upward. The left guide hole 850b1, the right guide hole 850b2, and the outer rail 1170 function as mechanical ends, and the upper rear movable body 1102 stops at the initial position.

  The upper rear movable body 1102 is disposed between the right base portion 1002b3 and the left base portion 1002b4 of the base portion 1002b of the upper front movable body 1002 shown in FIG. For this reason, when the upper rear movable body 1102 moves alone, it comes into contact with the lower decorative portion 1016 of the upper front movable body 1002. In order to avoid this, the upper rear movable body 1102 can move downward together with the upper front movable body 1002, and moves downward when the upper front movable body 1002 is located below the initial position. Is possible. The upper rear movable body 1102 may be disposed at a position where it does not come into contact with the upper front movable body 1002. The upper rear movable body 1102 may be movable to the lowermost position when the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the initial position. The upper front movable body 1102 and the upper rear movable body 1102 may be operable independently.

  Further, the vertical movement range of the upper rear movable body 1102 is the same as the vertical movement range of the upper front movable body 1002 shown in FIG. When the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the initial position shown in FIG. 28A and the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the initial position shown in FIG. The rear movable body 1102 is located, and the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 overlap in the front-rear direction. Further, when the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the lowermost position shown in FIG. 28C and the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position shown in FIG. The upper rear movable body 1102 is positioned behind the body 1002, and the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 overlap in the front-rear direction.

  When the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 overlap in the front-rear direction, the rotational decoration portion 1124 of the upper rear movable body 1102 is visually recognized via the lens 1018 of the upper front movable body 1002. A convex lens is used as the lens 1018, and the distance between the lens 1018 and the rotation decoration unit 1124 is shorter than the focal length of the lens 1018, so that the player can observe an erect virtual image of the rotation decoration unit 1124 through the lens 1018 It is.

  The lens movable body 1002a is movable in the front-rear direction. The movable lens body 1002a can vary the size of the erecting virtual image of the rotary decoration 1124 observed by the player by moving in the front-rear direction.

  The upper rear movable body 1102 may be movable in the front-rear direction.

  In this embodiment, stepping motors are used for the motors 1140 and 1152, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used.

  In this embodiment, the motor is used as the drive source for the rotationally movable portion 1102b and the upper rear movable body 1102. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various actuators such as solenoids may be used as drive sources for the rotary movable unit 1102b and the upper rear movable body 1102.

  Further, instead of the tension coil spring 1174, an elastic member such as a spiral spring, a leaf spring, or rubber may be used.

  The upper rear movable body 1102 may include a sub display device smaller than the decorative symbol display device 208. Sub display devices include liquid crystal display devices, dot matrix display devices, 7 segment display devices, organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display devices, reel (drum) display devices, leaf display devices, plasma displays, and other displays including projectors. Devices can be used. The sub display device may be controlled by the first sub control unit 400, may be controlled by the second sub control unit 500, and the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 are the same. Alternatively, a display control unit may be provided and controlled by the display control unit.

  Further, a logo movable body 902 may be disposed behind the upper rear movable body 1102. In this case, the upper rear movable body 1102 may be movable rearward.

  Further, the upper rear movable body 1102 may be movable upward from the initial position.

  Next, FIG. 29 to FIG. 36 are shown for the upper right side accessory 1200, the upper left side accessory 1300, the lower right side accessory 1400, and the lower left side accessory 1500 of the pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention. It explains using.

  The upper right side role 1200, the upper left side role 1300, the lower right side role 1400, and the lower left side role 1500 are directed to a special figure variable game, a normal figure variable game, or a big hit game. Used for demonstration productions. For example, a reach effect, a special figure 1 small hit effect, a special figure 2 small hit effect, a universal drawing winning effect, a pre-reading notice effect, a 2R big hit game effect, a 15R special big hit game effect, and an operation or setting operation unit of the chance button 136 This is used for various other effects such as effects related to the operation 137. Further, the upper left side accessory 1300 has a symmetrical structure with the upper right side accessory 1200. For this reason, the description of the upper left side accessory 1300 can be described by replacing “right” with “left” in the description of the upper right side accessory 1200. Also, the lower left side accessory 1500 has a symmetrical structure with the lower right side accessory 1400. Therefore, in the description of the lower right side accessory 1400, the lower left side accessory 1500 can be described by replacing “right” with “left”. Therefore, the description of the upper left side accessory 1300 and the lower left side accessory 1500 will be omitted below.

  The movable body (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “upper right side movable body” or “movable body”) 1201 of the upper right side accessory 1200 of the present embodiment is located in the upper right direction within a plane parallel to the game board 200. To the lower left direction (hereinafter may be simply referred to as “moving operation”). In addition, a part of the upper right side movable body 1201 (movable decoration portion 1203) moves in a plane parallel to the board surface of the game board 200 in conjunction with the movement of the upper right side movable body 1201 from the upper right direction to the lower left direction. It is also possible to rotate (hereinafter, simply referred to as “rotation operation”).

  The movable body (hereinafter, may be referred to as “lower right side movable body” or “movable body”) 1401 of the lower right side accessory 1400 according to the present embodiment can operate in the vertical direction. In addition, a movable body (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “movable body front portion”) 1403 included in the lower right side movable body 1401 controls the posture of the movable body 1403 in conjunction with the vertical movement of the movable body 1401. It is also possible to change. In addition, a movable body (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “movable body middle portion”) 1425 included in the lower right side movable body 1401 is an operation of opening a part of the movable body middle portion 1425 (an outer decoration portion 1425a (decoration portion 1425a1). -1425a6) moving radially) and rotating operations (rotating operation of the outer decorative portion 1425a (decorating portions 1425a1 to 1425a6) and rotating operation of the inner decorative portion 1425b and the inner decorative portion 1425c) can also be performed. It is.

  Further, the upper right side accessory 1200 may operate in conjunction with the operation of another movable body, or may operate independently of the operation of the other movable body. Further, the lower right side accessory 1400 may operate in conjunction with the operation of another movable body, or may operate independently of the operation of the other movable body.

  FIGS. 29 and 30 are examples of the movable body 1201 and the movable body 1401 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and an upper right side accessory 1200 including the movable body 1201 and a lower right side including the movable body 1401. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing a configuration of an accessory 1400. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the front part of the upper right side accessory 1200 and the lower right side accessory 1400, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the rear part of the lower right side accessory 1400. 29 and 30 show a state in which the upper right side accessory 1200 and the lower right side accessory 1400 are viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left.

  The structure of the upper right side accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIG. The upper right side accessory 1200 mainly includes an upper right side movable body 1201 and an upper right side movable body support unit 1250 for moving the upper right side movable body 1201. The upper right side movable body 1201 mainly includes a movable decorative portion 1203 capable of performing a rotational operation, a decorative portion 1205, a power transmission mechanism 1211 for performing a rotational operation of the movable decorative portion 1203, and a movable decorative portion 1203. A posture holding portion 1213 for holding the posture, and a connecting portion 1215 for connecting the upper right side movable body 1201 and the upper right side movable body support portion 1250.

  The ornament (or may be referred to as “movable body”) 1203a of the movable decorative portion (or may be referred to as “movable body”) 1203a of the upper right side movable body 1201 is capable of rotating. . A substantially cylindrical shaft fixing portion for fixing the shaft 1211d is provided at a substantially central end portion of the rear wall surface of the decoration 1203a. For this reason, the shaft 1211d is fixed to the shaft fixing portion, and the rotation operation of the decoration 1203a is executed by rotating the shaft 1211d. In addition, a through hole through which the shaft fixing portion of the ornament 1203a passes is provided at a substantially central end portion of the ornament (or may be referred to as a “movable body”) 1203b of the movable ornament portion 1203. The ornament 1203b is screwed to the rear wall surface of the ornament 1203a. For this reason, the ornament 1203b is integrated with the ornament 1203a, so that the rotation operation of the ornament 1203b can be executed. In addition, the decoration 1203a and the decoration 1203b are formed of a transparent resin material.

  The decoration portion 1205 of the upper right side movable body 1201 is used as a decoration of the upper right side movable body 1201. The decoration 1205 includes a transparent resin ornament 1205a, a transparent resin ornament 1205b, and a transparent resin ornament 1205c. Further, the ornament 1205b is provided with a through hole through which the shaft fixing portion of the ornament 1203a can rotate. Further, the ornament 1205a, the ornament 1205b, and the ornament 1205c are fixed to the front wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209 via the LED board 1207 with screws.

  The LED substrate 1207 is fixed to the front wall surface of the movable body rear cover 1209 with screws. Further, an LED (not shown) and a drive circuit (not shown) for lighting the LED are mounted on the mounting surface of the LED substrate 1207. The LED substrate 1207 is formed so as not to interfere with the shaft 1211d.

  The movable body rear cover portion 1209 is used to support the movable decorative portion 1203 and the decorative portion 1205. It is also used for housing the LED substrate 1207. Further, it is also used to support the power transmission mechanism 1211 and the posture holding portion 1213. Further, it is also used for executing the moving operation of the upper right side movable body 1201 (details will be described later). Further, the movable body rear cover portion 1209 is provided with a through hole for allowing the shaft 1211d to rotate. Further, the movable body rear cover portion 1209 is provided with a substantially plate-shaped initial position detection unit for detecting the initial position of the upper right side movable body 1201 by the photo sensor 1252.

  The power transmission mechanism 1211 is used to execute the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201 by the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1260. The power transmission mechanism 1211 mainly has a spur gear 1211a, a spur gear 1211b with a guide rod, a spur gear 1211c with a stopper function portion, and a shaft 1211d. The spur gear 1211a is used to transmit the rotation of the spur gear 1211b with guide rod to the spur gear 1211c with a stopper function portion. The spur gear 1211a and the guide gear-equipped spur gear 1211b are adjacently installed on the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209 so that the teeth of the spur gear 1211a and the teeth of the spur gear with guide rod 1211b mesh with each other. Further, the spur gear with stopper function portion 1211c is installed on the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209 adjacent to the spur gear 1211a so that the teeth of the spur gear 1211a mesh with the teeth of the spur gear with stopper function portion 1211c. . Further, the rear end of the shaft 1211d is fixed to the center portion of the spur gear 1211c with a stopper function portion. The shaft 1211d is fixed to the shaft fixing portion of the ornament 1203a of the movable ornament portion 1203 through the through hole provided in the movable body rear cover portion 1209 and the ornament 1205b.

  The spur gear 1211b with a guide rod is used to transmit the rotation of the spur gear 1256c with a hole to the spur gear 1211a. The spur gear with guide rod 1211b mainly has a guide rod 1211b1 and a spur gear 1211b2. The spur gear 1211b2 has a substantially sector shape, and the teeth of the spur gear 1211b2 are formed on a substantially sector-shaped arc. The guide rod 1211b1 has a substantially cylindrical shape. Further, the guide rod 1211b1 is formed integrally with the guide rod 1211b1 and the spur gear 1211b2 in the vicinity of the end of the substantially fan-shaped arc on the rear surface of the spur gear 1211b2 so that one end surface of the substantially cylindrical shape faces rearward. Yes. The connecting portion 1215e is fixed to one end face of the guide rod 1211b1 so as to be slidable (or rollable). For this reason, the rotation of the spur gear 1256c with a hole is transmitted to the spur gear 1211b with a guide rod (details will be described later).

  The spur gear 1211c with a stopper function part is used to transmit the rotation of the spur gear 1211a to the shaft 1211d. Moreover, the spur gear 1211c with a stopper function part mainly has a stopper function part 1211c1 and a spur gear 1211c2. The spur gear 1211c2 has a substantially semicircular shape, and the teeth of the spur gear 1211c2 are formed on a substantially semicircular arc. Moreover, the stopper function part 1211c1 has a substantially triangular plate shape, and one apex portion of the substantially triangular plate shape has a substantially semi-cylindrical shape (a shape obtained by vertically cutting the end face of the cylinder in half). The stopper function portion 1211c1 is formed integrally with the chord portion (the outer peripheral portion without teeth) of the spur gear 1211c2. For this reason, the substantially semi-cylindrical portion of the stopper function portion 1211c1 rotates in accordance with the rotation of the spur gear 1211c2. Further, since the radius of the spur gear 1211c2 is smaller than the radius of the spur gear 1256b fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1260, the spur gear 1211c2 rotates at a speed higher than the rotation speed of the rotation shaft of the motor 1260. Yes, but not limited to this. For example, by making the radius of the spur gear 1211c2 larger than the radius of the spur gear 1256b, the spur gear 1211c2 can rotate at a speed lower than the rotational speed of the rotating shaft of the motor 1260.

  The posture holding part 1213 mainly has a first holding part 1213a, a second holding part 1213b, and a helical spring 1213c. The first holding part 1213a and the second holding part 1213b have symmetrical shapes. The first holding unit 1213a is mainly used for holding (or maintaining) the posture (or posture) before the rotation of the movable decorative unit 1203 is performed. The second holding part 1213b is mainly used for holding (or maintaining) the posture after the rotational operation of the movable decorative part 1203 is executed. The 1st holding | maintenance part 1213a and the 2nd holding | maintenance part 1213b are mutually symmetrical shapes, Comprising: It has a substantially circular arc shape. The lower end portion of the first holding portion 1213a is movable so that the first holding portion 1213a can rotate within a plane parallel to the game board 200 with the lower end portion of the substantially arc shape of the first holding portion 1213a as a fulcrum. It is attached to the rear wall surface of the portion 1209. Similarly, the lower end portion of the second holding portion 1213b is attached to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209. In addition, a spring locking portion for connecting the helical spring 1213c is formed at the upper end portion of the first holding portion 1213a. Similarly, a spring locking portion for connecting the helical spring 1213c is formed at the upper end portion of the second holding portion 1213b. One end of the helical spring 1213c is connected to the spring locking portion of the first holding portion 1213a, and the other end of the helical spring 1213c is connected to the spring locking portion of the second holding portion 1213b. In this embodiment, only one helical spring is provided, but a configuration in which a plurality of helical springs are provided may be used. In addition, a leaf spring may be used instead of the helical spring 1213c, or a flexible member such as rubber may be used. Details of the posture holding unit 1213 will be described later.

  The connecting portion 1215 connects the upper right side movable body 1201 and the upper right side movable body support portion 1250 to the guide hole portion (guide hole portion 1254a and guide hole portion 1254b) of the base portion 1254 and the guide hole portion (escape) of the spur gear 1256c with holes. It is used for coupling through a hole-attached force acting hole portion 1256c1 and a relief hole-attached force acting hole portion 1256c2. The connecting portion 1215 has five connecting portions 1215a to 1215e, and each has the same shape. The connecting portions 1215a to 1215e are formed by integrating a substantially cylindrical roller portion and a substantially annular plate-shaped roller exterior. The outside of the roller is formed at one end of the roller portion. The diameter of the outer peripheral circle outside the roller is longer than the diameter of the outer peripheral circle of the roller portion, and is longer than the length of the short side of the guide hole portion of the base portion 1254 and the guide hole portion of the spur gear 1256c with holes. Further, the diameter of the outer peripheral circle of the roller portion is shorter than the length of the short side of the guide hole portion of the base portion 1254 and the guide hole portion of the holed spur gear 1256c. In addition, the connecting portions 1215a to 1215e have predetermined positions and guides on the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209 so that the connecting portions 1215a to 1215e are slidable (or rollable) in the corresponding guide hole portions. It is attached to the guide rod 1211b1 of the spur gear 1211b with rod. In addition, the outside of the rollers of the connecting portions 1215a to 1215e is located on the rear outer side of the corresponding guide hole portion, and the roller portions of the connecting portions 1215a to 1215e are located on the inner side of the corresponding guide hole portions. The connecting portions 1215a to 1215e are not easily detached from the corresponding guide hole portions. Further, the connecting portions 1215a to 1215e can slide (or roll) in the region of the guide hole corresponding to each of the rotating shafts of the motor 1260 as the rotating shaft rotates. Details of the connecting portion 1215 will be described later.

  Next, the upper right side movable body support unit 1250 will be described. The upper right side movable body support unit 1250 mainly includes a base portion 1254 that supports the upper right side movable body 1201, a power transmission mechanism 1256 for operating the upper right side movable body 1201, and the upper right side movable body 1201. It has a motor 1260 as a drive source for operating.

  The photo sensor 1252 is used to detect the initial position of the upper right side movable body 1201. The photosensor 1252 is included in the various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 4 and is connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. The photosensor 1252 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and has a configuration in which light emitted from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit. The photosensor 1252 has a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion that face each other in the front-rear direction, and has a U-shape (a shape in which the left side is open) when viewed from above. Further, the photosensor 1252 has a base portion 1254 so that the initial position detecting portion of the movable body rear cover portion 1209 is positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion in a state where the upper right side movable body 1201 is located at the initial position. It is fixed with screws to the upper end of the front wall.

  The base portion 1254 has a substantially plate shape. The base portion 1254 is fixed to the upper end portion of the front base portion 1456 and the upper end portion of the middle base portion 1460 of the lower right side movable body support portion 1450 with screws. Further, the front base portion 1456 and the middle base portion 1460 are fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820 with screws. That is, the base portion 1254 is fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820.

  The base portion 1254 is a member related to the moving operation of the upper right side movable body 1201. The base portion 1254 has a guide hole portion 1254a in which the connecting portion 1215a can slide (or roll), and a guide hole portion in which the connecting portion 1215b and the connecting portion 1215c can slide (or roll). 1254b. Details of the guide hole 1254a and the guide hole 1254b will be described later.

  The power transmission mechanism 1256 is used as a power source for executing the movement operation of the upper right side movable body 1201 and the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201 by the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1260. . The power transmission mechanism 1256 mainly includes a spur gear 1256a, a spur gear 1256b, and a spur gear 1256c with a hole. The spur gear 1256a is formed in an integral shape by joining two spur gears of the same shape in the front and rear directions. The spur gear 1256a is used to transmit the rotation of the spur gear 1256b to the holed spur gear 1256c. The spur gear 1256a and the spur gear 1256b are installed on the rear wall surface of the base portion 1254 so that the teeth of the spur gear on the rear side of the spur gear 1256a and the teeth of the spur gear 1256b mesh with each other. Further, the spur gear 1256a and the holed spur gear 1256c are installed on the rear wall surface of the base portion 1254 so that the teeth of the spur gear on the front side of the spur gear 1256a and the teeth of the spur gear 1256c3 of the holed spur gear 1256c mesh.

  The spur gear 1256b is used to transmit the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1260 to the spur gear 1256a, and is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1260.

  The holed spur gear 1256c is used to convert the rotation of the spur gear 1256a into a substantially linear motion and transmit it to the connecting portion 1251d. The holed spur gear 1256c is used to transmit the rotation of the spur gear 1256a to the connecting portion 1251e. The movement of the upper right movable body 1201 can be executed by converting the rotation of the spur gear 1256a into a substantially linear motion and transmitting it to the connecting portion 1251d. Further, the rotation of the spur gear 1256a is transmitted to the connecting portion 1251e, so that the rotating operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201 can be executed (details will be described later). The holed spur gear 1256c mainly has a force acting hole portion 1256c1, a force acting hole portion 1256c2 with a relief hole, and a spur gear 1256c3. The spur gear 1256c3 has a substantially sector shape, and the teeth of the spur gear 1256c3 are formed on a substantially sector-shaped arc. Details of the force acting hole portion 1256c1 with the escape hole and the force acting hole portion 1256c2 with the relief hole will be described later.

  The motor 1260 is a drive source for executing the movement operation of the upper right side movable body 1201 and the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201. The motor 1260 is fixed to the motor mounting portion 1258 with screws so that a spur gear 1256b fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor is positioned in front of the motor 1260. The motor mounting portion 1258 has a through hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1260 passes. The motor attachment portion 1258 is attached to the rear wall surface of the base portion 1254. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 1260, but is not limited thereto. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used, but are not limited thereto. The motor 1260 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 4 and is controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

  Next, the structure of the lower right side accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The lower right side accessory 1400 mainly includes a lower right side movable body 1401 and a lower right side movable body support unit 1450 for operating the lower right side movable body 1401.

  First, a configuration of a part of the lower right side movable body support unit 1450 will be described with reference to FIG. The guiding portion 1452 is used to change the posture of the movable body 1403 of the lower right side movable body 1401 shown in FIG. The guiding part 1452 includes a guiding part 1452a and a guiding part 1452b. The guide portion 1452a has a groove extending linearly in the vertical vertical direction so that the roller 1407f of the posture changing mechanism 1407 shown in FIG. 30 can roll (or slide). Moreover, the shape of the groove has a U-shape (a shape in which the left side is open) when viewed from above. In addition, the guiding portion 1452b has a groove extending in a straight line inclined at a predetermined angle in the front-up direction so that the above-described roller 1407f can roll (or slide). Moreover, the groove shape of the groove has a U-shape (a shape in which the left side is open) when viewed from above. Further, the guide groove of the guide portion 1452a and the guide groove of the guide portion 1452b are connected. Further, the guide portion 1452 is fixed to the front wall surface of the front base portion 1456 with screws.

  The LED substrate 1454 is fixed to the front wall surface of the front base portion 1456 with screws. Further, an LED (not shown) and a drive circuit (not shown) for lighting the LED are mounted on the mounting surface of the LED substrate 1454.

  The front base portion 1456 is used to support the guiding portion 1452 and the LED substrate 1454. The front base portion 1456 is also used to house the power transmission mechanism 1458, and a housing portion that can house the power transmission mechanism 1458 is provided on the rear side of the front base portion 1456. Further, the front base portion 1456 is fixed to the front wall surface of the middle base portion 1460 with screws. Further, the middle base portion 1460 is fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820 with screws. That is, the guide portion 1452 is fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820.

  The power transmission mechanism 1458 moves the lower right side movable body 1401 shown in FIG. 30 and the movable body (movable body front part) 1403 of the lower right side movable body 1401 shown in FIG. 30 by the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1462 shown in FIG. Used to perform the posture change action. The power transmission mechanism 1458 mainly includes a belt 1458a, a spur gear 1458b, a spur gear with pulley 1458c, a pulley 1458d, a shaft 1458e, and a shaft support portion 1458f.

  The belt 1458a is used to execute the movement operation of the lower right side movable body 1401 in the vertical direction. The belt 1458a is a resin belt and has flexibility. The belt 1458a has an upper end hung on the pulley 1458c1 of the pulley-equipped spur gear 1458c and a lower end hung on the pulley 1458d. For this reason, the belt 1458a rotates in accordance with the rotation of the spur gear 1458c with pulley. Further, the belt fixing portion 1413b of the movable body support portion 1413 shown in FIG. 30 is fixed at a predetermined position of the belt 1458a.

  The spur gear 1458b is used to transmit the rotation of the rotating shaft of the motor 1462 to the spur gear with pulley 1458c. Spur gear 1458 b is fixed to the rotating shaft of motor 1462. Further, the spur gear 1458b and the spur gear with pulley 1458c are provided adjacent to each other on the front wall surface of the middle base portion 1460 so that the teeth of the spur gear 1458b and the spur gear 1458c2 of the spur gear 1458c with pulley mesh with each other.

  The pulley-equipped spur gear 1458c and the pulley 1458d are used to transmit the rotation of the spur gear 1458b to the belt 1458a. The pulley-equipped spur gear 1458c is integrally formed with the pulley 1458c1 and the spur gear 1458c2 positioned in the front-rear direction. Further, the spur gear with pulley 1458c and the pulley 1458d are provided on the front wall surface of the middle base portion 1460 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction.

  The shaft 1458e is used to rotatably support the spur gear 1458c with pulley. The rear end of the shaft 1458e is fixed to the upper portion of the front wall surface of the middle base portion 1460, and the front end of the shaft 1458e is provided at the center of the spur gear with pulley 1458c so that the spur gear with pulley 1458c can rotate. Further, the shaft 1458e is used for the pulley 1458d to be rotatably supported. The rear end of the shaft 1458e is fixed to the lower portion of the front wall surface of the middle base portion 1460, and the front end of the shaft 1458e is provided at the center of the pulley 1458d so that the pulley 1458d can rotate.

  The middle base portion 1460 is used for supporting and storing the power transmission mechanism 1458. The middle base portion 1460 is used to support and store the guide rail 1464 and the guide rod 1466 shown in FIG.

  Next, the structure of the lower right side accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. The lower right side movable body 1401 mainly changes the posture of the movable body (movable body front portion) 1403, the movable body (movable body rear portion) 1405, the movable body (movable body middle portion) 1425, and the movable body 1403. For changing the posture of the movable body 1407, the movable body 1403, the movable body 1405 and the motor cover portion 1409 with a guide for supporting the movable body 1425, and the motor for performing the opening and rotating operations of a part of the movable body 1425. 1411, a movable body support portion 1413, and a power transmission mechanism 1419.

  The movable body 1403 is a movable body capable of executing an operation for changing the posture in addition to the vertical movement operation (details will be described later). The movable body 1403 has a substantially arc-shaped front decoration part 1403a and a substantially arc-shaped rear decoration part 1403b, and the front decoration part 1403a and the front decoration part 1403b are fixed by screws. The front decoration part 1403a and the front decoration part 1403b are formed of a transparent resin. In addition, an LED substrate (not shown) is provided inside the movable body 1403. On both sides of the LED substrate, LEDs and drive circuits for lighting the LEDs are mounted, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, two back surfaces of LED substrates mounted on one side may be overlapped, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For this reason, before the posture of the movable body 1403 changes (the posture at the initial position of the movable body 1403), the light of the LED mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate can be visually recognized through the front decoration portion 1403a. After the change in posture (the posture at the target position of the movable body 1403), the light of the LED mounted on the rear surface of the LED substrate becomes visible through the rear decoration portion 1403b. The right end portion of the movable body 1403 formed on the arc has a shaft fixing portion 1403c for fixing the shaft 1407a and the shaft 1407b of the posture changing mechanism 1407.

  The movable body 1405 is a movable body capable of executing a vertical movement operation (details will be described later). The movable body 1405 has a substantially arc shape. The movable body 1405 is made of a transparent resin. In addition, an LED substrate (not shown) is provided inside the movable body 1405. On the mounting surface of the LED substrate, an LED and a drive circuit for lighting the LED are mounted. The movable body 1405 is a movable body located behind the movable body 1403. Further, before the posture of the movable body 1403 changes, a part of the movable body 1403 overlaps with a part of the movable body 1405, so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the entire movable body 1405. On the other hand, since the movable body 1403 does not overlap with a part of the movable body 1405 after the posture of the movable body 1403 is changed, the player can visually recognize the entire movable body 1405.

  The posture change mechanism 1407 is used to change the posture of the movable body 1403. The posture change mechanism 1407 mainly includes a shaft 1407a, a shaft 1407b, a shaft support 1407c, a pinion 1407d, a rack 1407e with a guide bar, and a roller 1407f.

  The shaft 1407a and the shaft 1407b are used to form a rotating shaft of the movable body 1403. The right end portion of the shaft 1407a is fixed to the left end portion of the shaft fixing portion 1403c of the movable body 1403. On the other hand, the left end portion of the shaft 1407a is provided in a shaft through hole provided in the shaft support portion 1407c so that the shaft 1407a can rotate. The left end portion of the shaft 1407b is fixed to the right end portion of the shaft fixing portion 1403c of the movable body 1403. On the other hand, the right end portion of the shaft 1407b is fixed to the central portion of the pinion 1407d through a shaft through hole provided in the shaft support portion 1407c.

  The shaft support portion 1407c is used to support the shaft 1407a and the shaft 1407b. Further, the shaft support portion 1407c supports the movable body 1403 via the shaft 1407a and the shaft 1407b. Further, the direction of the rotation axis of the movable body 1403 formed by the shaft 1407a and the shaft 1407b is determined by the installation direction of the shaft support portion 1407c. In this embodiment, the shaft support portion 1407c is movable body support portion 1413 so that the direction of the rotation axis of the movable body 1403 is inclined at a predetermined angle from the upper right to the lower left in the plane parallel to the game board 200. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

  The pinion 1407d is used to rotate the shaft 1407b by converting the longitudinal motion of the rack 1407e with guide rod into a rotational motion (details will be described later). The pinion 1407d is fixed to the shaft 1407b, the shaft 1407b is provided on the shaft support portion 1407c so as to be rotatable, and the shaft support portion 1407c is fixed to the movable body support portion 1413. That is, the pinion 1407d is rotatably fixed to the movable body support portion 1413. In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the rack and the number of teeth of the pinion are determined so that the pinion rotates about half a half when the rack 1407e with guide rod moves from the initial position to the target position. Not limited. For example, by providing a hole that allows the movable body 1403 to rotate 360 ° without interfering with the movable body rear cover portion 1209 and the like, when the rack 1407e with a guide bar moves from the initial position to the target position, the pinion is approximately one. The structure which rotates may be sufficient and the structure which a pinion rotates about 1 rotation or more may be sufficient. In addition, when the rack 1407e with guide rod moves from the initial position to the target position, if the pinion rotates once, the posture of the movable body 1403 at the initial position and the posture of the movable body 1403 at the target position are the same. Become.

  A rack 1407e with a guide bar is used to rotate the pinion 1407d by converting the vertical movement caused by the rotation of the belt 1458a shown in FIG. 29 (details will be described later). The guide bar-equipped rack 1407e includes a guide bar 1407e1 and a rack 1407e2. The guide rod 1407e1 has a substantially cylindrical shape. Further, the guide rod 1407e1 is provided on the front end surface (the end surface on which no teeth are formed) of the rack 1407e2 so that the guide rod 1407e1 and the rack 1407e2 are integrated. Further, the rack 1407e with guide rod is provided so as to be slidable on the rack guide portion 1413a of the movable body support portion 1413 so that the teeth of the rack 1407e2 and the teeth of the pinion 1407d mesh with each other. A guide portion (not shown) is provided on the wall surface of the rack 1407e2 (the wall surface in contact with the rack guide portion 1409a of the motor cover portion 1409 with guide portion). In addition, a roller portion capable of rolling can be provided on the sliding surface of the rack 1407e with guide rod. In this embodiment, the pinion 1407d is fixed to the shaft 1407b inclined at the predetermined angle. Therefore, the tooth side of the rack 1407e2 has a substantially trapezoidal shape so that the tooth tip of the rack 1407e2 is parallel to the tooth tip of the pinion 1407d inclined at the predetermined angle. I can't.

  The roller 1407f is used to guide the guide bar-equipped rack 1407e to the guide portion 1452 shown in FIG. The roller 1407f is attached to the end face of the guide bar 1407e1 of the guide bar-equipped rack 1407e so as to be rollable (or slidable). Further, a rack 1407e with a guide bar is provided on the rack guide portion 1413a of the movable body support portion 1413 so that the roller 1407f can roll (or slide) with the guide portion 1452a and the guide portion 1452b of the guide portion 1452. .

  The motor cover portion 1409 with a guide portion is used to guide the movement of the rack 1407e with a guide rod provided in the rack guide portion 1413a of the movable body support portion 1413. In addition, the motor cover portion 1409 with guide portion is used as a cover portion of the motor 1411 fixed to the movable body support portion 1413. The motor cover portion 1409 with guide portion includes a rack guide portion 1409a and a motor cover portion 1409b. Further, the guide-equipped motor cover portion 1409 is configured to support the movable body so that the rack 1407e with the guide rod can slide in the front-rear direction by the rack guide portion 1413a of the movable body support portion 1413 and does not move in the vertical and horizontal directions. It is attached to the front wall surface of the portion 1413. Further, the rack guide portion 1409a has a substantially plate shape, and one groove extending in the front-rear direction is formed on the surface with which the guide bar-equipped rack 1407e is in contact. Further, a guide part (not shown) formed on the wall surface of the rack 1407e2 can slide in an upper groove provided in the rack guide part 1409a. Further, the vertical width of the upper groove is such that a slight margin (clearance) is added to the vertical width of the guide portion (not shown) formed on the wall surface of the rack 1407e2. For this reason, the vertical movement of the rack 1407e with guide bar is restricted by the rack guide portion 1409a. Further, the rack guide portion 1413a provided on the rack guide portion 1409a and the movable body support portion 1413 sandwiches the guide rod-equipped rack 1407e, thereby restricting the movement of the guide rod-equipped rack 1407e in the left-right direction.

  The motor 1411 is a drive source for executing an operation of opening a part of the movable body middle part (or the movable body) 1425 and a rotating operation (details will be described later). The motor 1411 is fixed to the front wall surface of the movable body support 1413 with screws so that the rotation shaft of the motor (the side on which the spur gear 1419c is attached) faces rearward. In addition, the movable body support portion 1413 has a through hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1411 passes. The motor 1411 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 4 and is controlled by the second sub-control unit 500. In this embodiment, the motor 1411 is a stepping motor, but is not limited thereto. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used, but are not limited thereto.

  The movable body support portion 1413 is used to support and operate the movable body 1401 (the movable body front portion 1403, the movable body rear portion 1405, and the movable body middle portion 1425). The movable body support portion 1413 has a substantially plate shape. The movable body support portion 1413 mainly includes a rack guide portion 1413a, a belt fixing portion 1413b, an inner rail attachment portion 1413c, and a guide rod slide portion 1413d.

  The rack guide portion 1413a has a substantially plate shape. In addition, on the left wall surface (the surface with which the rack 1407e2 contacts) of the rack guide portion 1413a, two protrusions are provided in parallel in the left-right direction at a predetermined interval. For this reason, the surface where the rack 1407e2 and the rack guide portion 1413a are joined is reduced, and the frictional force between the rack 1407e2 and the rack guide portion 1413a is reduced. Further, a bearing, a steel ball, a roller, or the like may be provided on the wall surface of the rack guide portion 1413a so that the rack 1407e2 can move smoothly.

  The belt fixing portion 1413b is used for fixing the movable body support portion 1413 to the belt 1458a shown in FIG. The belt fixing portion 1413b is configured to sandwich the belt portion at a predetermined position of the belt 1458a with two substantially plate-shaped plates.

  The inner rail attachment portion 1413c is an attachment portion of the inner rail 1464b of the guide rail 1464, and is provided between the belt fixing portion 1413b and the guide rod slide portion 1413d.

  The guide rod slide portion 1413d is used because the movable body support portion 1413 can move along the guide rod 1466. The guide rod slide portion 1413d has a substantially cylindrical shape with an opening at the front. The inner diameter of the guide rod slide portion 1413d is a length obtained by adding a slight margin (clearance) to the outer diameter of the guide rod 1466. In addition, the movable body support portion 1413 is provided with a through hole for passing the light of the LED mounted on the LED substrate 1415 and a through hole for passing the shaft 1419f of the power transmission mechanism 1419.

  The LED substrate 1415 is fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body support portion 1413 with screws. An LED (not shown) and a drive circuit (not shown) for lighting the LED are mounted on the mounting surface of the LED substrate 1415. The LED board cover portion 1417 is used for housing the LED board 1415 and is fixed to the rear wall surface of the LED board 1415 with screws.

  The power transmission mechanism 1419 is a mechanism used to execute an operation in which a part of the movable body middle portion 1425 is opened and a rotation operation by the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1411. The power transmission mechanism 1419 mainly includes a spur gear 1419a, a spur gear 1419b, a spur gear 1419c, a helical spring 1419d, a spring pressing portion 1419e, and a shaft 1419f. The spur gear 1419 a is fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor 1411. Further, the spur gear 1419b is installed on the rear wall surface of the LED board cover portion 1417 adjacent to the spur gear 1419a so that the teeth of the spur gear 1419a and the teeth of the spur gear 1419b mesh with each other. Further, the spur gear 1419c is installed on the rear wall surface of the LED board cover portion 1417 adjacent to the spur gear 1419b so that the teeth of the spur gear 1419b and the teeth of the spur gear 1419c mesh with each other. A hole through which the shaft 1419f passes is provided in the center of the spur gear 1419c, and the shaft 1419f is passed through so as to be rotatable. Further, the front end of the shaft 1419f is fixed to the central portion of the inner decoration portion 1425b. In addition, a substantially rectangular groove for rotating the holed rear disk 1425f is formed at the center of the front wall surface of the spur gear 1419c. A helical spring 1419d is provided on the rear side of the spur gear 1419c. A spring pressing portion 1419e is provided on the rear side of the helical spring 1419d. For this reason, the substantially square-shaped groove provided at the center of the spur gear 1419c is pressed against the center of the holed rear disk 1425f by the elastic force of the helical spring 1419d. For this reason, the force by the rotation of the spur gear 1419c is efficiently transmitted to the holed rear disk 1425f. In the present embodiment, the position of the rotation axis of the motor 1411 (position coordinates on a plane parallel to the game board 200) and the position of the shaft 1419f (position coordinates on a plane parallel to the game board 200) are made different. A power transmission mechanism 1419 is used. Thereby, it is possible to arbitrarily provide an installation space for the motor 1411. In addition, in consideration of the center of gravity of the movable body 1401, an installation space for the motor 1411 can be arbitrarily provided. Further, by changing the ratio of the number of teeth of the spur gear 1419a and the number of teeth of the spur gear 1419c, the rotation speed of the rotating shaft of the motor 1411 can be converted to a predetermined rotation speed to rotate the shaft 1419f. In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the spur gear 1419c is larger than the number of teeth of the spur gear 1419c. For this reason, the power transmission mechanism 1419 is used as a speed reduction mechanism. Further, the torque of the motor 1411 is amplified and transmitted to the shaft 1419f. The power transmission mechanism cover portion 1421 is used to house the power transmission mechanism 1419 and is fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body support portion 1413 with screws.

  The movable body middle portion 1425 can execute an operation of opening a part of the movable body middle portion 1425 and an operation of rotating the movable body middle portion 1425 in addition to the vertical movement operation. The movable body middle portion 1425 has a substantially truncated cone shape. Further, the movable body middle portion 1425 is disposed at a predetermined position on the front wall surface of the movable body support portion 1413 so that an operation of opening a part of the movable body middle portion 1425 and an operation of rotating the movable body middle portion 1425 can be executed. The Further, an outer decorative portion 1425a is provided on the outer front surface of the movable body middle portion 1425, an inner decorative portion 1425c is provided on the inner side of the outer decorative portion 1425a, and an inner decorative portion 1425b is provided on the inner side of the inner decorative portion 1425c. Have. These decorative portions are formed of a transparent resin in order to transmit the light of the LED mounted on the LED substrate 1415, but are not limited thereto.

  The outer decoration part 1425a is divided into six decoration parts of decoration parts 1425a1 to 1425a6. Each of the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 has a radial movement with the shaft 1419f as the center of the circle (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “radial movement”) and a rotational movement with the shaft 1419f as the center (hereinafter simply referred to as “ It may be expressed as “rotational motion”). The decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 have the same shape and a substantially arc shape. The decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 are fixed to the front surfaces of the support portions 1425d1 to 14256e6 of the support portion with guide rod 1425d by screws. Further, the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 are arranged so that the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 are arranged in a ring shape with the inner side opened in a circular shape.

  The inner decoration portion 1425b rotates around the shaft 1419f. Further, the inner decoration portion 1425b has a substantially disc shape. A shaft fixing portion (not shown) for fixing the front end surface of the shaft 1419f is provided at the center of the circle on the rear surface of the inner decoration portion 1425b. In the vicinity of the circumference of the rear surface of the inner decoration portion 1425b, two substantially cylindrical screwing portions for screwing to the front surface of the holed front disc 1425e are provided with the center of the circle as a diagonal. Further, the middle decorative portion 1425c has a substantially disc shape. A through hole for passing the shaft 1419f is provided at the center of the circle of the middle decorative portion 1425c. In addition, a circular recess corresponding to the size of the inner decoration part 1425b for fitting the inner decoration part 1425b is provided at the center of the circle on the front surface of the middle decoration part 1425c. Further, the through hole is provided with two through holes through which the substantially cylindrical screwing portion provided on the rear surface of the inner decoration portion 1425b passes. That is, the inner decoration part 1425c is integrated with the inner decoration part 1425b, and thus rotates integrally with the inner decoration part 1425b.

  The support portion with guide rod 1425d is used to execute the above-described radial movement and rotational movement of the decoration portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 of the outer decoration portion 1425a. The support portion 1425d with guide rod is divided into six pieces (support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6), and is disposed in front of the front circular plate 1425e with holes. Further, each of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 has the same shape, and has a substantially trapezoidal shape in which the long side on the outer side has an arc shape. Further, the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are arranged so that the inner sides are arranged in a ring shape with hexagonal openings by arranging the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6. The decorative portion 1425c is rotatable. Further, a substantially cylindrical guide rod (partially shown) is provided on the rear surface of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6. The support portion with guide rod 1425d is formed of a resin that is not transparent, but may be formed of a transparent resin.

  The holed front disk 1425e is used for rotating the inner decoration part 1425b and the inner decoration part 1425c. The front disc 1425e with a hole is disposed behind the support portion 1425d with a guide rod. Further, the holed front disk 1425e has a substantially disk shape. A through-hole through which the shaft 1419f can rotate is provided at the center of the holed front disk 1425e. The front circular plate with holes 1425e is provided with six long holes each having a predetermined length at intervals of 60 ° in the radial direction from the vicinity of the center of the circle. In these six long holes, the guide bars of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 corresponding to each of the six long holes are movably disposed. In addition, when the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are moving radially along these long holes, the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 almost act on the front circular plate 1425e with holes. It is supposed not to. Further, the two screwing portions of the front disk 1425e with holes and the inner decoration portion 1425b are fixed by screwing. For this reason, when the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are stopped at the ends (upper and lower ends) of these six long holes, the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are rotated and moved. A rotational force acts on the holed front disk 1425e, and the inner decoration part 1425b and the medium decoration part 1425c fixed to the holed front disk 1425e rotate. Further, the front circular plate with holes 1425e is formed of a transparent resin material in order to transmit the light of the LED mounted on the LED substrate 1415, but is not limited thereto.

  The rear disk 1425f with holes is used to execute the radial movement and rotational movement of the decoration portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 and the rotation operation of the inner decoration portion 1425b and the middle decoration portion 1425c. The holed rear disk 1425f has a substantially disk shape. Further, the holed rear disk 1425f is disposed behind the holed front disk 1425e, and is disposed at a predetermined position on the front surface of the movable body support portion 1413 so as to be rotatable. In addition, a through hole for passing the shaft 1419f is provided at the center of the holed rear disk 1425f. Further, a substantially rectangular (not shown) fixing portion for fixing to the spur gear 1419c is formed at the center of the rear surface of the holed rear disk 1425f. For this reason, the force by the rotation of the spur gear 1419c is transmitted to the holed rear disk 1425f. In addition, in the rear circular plate 1425f with holes, substantially arc-shaped long holes having a predetermined length are formed in a spiral shape around the center of the circle at intervals of 60 °. In these six long holes, the guide bars of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 corresponding to the six long holes are slidably (or rollable). Further, in the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6, the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are guided by the corresponding long holes as the holed rear disk 1425f rotates. In this case, the above-described radial movement can be executed. Further, in the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6, the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 stop at the end portions of the corresponding long holes as the holed rear disk 1425f rotates. In this case, the rotational movement described above can be executed. That is, by performing the above-described radial movement in the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6, the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 of the outer decoration portion 1425a are also subjected to the above-described radial movement. For this reason, the operation of opening the movable body middle portion 1425 is executed. In addition, when the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are rotated as described above, the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 of the outer decorative portion 1425a are rotated as described above. Further, in accordance with the rotational movement, the rotation operation of the inner decoration portion 1425b and the inner decoration portion 1425c is executed. For this reason, the rotating operation of the movable body middle portion 1425 is executed. In addition, the rear circular plate 1425f with holes is formed of a transparent resin in order to transmit the light of the LED mounted on the LED substrate 1415, but is not limited thereto.

  In this embodiment, when the guide rods provided in the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are guided and moved by the corresponding long holes provided in the rear circular plate 1425f with holes, the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d1 are moved. Each guide rod provided at 1425d6 has a configuration in which almost no force acts on the front circular plate 1425e with holes. For this reason, when the rotating shaft of the motor 1411 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed later, an operation of opening a part of the movable body middle portion 1425 first (an operation in which the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 move radially) is performed. After the operation is completed and the operation of opening a part of the movable body middle portion 1425 is completed, a clockwise rotation operation as viewed from the front of the movable body middle portion 1425 (the rotational movement of the outer decoration portion 1425a, the inner decoration portion 1425b, and the inner decoration portion 1425c). Is not limited to this. For example, when the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are guided and moved by the corresponding long holes provided in the rear circular plate 1425f with holes, the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are A structure in which a large force acts on the front circular plate 1425e with holes (for example, six long holes having a predetermined length are provided in a spiral shape from the center of the circle to the outer periphery, each at 60 ° intervals. It may be the configuration). In this case, the opening operation and the rotation operation of the movable body middle portion 1425 are performed simultaneously. In addition, after the operation of opening a part of the movable body middle part 1425 is completed (or during the operation), a part of the movable body middle part 1425 is closed by rotating the rotating shaft of the motor 1411 clockwise as viewed from the rear. The operation can be executed. Further, by rotating the rotating shaft of the motor 1411 clockwise as viewed from the rear, the movable body middle portion 1425 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front. Further, by controlling the number of rotations of the rotating shaft of the motor 1411, it is possible to execute only the operation of opening a part of the movable body middle portion 1425.

  Next, the remaining configuration of the lower right side movable body support unit 1450 will be described with reference to FIG. The motor 1462 is a driving source for executing the movement operation of the lower right side movable body 1401 and the posture change operation of the movable body 1403 of the lower right side movable body 1401. The motor 1462 is fixed to the rear wall surface of the middle base portion 1460 with screws so that a pulley spur gear 1458c (see FIG. 30) fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor is positioned in front of the motor. The middle base portion 1460 has a through hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1462 passes. In this embodiment, the motor 1462 is a stepping motor, but is not limited thereto. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used, but are not limited thereto. The motor 1462 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 4 and is controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

  The guide rail 1464 is used to guide the direction of movement of the movable body 1401. The guide rail 1464 has an outer rail 1464a and an inner rail 1464b. The inner rail 1464b is fixed to the inner rail mounting portion 1413c of the movable body support portion 1413 with screws in the vertical direction so that the movable body 1401 can move in the vertical direction. The outer rail 1464a is fixed by screws in the vertical direction at the center of the rear wall surface of the middle base portion 1460 so that the movable body 1401 can move in the vertical direction. A plurality of steel balls (not shown) are arranged on the rail contact surface portions of the inner rail 1464b and the outer rail 1464a so as to reduce friction between the rails and allow the rails to slide smoothly. In addition, the movable body support portion 1413 can operate in the installation direction of the outer rail 1464a fixed to the middle base portion 1460, that is, in the vertical direction, by the configuration of the guide rail 1464. Further, a rail stop portion (not shown) for stopping the inner rail 1464b is provided at the lower end portion of the outer rail 1464a.

  The guide rod 1466 is used because the movable body 1401 can be moved in parallel along the guide rod 1466. It is also used to reduce the moment of force due to the movement of the movable body 1401. The guide bar 1466 is made of an iron bar. Further, the guide rod 1466 is fixed to the rear wall surface of the middle base portion 1460 so as to be parallel to the installation direction of the guide rail 1464 and the vertical direction.

  The helical spring 1468 is used to support the upward movement of the movable body 1401. In this embodiment, the helical spring 1468 is a compression spring. The helical spring 1468 is attached to the guide rod 1466 so as to be wound around the guide rod 1466. The spring pressing portion 1470 is slidable by the guide rod 1466, and is provided on the guide rod 1466 so as to press the helical spring 1468 from above the helical spring 1468. In addition, a guide rod slide portion 1413d of the movable body support portion 1413 is provided on the guide rod 1466 above the spring pressing portion 1470. With this configuration, when the movable body 1401 is positioned below, the helical spring 1468 is elastically deformed and compressed. For this reason, the upward movement operation from the initial position (lower end) of the movable body 1401 may be performed smoothly.

  The photosensor 1472 is used to detect the initial position of the movable body 1401. The photosensor 1472 is included in the various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 4, and is connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. The photosensor 1472 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and has a structure in which light emitted from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit. In the photosensor 1472, the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion face each other in the front-rear direction, and have a U-shape (a shape in which the left side is open) when viewed from the right side. Further, when the movable body 1401 is located at the initial position, the movable body support portion 1413 is fixed to the front wall surface of the rear base portion 1474 with screws so that the lower end portion of the movable body support portion 1413 is located between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. .

  Next, the movement operation of the movable body 1201 of the upper right side accessory 1200 and the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the movable body 1201 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 31A is a schematic front view of the upper right side accessory 1200 in a state where the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position, as viewed from the front. FIG. 31A is a schematic rear view of the upper right side accessory 1200 in the state shown in FIG. FIG. 31B is a schematic front view of the upper right side accessory 1200 with the movable body 1201 positioned at the target position as viewed from the front. FIG. 31B shows a state immediately before the rotating operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the movable body 1201 is executed. FIG. 31B 'is a schematic rear view of the upper right side accessory 1200 in the state shown in FIG. FIG. 31C is a schematic front view of the upper right side accessory 1200 in a state after the rotating operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 is executed after the movable body 1201 reaches the target position, as viewed from the front. FIG. 31C 'is a schematic rear view of the upper right side accessory 1200 in the state shown in FIG.

  FIG. 31A shows a state where the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position. Further, the rotating operation of the movable body 1203 is not executed. In addition, the movable body 1201 can be moved from the initial position to the target position and can be moved from the target position to the initial position. Further, in the range where the movable body 1201 can move, the upper end position is set as the initial position of the movable body 1201 and the lower end position is set as the target position of the movable body 1201.

  Next, the movement operation from the state where the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position will be described with reference to FIG. The base portion 1254 is provided with two through-holes that are inclined in a substantially straight line from the upper left to the lower right in parallel at a predetermined interval. The right hole when viewed from the rear is a guide hole 1254a, and the left hole when viewed from the rear is a guide hole 1254b. In the guide hole portion 1254a, a connecting portion 1215a fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209 of the rear cover portion of the movable body 1201 is arranged to be rollable (or slidable). . Further, in the guide hole portion 1254b, a connecting portion 1215b and a connecting portion 1215c fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209 are arranged to be rollable (or slidable). Further, since the base portion 1254 is fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820 with screws, the guide hole portion 1254a and the guide hole portion 1254b are fixed and do not move. For this reason, the movable body 1201 is guided by the guide hole 1254a and the guide hole 1254b and can be moved in parallel.

  The power transmission mechanism 1256 (1256a to 1256c) has a mechanism for transmitting the rotational force of the rotating shaft of the motor 1260 to the connecting portion 1215d fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209. The spur gear 1256b is rotated by the rotation of the rotating shaft of the motor 1260, the spur gear 1256a is rotated by rotating the spur gear 1256b, and the spur gear 1256c is rotated by rotating the spur gear 1256a. The holed spur gear 1256c mainly has a force acting hole portion 1256c1, a force acting hole portion 1256c2 with a relief hole, and a spur gear 1256c3. When the movable body 1201 is in the initial position, the force acting hole portion 1256c1 with a relief hole has a long hole having a “ku” shape of a hiragana when viewed from the rear, and is approximately 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the rear. It is rotating around. A long hole (hereinafter also referred to as a force acting hole) in the “C” shape extends in the direction of the rotation axis of the spur gear 1256 c 3, and a long hole ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a relief hole.) Extends in the clockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the rear of the spur gear 1256c3. In addition, the force acting hole portion 1256c2 with the escape hole has a long hole having a “h” shape of a hiragana when viewed from the rear when the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position, and is rotated about 180 °. . The long hole in the shape of a “height” is formed following the movement trajectory of the connecting portion 1215e. When the rotation shaft of the motor 1260 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, the holed spur gear 1256c rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the rear. In this case, the force acting hole portion 1256c1 with the relief hole rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the center with the rotation axis of the spur gear 1256c3 as the center. Further, the holed spur gear 1256c is shaped so that the holed spur gear 1256c is always hidden by the movable body 1201 even if the movable body 1201 is moved by the rotation of the holed spur gear 1256c, so that it is difficult to see from the player side. It is.

A connecting portion 1215d fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209 is arranged to be rollable (or slidable) in the force acting hole portion 1256c1 with a relief hole. In a state where the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position, the connecting portion 1215d contacts the upper or lower wall surface of the force acting hole of the force acting hole portion 1256c1 with the escape hole (the connecting portion 1215d is the force acting hole portion with the relief hole. It does not contact the left and right wall surfaces of 1256c1.) For this reason, when the spur gear 1256c with a hole rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the rear, the upper wall surface of the force acting hole of the force acting hole 1256c1 with the escape hole (state where the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position) is connected to the connecting part 1215d. , The force due to the counterclockwise rotation as viewed from the rear (from the wall surface above the connecting portion 1215d) acts in the tangential direction of the locus of movement of the contact surface between the connecting portion 1215d and the escape hole-attached force acting hole portion 1256c1. Further, the connecting portion 1215d is fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209 that is the same as the connecting portions 1215a to 1215c. For this reason, when the said force acts on the connection part 1215d, the connection parts 1215a-1215d will move.

  In a state where the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position, the force acting hole portion 1256c1 with escape hole is located substantially in the horizontal left direction when viewed from the rear of the rotation shaft of the spur gear 1256c3 of the spur gear 1256c with hole. For this reason, when the spur gear 1256c3 rotates about 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the state in which the movable body 1201 is positioned at the initial position, the connecting portion 1215d can move downward. . Further, when the spur gear 1256c3 rotates about 90 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the state in which the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position, the connecting portion is formed by the force acting hole of the force acting hole portion 1256c1 with a relief hole. 1215d can be moved rightward when viewed from the rear. That is, when the movable body 1201 moves from the initial position to the target position, the connecting portion 1215d can be moved in a substantially lower right direction when viewed from the back by the spur gear 1256c with a hole.

  Further, the force acting hole portion 1256c2 with the relief hole is a connecting portion where the force due to the rotation of the spur gear 1256c with the hole is arranged in the force acting hole portion 1256c2 with the relief hole when the movable body 1201 moves from the initial position to the position immediately before the target position. The above-mentioned "heavy" long hole is formed so as not to be transmitted to 1215e. The connecting portion 1215e is fixed to a spur gear 1211b with a guide rod fixed to the rear wall surface of the base portion 1254. For this reason, when the movable body 1201 moves from the initial position to a position immediately before the target position, the connecting portion 1215e moves with the movement of the connecting portions 1215a to 1215d.

  FIG. 31B shows a state where the movable body 1201 has moved to the target position. The lower end position is set as the target position of the movable body 1201 within the range in which the movable body 1201 can move. FIG. 31B shows a state immediately before the rotating operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the movable body 1201 is executed.

  Next, the moving operation of the movable body 1201 and the rotating operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the movable body 1201 will be described with reference to FIG. In a state in which the movable body 1201 is located at the target position, the connecting portion 1215c stops at the lower end wall surface of the guide hole portion 1254b of the base portion 1254. Similarly, the connecting portion 1215a (not shown) stops by hitting the lower end (not shown) of the guide hole portion 1254a of the base portion 1254. For this reason, even if the rotating shaft of the motor 1260 rotates counterclockwise when viewed later, the movable body 1201 cannot move.

  Further, in a state where the movable body 1201 is located at the target position, the force acting hole portion 1256c1 with the relief hole is shaped like a “ku” so that the force due to the counterclockwise rotation viewed from the rear of the holed spur gear 1256c is not transmitted to the connecting portion 1215d. A long hole (escape hole) portion in the upper half of the shape is provided. For this reason, from the state in which the movable body 1201 is located at the target position, the spur gear 1211b with guide rod can be further rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the rear. Further, in the state where the movable body 1201 is located at the target position, the force acting hole portion 1256c2 with the escape hole has a “he” shape so that the force due to the counterclockwise rotation seen from the rear of the holed spur gear 1256c is transmitted to the connecting portion 1215e. A wall surface at one end of the shape (a wall surface with which the connecting portion 1215e contacts) is provided. For this reason, by rotating the motor 1260 counterclockwise as viewed from the state in which the movable body 1201 is positioned at the target position, a rotational force acts counterclockwise when viewed from the rear. Will do. The connecting portion 1215e is fixed to a spur gear 1211b with a guide rod that can rotate on the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209. For this reason, by rotating the motor 1260 counterclockwise when viewed from the state in which the movable body 1201 is positioned at the target position, the spur gear 1211b with guide rod rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the rear. Become. Further, the spur gear 1211b with guide rod rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, so that the spur gear 1211a rotates clockwise when viewed from the rear, and the spur gear 1211c with stopper function portion is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the rear. Will rotate. In addition, a shaft 1211d (see FIG. 29) is fixed to the rotation shaft of the spur gear 1211c with a stopper function portion, and the rotation of the shaft 1211d causes the movable decorative portion 1203 to rotate clockwise as viewed from the front.

  FIG. 31C shows a state after the rotating operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 is executed after the movable body 1201 reaches the target position. The movable decorative portion 1203 is rotated about 180 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG.

  FIG. 31 (c ′) shows that the spur gear 1211c with a stopper function portion is about 180 ° as viewed from the rear, as the motor 1260 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle as viewed from the rear in FIG. 31 (b ′). It shows a state rotated counterclockwise. Further, the connecting portion 1215d fixed to the movable body rear cover portion 1209 hits the end wall surface of the long hole portion of the upper half of the “く” -shaped shape of the force acting hole portion 1256c1 of the escape hole with the hole spur gear 1256c. It has stopped. For this reason, the holed spur gear 1256c cannot rotate counterclockwise from this state when viewed from the rear. For this reason, even if the motor 1260 continues to be driven to rotate counterclockwise as viewed later, the spur gear 1211c with a stopper function portion cannot rotate, so that the movable decorative portion 1203 maintains the posture after the rotation operation is performed. Is done.

  Further, the rotational speed of the spur gear 1211c with a stopper function portion of the power transmission mechanism 1211 of the present embodiment is increased compared to the rotational speed of the spur gear 1256a fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor 1260. Further, the torque of the spur gear 1211c with a stopper function portion decreases in inverse proportion to the increase in rotational speed. For this reason, the decoration part 1203 is fixed to the shaft 1211d so as to be rotatable with a relatively small torque. On the other hand, since the rotational speed of the spur gear 1211c with a stopper function portion has been increased, the movable decorative portion 1203 can be used even with slight rotation of the spur gear 1211c with a stopper function portion or shaking due to the meshing gap (backlash) between the gears. May rotate or shake, making it difficult to maintain posture. For this reason, a posture holding portion 1213 that holds the posture of the movable decorative portion 1203 is provided. The posture holding unit 1213 is used to maintain the posture before execution of the rotation operation before the rotation operation of the decoration unit 1203, and after the rotation operation of the decoration unit 1203 is executed, the posture holding unit 1213 performs the rotation operation. Used to maintain posture after execution.

  Next, the posture holding part 1213 shown in FIGS. 29 and 31 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 shows a state in which the posture holding portion 1213 is installed on the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209. In addition, the state before the rotation operation of the decoration unit 1203 is executed and the posture before the rotation operation is executed is shown.

  The first holding part 1213a and the second holding part 1213b are symmetrical with respect to a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the spur gear 1211a and the rotation axis of the spur gear 1211c2, and have a substantially arc shape. Further, the fulcrum 1213a1 at one end of the substantially arc shape of the first holding part 1213a is a fulcrum for rotation in a plane parallel to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover part 1209. The rear wall is rotatably screwed. Similarly, the movable body rear cover so that the fulcrum 1213b1 at one end of the substantially arc shape of the second holding portion 1213b becomes a fulcrum of rotation in a plane parallel to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209. A screw is rotatably attached to the rear wall surface of the portion 1209. Further, a positioning wall (not shown) is provided, one at the lower right when viewed from the rear of the spring locking portion 1213a2 and one at the upper left when viewed from the rear of the spring locking portion 1213b2. Further, a force is applied to the spring locking portion 1213a2 at the other end of the first holding portion 1213a in the contraction direction of the helical spring 1213c. Similarly, the spring engaging portion 1213b2 at the other end of the second holding portion 1213b has a force acting in the contracting direction of the helical spring 1213c. For this reason, since the other end of the first holding part 1213a and the other end of the second holding part 1213b are pressed against each positioning wall by a predetermined elastic force of the helical spring 1213c, the first holding part 1213a and the second holding portion 1213b are kept stationary without rotating.

  In addition, a holding portion 1213a3 that prevents the stopper function portion 1211c1 of the spur gear 1211c with a stopper function portion from easily moving is provided inside the substantially arc shape of the first holding portion 1213a. The holding portion 1213a3 has a substantially semicircular arc-shaped depression that matches the substantially semi-cylindrical outer surface of the stopper function portion 1211c1. Further, before the rotating operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 is executed, the stopper function portion 1211c1 is positioned on the holding portion 1213a3. For this reason, rotation of the spur gear 1211c with a stopper function part is suppressed by the elastic force of the helical spring 1213c. For this reason, before the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 is performed, the posture before the rotation operation is performed is maintained.

  Similarly, after the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 is performed, the stopper function portion 1211c1 is positioned at the holding portion 1213b3 inside the substantially arc shape of the second holding portion 1213b. For this reason, the movement of the stopper function part 1211c1 is restricted by the elastic force of the helical spring 1213c, and the rotation of the spur gear 1211c with the stopper function part is suppressed. For this reason, after the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 is performed, the posture after the rotation operation is performed is maintained.

  Moreover, although the upper right side accessory 1200 by a present Example makes the lower end position of the movement range of the upper right side movable body 1201 the target position, it is not restricted to this. By arbitrarily setting the rotation angle of the rotation shaft of the motor 1260, the target position of the upper right side movable body 1201 may be arbitrarily set, or the rotational operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201 may be performed. Whether to execute or not may be determined. For example, the target position of the upper right side movable body 1201 may be set according to the reliability of the big hit in the reach production, or according to the player's advantage in various big hit games, small hit games, etc. The target position of the upper right side movable body 1201 may be set. Also, it may be determined whether or not the rotating operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 is executed in correspondence with the reliability of the big hit in the reach production, and it corresponds to the player's advantage in various big hit games or small hit games In this case, it may be determined whether or not the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 is performed. Further, the operation of the upper right side movable body 1201 of the upper right side accessory 1200 may be controlled to be symmetrical with the operation of the upper left side movable body 1301 of the upper left side accessory 1300, or the upper left You may control so that it may not become left-right symmetric with the operation | movement of the upper left side movable body 1301 of the side accessory 1300. FIG.

  Further, according to the upper right side accessory 1200 according to the present embodiment, there may be a case where the movement operation of the movable body 1201 and the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the movable body 1201 can be continuously performed by one drive source. is there. Further, according to the upper right side accessory 1200 according to the present embodiment, the rotation of the movable decorative portion 1203 may be able to be accelerated by the gear used for the rotating operation of the movable decorative portion 1203. For this reason, since the rotational speed of the rotational motion of the movable decorative portion 1203 can be increased compared to the moving motion speed of the movable body 1201, these operations are performed in series, which gives the player an unexpectedness. There are cases where it is possible. Further, the upper right side accessory 1200 of this embodiment has a posture holding portion that holds the posture of the movable decorative portion 1203. For this reason, even if the movable body is accelerated by the gear ratio, there is a case where it is possible to reliably control the movement of the movable body while maintaining the posture of the movable body.

  In addition, the movable body 1201 in the present embodiment can operate from the upper right direction to the lower left direction within a plane parallel to the game board 200, but is not limited thereto. For example, the movable body 1201 can be moved in various directions by installing the upper right side movable body support unit 1250 of the upper right side accessory 1200 in various directions. . Further, the installation direction of the upper right side movable body support unit 1250 can be arbitrarily changed by using another driving means (for example, a motor, a gear, etc.) for the upper right side movable body support unit 1250.

  Next, operation | movement of the movable body 1401 of the lower right side accessory 1400 of a present Example is demonstrated using FIG. 33 and FIG.

  33 (a) to 33 (c) are schematic diagrams of the right side surface of the lower right side accessory 1400 showing the state in which the movable body 1401 moves from the initial position to the target position in a stepwise manner. FIG. 33A shows a state where the movable body 1401 is located at the initial position. FIG. 33B shows a state where the movable body 1401 has moved upward by a predetermined distance from the initial position. FIG. 33C shows a state where the movable body 1403 has moved upward from the position of FIG. 33B and has reached the target position. The movable body 1401 of this embodiment includes a movable body (movable body front portion) 1403, a movable body (movable body rear portion) 1405, and a movable body (movable body middle portion) 1425. Further, the movable body 1401 moves in the vertical direction by driving a motor 1462 shown in FIG.

  In the movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 33A, the roller 1407f of the posture changing mechanism 1407 is positioned near the lower end of the guide portion 1452a of the guide portion 1452. The movable body 1403 has a posture such that a substantially arc-shaped arc is convex downward.

  The movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 33B is in a state where the roller 1407f of the posture changing mechanism 1407 is positioned near the upper end of the guide portion 1452a of the guide portion 1452. Further, since the guide portion 1452a is not inclined in the front-rear direction, the guide bar-equipped rack 1407e does not move in the front-rear direction in the section of the guide portion 1452a. For this reason, the pinion 1407d fixed to the shaft 1407b (see FIG. 30) serving as a rotation shaft for changing the posture of the movable body 1403 does not rotate. For this reason, the movable body 1403 is maintained in such a posture that a substantially circular arc is convex downward.

  The movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 33C is in a state where the roller 1407f of the posture changing mechanism 1407 is positioned near the upper end of the guide portion 1452b of the guide portion 1452. Further, since the guide portion 1452b is inclined at a predetermined angle in the front upper direction, the guide bar-equipped rack 1407e moves forward in the section of the guide portion 1452b. For this reason, the pinion 1407d rotates by a predetermined angle clockwise as viewed from the right in proportion to the forward movement amount of the rack 1407e with guide rod. For this reason, the movable body 1403 rotates around the axis 1407b (see FIG. 30) by a predetermined angle clockwise as viewed from the right. That is, when the movable body 1403 is guided in the section of the guide portion 1452b, the moving operation in the vertical direction and the rotating operation in which the posture gradually changes are executed simultaneously. In addition, since the guide portion 1452a and the guide portion 1452b are connected, the operation of the movable body 1403 in a state where the movable body 1403 is guided to the guide portion 1452a and the movable body 1403 in a state where the movable body 1403 is guided to the guide portion 1452b. These operations are executed continuously. In addition, the rotational speed and the rotational angle of the movable body 1403 can be changed by changing the inclination angle of the guiding portion 1452b. For example, when the inclination angle of the guiding portion 1452b is reduced, the rotation speed of the movable body 1403 is decreased, and the rotation angle is decreased. Conversely, when the inclination angle of the guiding portion 1452b is increased, the rotation speed of the movable body 1403 is increased. The rotation angle increases. For this reason, if the guide part 1452a is provided relatively long and the inclination angle of the guide part 1452b is increased, the posture of the movable body 1403 changes suddenly immediately before the target position. Note that the rotation speed and rotation angle of the movable body 1403 can be changed by changing the number of teeth of the pinion 1407d. For example, when the number of teeth of the pinion 1407d is increased, the rotation speed of the movable body 1403 is decreased and the rotation angle is also decreased. Further, when the number of teeth of the pinion 1407d is reduced, the rotation speed of the movable body 1403 is increased and the rotation angle is increased.

  Further, the movement of the movable body 1401 from the target position (FIG. 33 (c)) to the initial position (FIG. 33 (a)) is opposite to the upward movement of the movable body 1401 (in this embodiment, the front This is executed by rotating the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 shown in FIG. The initial position of the movable body 1401 is set using the photosensor 1472 shown in FIG. In addition, the initial position of the movable body 1401 according to the present embodiment is set as the initial position near the lower end of the area where the movable body 1401 can move and as the target position near the upper end of the area where the movable body 1401 can move, but is not limited thereto. . For example, the vicinity of the upper end of the area where the movable body 1401 can move may be set as the initial position, and the vicinity of the lower end of the area where the movable body 1401 can move may be set as the target position.

  Further, the guiding portion 1452 used in this embodiment includes a guiding portion 1452a having a groove extending linearly in the vertical vertical direction and a guiding portion having a groove extending linearly inclined at a predetermined angle in the front upper direction. 1452b, but is not limited to this. For example, even if the guiding portion 1452 is configured only by the guiding portion 1452b having a linearly inclined groove that is inclined at a predetermined angle in the front-up direction, the movable body 1403 performs the vertical movement operation and the posture. The changing operation is executed. In addition to the guiding portion 1452a and the guiding portion 1452b, the guiding portion 1452 may be configured to include another guiding portion, or may be configured to further include a plurality of guiding portions.

  FIGS. 34A to 34D are perspective views of the lower right side accessory 1400 showing the state of movement of the movable body 1401 from the initial position to the target position in a stepwise manner from the front upper right to the rear lower left. .

  FIG. 34A shows a state in which the movable body 1401 is located at the initial position. In this case, the posture (posture) of the movable body 1403 is such that the front decoration part 1403a that constitutes one outer surface of the movable body 1403 faces forward, and the rear surface that constitutes the other outer surface of the movable body 1403. This is a state in which the decoration part 1403b faces back. For this reason, the front decoration part 1403a is in a visible state, and the rear decoration part 1403b, which is the other outer surface of the movable body 1403, is difficult to see. Further, since at least a part of the movable body 1403 shields at least a part of the front of the movable body 1405, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the entire movable body 1405. In this embodiment, the rail decoration member 800 and the transparent game board 810 shown in FIGS. 3 and 10 are located in front of the movable body 1401. For this reason, when the posture of the movable body 1403 changes, the movable body 1403 interferes with at least a part of the rail decoration member 800 and the transparent game board 810. Therefore, in a state where the movable body 1403 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1403 has a posture that does not interfere with at least a part of the rail decoration member 800 (for example, the front stage 244 portion) or the transparent game board 810. Maintained. In this embodiment, the player can visually recognize at least a part of the movable body 1401 through the transparent game board, but the movable body 1401 may be in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 34B shows a state in which the movable body 1401 is translated upward by a predetermined distance from the initial position. The upward movement of the movable body 1401 is executed by the rotation of a belt 1458a hung on a pulley-equipped spur gear 1458c and a pulley 1458d. Further, the movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 34B is in a state where the roller 1407f of the posture changing mechanism 1407 is positioned near the upper end of the guide portion 1452a of the guide portion 1452. In this case, since the movable body 1403 is in a state before the posture changes, the posture in which the movable body 1403 is located at the initial position is maintained. In the present embodiment, in the section where the guiding portion 1452a is provided, the rail decoration member 800 and the transparent game board 810 shown in FIGS. 3 and 10 are positioned in front of the movable body 1401. For this reason, when the posture of the movable body 1403 changes, the movable body 1403 interferes with at least a part of the rail decoration member 800 and the transparent game board 810. Therefore, in a state where the movable body 1403 is guided to the guiding portion 1452a, the movable body 1403 is maintained in a posture that does not interfere with at least a part of the rail decoration member 800 and the transparent game board 810.

  FIG. 34C shows a state in which the movable body 1401 has been translated upward by a predetermined distance from the position of the movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. The upward movement of the movable body 1401 is executed by the rotation of a belt 1458a hung on a pulley-equipped spur gear 1458c and a pulley 1458d. Also, the movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 34C is in a state where the roller 1407f of the posture changing mechanism 1407 is positioned at the middle between the upper end and the lower end of the guide portion 1452b of the guide portion 1452. In this case, the movable body 1403 rotates about 90 ° clockwise as viewed from the right, with the shaft 1407a and the shaft 1407b of the posture changing mechanism 1407 shown in FIG. Therefore, the front decoration part 1403a constituting one outer surface of the movable body 1403 is facing upward, and the rear decoration part 1403b constituting the other outer surface of the movable body 1403 is facing downward. It is. Further, due to the change in the posture of the movable body 1403, the region where the movable body 1405 can be visually recognized is gradually increased. Further, due to the change in the posture of the movable body 1403, at least a part of the movable body 1403 shields at least a part of the front of the movable body 1425, and at least a part of the movable body 1425 is difficult to visually recognize. Further, in this embodiment, the rail decoration member 800 and the transparent game board 810 shown in FIGS. 3 and 10 are not positioned in front of the movable body 1401 in the section where the guide portion 1452b is provided. Therefore, even if the posture of the movable body 1403 changes, the movable body 1403 and at least a part of the rail decoration member 800 and the transparent game board 810 do not interfere with each other.

  FIG. 34D shows a state in which the movable body 1401 moves upward by a predetermined distance from the position of the movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 34C and reaches the target position. The upward movement of the movable body 1401 is executed by the rotation of a belt 1458a hung on a pulley-equipped spur gear 1458c and a pulley 1458d. Further, the movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 34D is in a state where the roller 1407f of the posture changing mechanism 1407 is positioned near the upper end of the guide portion 1452b of the guide portion 1452. In this case, the movable body 1403 rotates about 180 ° clockwise as viewed from the right, with the shaft 1407a and the shaft 1407b of the posture changing mechanism 1407 shown in FIG. For this reason, the front decoration part 1403a which comprises one outer surface of the movable body 1403 is the state which faces back, and the rear decoration part 1403b which comprises the other outer surface of the movable body 1403 is the state which faces the front It is. Therefore, a portion where it is difficult to visually recognize the movable body 1403 before the change in the posture of the movable body 1403 due to the change in the posture of the movable body 1403 is visible after the change in the posture of the movable body 1403. In addition, when the movable body 1403 changes its posture, at least a part of the movable body 1403 is not in front of the movable body 1405 or the movable body 1425.

  FIG. 34D shows a state where an operation for opening a part of the movable body 1425 and an operation for rotating the movable body 1425 are performed. In the present embodiment, the above-described operation of the movable body 1425 is started from a state where the movable body 1401 has reached the target position, but is not limited thereto. For example, the above-described operation of the movable body 1425 may be started from the state where the movable body 1401 is located at the initial position, or the above-described operation of the movable body 1425 is performed in a state where the movable body 1403 is guided to the guide portion 1452a. The operation may be started, or the above-described operation of the movable body 1425 may be started in accordance with the start of the posture change operation of the movable body 1403. In addition, the above-described operation of the movable body 1425 may be started during the operation of changing the posture of the movable body 1403 (in a state where the movable body 1403 is guided to the guide portion 1452b). In addition, the above-described operation of the movable body 1425 may be executed regardless of the movement operation of the movable body 1401, but is not limited thereto.

  FIG. 35 shows a state in which the movable body 1401 of the lower right side accessory 1400 is viewed from the lower left rear to the upper right rear. However, description of the power transmission mechanism cover portion 1421 is omitted for ease of explanation.

  The movable body middle portion 1425 is located between the movable body front portion 1403 and the movable body rear portion 1405 in the position coordinates in the front-rear direction. Further, a motor 1411 serving as a drive source for executing the above-described operation of the movable body middle portion 1425 is attached to the motor cover portion 1409 with a guide portion. Further, when the rotation shaft of the motor 1411 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, the spur gear 1419a attached to the rear wall surface of the LED board cover portion 1417 also matches the rotation shaft of the motor 1411 when viewed from the rear. Rotate around. Further, due to the rotation of the spur gear 1419a, the spur gear 1419b rotates clockwise as viewed from the rear. Further, due to the rotation of the spur gear 1419b, the spur gear 1419c is decelerated to a predetermined rotational speed and rotates counterclockwise as viewed later, and the above-described operation of the movable body middle portion 1425 is executed. Become. Thus, the movable body middle portion 1425 of this embodiment is different from the power source (motor 1462) used for the moving operation of the movable body 1401 and the operation of changing the posture of the movable body front portion 1403. 1411) is used, but is not limited thereto. For example, a structure may be employed in which a spur gear 1419a is rotated by moving the movable body 1401 in the vertical direction by providing a toothed tooth that is fixed at a predetermined position and does not move. In this case, the above-described operation of the movable body middle portion 1425 is performed by the power source (motor 1462) used for the movement operation of the movable body 1401 and the operation of changing the posture of the movable body front portion 1403.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 36A to 36F, a guiding portion 1452 for changing the posture of the movable body 1403 of the lower right side accessory 1400 of the present embodiment (see FIGS. 29, 33, etc.). A modified example will be described.

  FIGS. 36A to 36F are schematic views of the shape of the guiding portion 1452 as viewed from the right side. Moreover, the guide part 1452 shown to Fig.36 (a)-(f) has the groove | channel similar to the groove | channel shown in FIG.

  The guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 36 (a) has a guiding portion a1 having a groove extending linearly in the vertical vertical direction and a guiding portion a1 having a linearly extending groove inclined at a predetermined angle in the front upper direction. a2 is connected. For this reason, the roller 1407f of the posture changing mechanism 1407 shown in FIG. 30 moves the guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 36A upward, so that the movable body 1403 changes its posture simultaneously with the start of movement from the initial position. Thus, the upward movement is executed with the posture in which the posture change is completed.

  The guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 36 (b) has a guiding portion b2 having a groove extending linearly inclined at a predetermined angle in the front upper direction to a guiding portion b1 having a groove extending linearly in the vertical vertical direction. Furthermore, the guide part b3 having a groove extending linearly in the vertical vertical direction is connected to the guide part b2. For this reason, when the roller 1407f is moving upward in the guide portion b1, the movable body 1403 is moved upward with the posture of the initial position. In addition, when the roller 1407f is moving upward in the guide portion b2, the movable body 1403 is simultaneously operated to change its posture and move upward. In addition, when the roller 1407f is moving upward in the guide portion b3, the movable body 1403 is moved upward with the posture after the change in posture.

  In the guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 36C, a guiding portion c2 having a substantially arc-shaped groove that curves sharply forward and upward is connected to a guiding portion c1 having a groove extending linearly in the vertical vertical direction. . For this reason, when the roller 1407f is moving upward in the guide portion c2, the upward moving distance of the movable body 1403 is relatively small. For this reason, when the roller 1407f moves the guide part c1 and the guide part c2, the posture of the movable body 1403 changes suddenly immediately before reaching the target position.

  The guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 36 (d) includes a guiding portion d1 having a groove extending in a straight line inclined at a predetermined angle (for example, 30 °) with respect to the vertical up / down direction in the front upper direction. A guide portion d2 having a groove extending in a straight line inclined at a predetermined angle (for example, 45 °) with respect to the vertical vertical direction in the forward and upward direction beyond a predetermined angle of d1 is connected. For this reason, when the roller 1407f moves upward along the guide portion d1, the movable body 1403 moves upward while the posture changes relatively slowly. In addition, when the roller 1407f moves upward in the guide portion d2, the movable body 1403 changes its position relatively quickly and moves upward.

  The guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 36 (e) is linearly inclined to the guiding portion e1 having a groove extending in a straight line inclined at a predetermined angle in the front upper direction. The guide part e2 having an extended groove is connected. For this reason, when the roller 1407f moves upward along the guiding portion e1, the movable body 1403 performs an operation of changing the posture and an upward movement at the same time. In addition, when the roller 1407f moves upward along the guiding portion e2, the movable body 1403 moves upward simultaneously with the execution of the posture change operation in which the posture after the posture change returns to the posture at the initial position. Will do. Moreover, the structure which further connects the guidance | induction part e1 to the upper part of the guidance | induction part e2 of the guidance | induction part 1452 shown in FIG.36 (e) may be sufficient.

  A guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 36 (f) has a guiding portion f2 having a groove extending linearly in the vertical vertical direction and a guiding portion f3 having a groove extending linearly inclined at a predetermined angle in the front upper direction. Are connected to the guide part f1 having a groove extending linearly in the vertical vertical direction. The guide part f3 is located in front of the guide part f2. In addition, a wall f4 is provided that can rotate around a place where the front wall surface of the guide portion f2 and the rear wall surface of the guide portion f3 meet. Therefore, by rotating the wall f4 clockwise as viewed from the right and holding it in a predetermined position, the wall f4 functions as a front wall surface of the guide portion f2, and counterclockwise when viewed from the right. By rotating and holding at a predetermined position, the wall f4 functions as a rear wall surface of the guiding portion f3. For this reason, when the wall f4 functions as the front wall surface of the guide part f2, the roller 1407f moves from the guide part f1 to the guide part f2 (hereinafter referred to as the path 1). On the other hand, when the wall f4 functions as the rear wall surface of the guide part f3, the roller 1407f moves from the guide part f1 to the guide part f3 (hereinafter referred to as the path 2). For this reason, when the roller 1407f moves along the path 1, the posture change operation of the movable body 1403 is not executed, and when the roller 1407f moves along the path 2, the posture change operation of the movable body 1403 is executed. It will be. For this reason, by controlling the rotation of the wall f4, it is possible to determine whether or not the posture change operation of the movable body 1403 is performed.

  In addition, the lower right side accessory 1400 of the present embodiment includes guide parts (guide parts a1 to f3) of the guide part 1452 shown in FIGS. 36A to 36F and guide parts 1452a and 1452b shown in FIG. Can be combined in any way. For example, the lower part of the guide part 1452b shown in FIG. 29 can be connected to the upper part of the guide part 1452 shown in FIG. Further, the lower portion of the guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 36 (e) can be connected to the upper portion of the guiding portion 1452a shown in FIG. In these cases, the movable body 1403 is guided to the guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 36E, so that the movable body 1403 changes from the posture at the initial position and returns to the posture at the initial position.

  Moreover, although the movable body 1401 in a present Example can operate | move up and down, it is not restricted to this. For example, the movable body 1401 can be moved in various directions by installing the lower right side movable body support unit 1450 of the lower right side accessory 1400 in various directions. .

Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 36 again.
(B1)
A game machine (for example, pachinko machine 100) including a movable body (for example, movable body 1403) capable of performing at least a plurality of operations,
At least one of the plurality of operations is an operation including at least an operation in which the movable body operates in a first posture (for example, a posture in an initial position of the movable body 1403) (hereinafter, “first operation”). (For example, see FIGS. 34 (a) and (b)),
At least one of the plurality of operations is an operation including at least an operation of changing the movable body from the first posture to a second posture (for example, a posture at a target position of the movable body 1403) (hereinafter, (Referred to as “second operation”) (see, for example, FIGS. 34C and 34D),
Said 1st operation | movement and said 2nd operation | movement are a series of operation | movement (For example, operation | movement relevant to coupling | bonding the guidance part 1452a and the guidance part 1452b) (for example, refer FIG. 33),
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above game console, the posture of the movable body may change during the operation of the movable body. In some cases, the posture of the movable body can be changed during the execution of a series of operations of the movable body, so that a game table having a feature in the operation of the movable body can be provided.

(B2)
A gaming machine as set forth in (B1) above,
A plurality of guiding parts (for example, guiding part 1452a and guiding part 1452b) capable of at least guiding the operation of the movable body
The movable body performs the first operation in a state where it is guided by at least one of the plurality of guiding portions (hereinafter referred to as “first guiding portion (for example, guiding portion 1452a)”). A movable body (see, for example, FIGS. 34 (a) and (b)),
The movable body performs the second operation in a state where it is guided by at least one of the plurality of guiding portions (hereinafter referred to as “second guiding portion (for example, guiding portion 1452b)”). A movable body that can be used (for example, see FIGS. 34 (c) and 34 (d)),
The movable body is a movable body that can change from the first posture to the second posture in relation to being guided by the second guiding portion (for example, FIG. 34 (c), ( d))
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above game console, there is a case where the posture of the movable body can be changed in relation to the operation of the guiding portion or the movable body.

(B3)
The game stand according to (B2) above,
The first guiding portion is a guiding portion capable of guiding the movable body in a first direction (for example, up and down direction) (for example, see FIG. 33).
The second guiding portion is a guiding portion capable of guiding the movable body in a second direction (for example, a rotational direction with the vertical and horizontal directions as axes) (for example, see FIG. 33).
The movable body is a movable body that is at least guided in the first direction while maintaining the first posture by the first guiding portion (see, for example, FIGS. 34A to 34B). ,
The movable body is a movable body that is at least guided in the second direction while changing from the first posture to the second posture by the second guiding portion (for example, FIG. 34C). To (d)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, since there is a relation between the movement in the guiding direction by the guiding portion and the posture of the movable body, there is a case where the movement of the movable body can be widened.

(B4)
The game stand according to (B2) or (B3) above,
A peripheral member (for example, a transparent game board 810) located around the movable body (see, for example, FIG. 3 and FIG. 10);
The first guiding unit moves the movable body from a first position (for example, a vertical coordinate position near the lower end of the guiding unit 1452a) to a second position (for example, the vertical direction near the upper end of the guiding unit 1452a). (Guide position) (see, for example, FIGS. 34 (a) and (b))
It is difficult for the movable body to take the second posture in at least a section (hereinafter referred to as “first section”) between the first position and the second position ( For example, see FIGS. 34 (a) and (b)),
The first section is a section that interferes with the peripheral member when the movable body takes the second posture (see, for example, FIGS. 3 and 10).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, there are cases where various movements of the movable body can be realized while utilizing the empty space.

(B5)
The game stand according to (B4) above,
The movable body is a movable body that is at least visually visible from the player at the first position (for example, visible through the transparent game board 810) (see, for example, FIGS. 3 and 10).
The movable body is a movable body that is at least visually visible from the player at the second position (see, for example, FIGS. 3 and 10).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above game console, there is a case where the player can reliably show the operation in the first posture.

(B6)
The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above,
One driving means (for example, a motor 1462 shown in FIG. 30) capable of executing at least the first operation and the second operation is provided.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, there are cases where a variety of operations of the movable body can be realized with one driving means.

(B7)
A game machine including a movable body including a plurality of movable parts,
At least one of the plurality of movable parts is a first movable part (for example, movable body front part 1403),
At least one of the plurality of movable parts is a second movable part (for example, movable body middle part 1425),
The first movable part is a movable part capable of executing at least a first operation,
The first movable part is a movable part capable of performing at least a second operation,
Said 1st operation | movement and said 2nd operation | movement are a series of operation | movement (For example, operation | movement relevant to coupling | bonding the induction | guidance | derivation part 1452a and the induction | guidance | derivation part 1452b) of said 1st movable part (for example, refer FIG. 33) ),
The first operation is an operation including at least an operation in which the first movable part operates in a first posture (for example, a posture in an initial position) (see, for example, FIGS. 34A and 34B). ),
The second operation is an operation including at least an operation in which the first movable portion changes from the first posture to a second posture (for example, a posture at a target position) (for example, FIG. 34 (c) ), (D))
The second movable portion has a third operation (for example, an operation in which a part of the movable portion 1425 is opened (an operation in which the outer decorative portion 1425a (decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6) is moved radially)) and a rotating operation (external The decorative portion 1425a (the rotational operation of the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 and the rotational operation of the inner decorative portion 1425b and the inner decorative portion 1425c)) (see, for example, FIG. 34D)
The third operation is an operation that can be started at least during execution of the first operation;
The third operation is an operation that can be started at least during execution of the second operation.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, there are cases where the second movable part can be operated at any time while the first movable part performs various movements, and the movement of the entire movable body can be varied.

(B8)
The game stand according to (B7) above,
The first movable part can be operated by a first drive source (for example, a motor 1462 shown in FIG. 30),
The second movable part can be operated by a second drive source (for example, a motor 1411 shown in FIG. 30).
A game stand characterized by that.

(B9)
The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B8) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B10)
The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B9) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

(B11)
The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B10) above,
The second posture is a posture formed by rotating at least a part of the movable body from the first posture (see, for example, FIGS. 34 (c) and (d)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B12)
The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B11) above,
The first operation is an operation including at least an operation of returning the movable body to the first posture after the posture changes from the first posture (for example, of the guide portion 1452 shown in FIG. 36 (e)). The operation when the lower part of the guiding part 1452b shown in FIG. 29 is connected to the upper part)
A game stand characterized by that.
(B13)
The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B12) above,
The second operation is an operation including at least an operation of returning the movable body to the first posture after the posture changes from the first posture (for example, the upper portion of the guide portion 1452a shown in FIG. The operation when the lower part of the guiding portion 1452 shown in 36 (e) is connected),
A game stand characterized by that.
(B14)
The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B13),
The second operation may be performed after the first operation (see, for example, FIG. 33).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B15)
The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B14) above,
The first operation may be executed after the second operation (see, for example, FIG. 36A).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B16)
A game machine having a movable means including a plurality of movable bodies (for example, the lower right side movable body 1401),
One of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (for example, movable body 1403),
One of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body (for example, movable body 1425),
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a first operation (for example, an operation in which the movable body 1403 moves in parallel upward)
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a second operation (for example, an operation in which the posture of the movable body 1403 changes),
Said 1st operation | movement and said 2nd operation | movement are a series of operation | movement (For example, operation | movement relevant to coupling | bonding the induction | guidance | derivation part 1452a and the induction | guidance | derivation part 1452b) of said 1st movable body (for example, refer FIG. 33) ),
The first operation is an operation including an operation in which the first movable body operates in a first posture (for example, a posture in an initial position) (see, for example, FIGS. 34A and 34B). ,
The second operation is an operation including an operation in which the first movable body changes from the first posture to a second posture (for example, a posture at a target position) (for example, FIG. 34C). , (D))
The second movable body has a third operation (for example, an operation in which a part of the movable body 1425 opens (an operation in which the outer decorative portion 1425a (decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6) moves in a radial manner) and the movable body 1425 rotate. A game machine characterized by being a movable body capable of executing an operation (see FIG. 34D, for example).
(B17)
The game stand according to (B16) above,
First driving means (for example, a motor 1462 shown in FIG. 30);
Second driving means (for example, a motor 1411 shown in FIG. 30);
With
The first operation is an operation that can be executed by the first driving means,
The second operation is an operation that can be executed by the first driving means,
The third operation is an operation that can be executed by the second driving means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(B18)
The game stand according to (B16) or (B17) above,
The third operation can be executed during execution of at least one of the first operation and the second operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(B19)
The game stand according to any one of (B16) to (B18) above,
The third operation is an operation that can be started during execution of the first operation,
The third operation is an operation that can be started during execution of the second operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(B20)
The game stand according to any one of (B16) to (B19),
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B21)
The game stand according to any one of (B16) to (B19),
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B22)
A game machine having a movable means including a plurality of movable bodies (for example, the lower right side movable body 1401),
One of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (for example, movable body 1403),
One of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body (for example, movable body 1425),
The second movable body is a movable body different from the first movable body,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a first operation (for example, an operation in which the movable body 1403 moves in parallel upward)
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a second operation (for example, an operation in which the posture of the movable body 1403 changes),
Said 1st operation | movement and said 2nd operation | movement are a series of operation | movement (For example, operation | movement relevant to coupling | bonding the induction | guidance | derivation part 1452a and the induction | guidance | derivation part 1452b) of said 1st movable body (for example, refer FIG. 33) ),
The first operation is an operation including an operation in which the first movable body operates in a first posture (for example, a posture in an initial position) (see, for example, FIGS. 34A and 34B). ,
The second operation is an operation including an operation in which the first movable body changes from the first posture to a second posture (for example, a posture at a target position) (for example, FIG. 34C). , (D))
The second movable body is received from a player in at least one of a case where the first movable body is in the first posture and a case where the first movable body is in the second posture. It is a movable body that can be visually recognized (for example, see FIG. 34),
The second movable body includes a third operation (for example, an operation in which a part of the movable body 1425 (the outer decorative portion 1425a (decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6) opens (moving radially)) and one of the movable bodies 1425. A movable body capable of executing a portion (operation in which the outer decorative portion 1425a (the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6) rotates) (see, for example, FIG. 34D),
A game stand characterized by that.
(B23)
The game stand according to (B22) above,
In a part of the movement from the first posture to the second posture, at least a part of the first movable body is positioned in front of the second movable body (for example, FIG. 34). ), A game table characterized by that.
(B24)
The game stand according to (B22) or (B23) above,
When the first movable body performs the second operation, a region where the second movable body is visible is changed (for example, see FIGS. 34B to 34D).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B25)
The game stand according to any one of (B22) to (B24) above,
The first movable body is a movable body that is visible to the player when the first posture is set (see, for example, FIG. 34 (a)),
The first movable body is a movable body that can be visually recognized by the player when the second body is in the second posture (for example, see FIG. 34D).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B26)
The game stand according to any one of (B22) to (B25) above,
The third operation is an operation including an operation in which a part of the second movable body is deformed (see, for example, FIG. 34D).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B27)
The game stand according to any one of (B22) to (B26) above,
First driving means (for example, a motor 1462 shown in FIG. 30);
Second driving means (for example, a motor 1411 shown in FIG. 30);
With
The first operation is an operation that can be executed by the first driving means,
The second operation is an operation that can be executed by the first driving means,
The third operation is an operation that can be executed by the second driving means,
The third operation is an operation that cannot be performed by the first movable body (see, for example, FIG. 34D).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B28)
The game stand according to any one of (B22) to (B27) above,
The third operation can be executed during execution of at least one of the first operation and the second operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(B29)
The game stand according to any one of (B22) to (B28),
The third operation is an operation that can be started during execution of the first operation,
The third operation is an operation that can be started during execution of the second operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(B30)
The game stand according to any one of (B22) to (B29) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B31)
The game stand according to any one of (B22) to (B29) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.
(C1)
A game machine having a movable means including a plurality of movable bodies (for example, the lower right side movable body 1401),
One of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (for example, movable body 1403),
One of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body (for example, movable body 1425),
The second movable body is a movable body different from the first movable body,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a first operation (for example, an operation in which the movable body 1403 moves in parallel upward)
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a second operation (for example, an operation in which the posture of the movable body 1403 changes),
Said 1st operation | movement and said 2nd operation | movement are a series of operation | movement (For example, operation | movement relevant to coupling | bonding the induction | guidance | derivation part 1452a and the induction | guidance | derivation part 1452b) of said 1st movable body (for example, refer FIG. 33) ),
The first operation is an operation including an operation in which the first movable body operates in a first posture (for example, a posture in an initial position) (see, for example, FIGS. 34A and 34B). ,
The second operation is an operation including an operation in which the first movable body changes from the first posture to a second posture (for example, a posture at a target position) (for example, FIG. 34C). , (D))
The first movable body is a movable body that is visible to the player when the first posture is set (see, for example, FIG. 3 and FIG. 34 (a)),
The first movable body is a movable body that is visible to the player when the second posture is set (see, for example, FIG. 3 and FIG. 34 (d)),
The second movable body is received from a player in at least one of a case where the first movable body is in the first posture and a case where the first movable body is in the second posture. A movable body that can be visually recognized (see, for example, FIGS. 3 and 34);
The second movable body has a third operation (for example, an operation in which a part of the movable body 1425 (outer decorative portion 1425a (decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6)) opens (an operation that moves radially) and A movable body capable of executing a part (operation in which the outer decorative portion 1425a (the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6) rotates) (see, for example, FIG. 34D);
A game stand characterized by that.
(C2)
The game stand according to C1 above,
As described in C1 above, “the first operation and the second operation are a series of operations of the first movable body” means that the first movable body performs the first operation. It is possible to perform the second operation after performing (for example, avoiding the movable body 1403 from interfering with a peripheral member (for example, the transparent game board 810) during the operation of the second operation). Thus, it is difficult for the first movable body to perform the second operation without performing the first operation (for example, the movable body 1403 interferes with a peripheral member during the second operation). (See, for example, FIGS. 3, 10, and 34),
The third operation can be executed during execution of at least one of the first operation and the second operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(C3)
The game table according to C1 or C2, wherein
The third operation is an operation that can be started during execution of the first operation,
The third operation is an operation that can be started during execution of the second operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(C4)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C3 above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(C5)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C3 above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.
The first posture and the second posture of the movable body are not necessarily one posture. For example, the first posture may include a third posture. In addition, the posture of the movable body in the section of the first guide section and the posture of the movable body in the section of the second guide section are different, and the posture of the movable body in the section in between is the first posture, the third posture, etc. You may take a posture other than the second posture.
Further, the movable body may take a first posture in at least a part of the second guiding portion, or may take a second posture in at least a part of the first guiding portion. .
The movable body is configured to change the posture while moving in the present embodiment, but may be configured to change from the first posture to the second posture at a predetermined point.
The movable body may be configured to change from the first posture and return to the first posture (configuration in which the posture rotates 360 ° and returns to the original posture).
Moreover, the structure which does not interfere with a peripheral member in the area between a 1st position and a 2nd position may be sufficient as a movable body. There may be a case where the player can be surprised by suddenly changing to the second posture while showing a simple movement operation in the section of the first guide section.
In addition, a plurality of driving means for operating the movable body may be provided as long as the relationship between the posture of the guiding portion and the movable body is maintained.
Further, when the movable body returns from the guiding portion, it does not have to return to the original posture. For example, when the first guiding portion and the second guiding portion are connected to each other in a symmetric structure, and further connected to the second guiding portion and the first guiding portion to return to the same posture as the initial position, the initial position is different. It may be configured to move to a position (a configuration that moves from the lower part of the liquid crystal to the upper part of the liquid crystal and returns from the upper part of the liquid crystal to the lower part of the liquid crystal when another operating condition is satisfied).

The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Appendix b1)
A game machine having a movable body capable of performing at least a plurality of operations,
At least one of the plurality of operations is an operation including at least an operation in which the movable body operates in a first posture (hereinafter referred to as “first operation”),
At least one of the plurality of operations is an operation including at least an operation in which the movable body changes from the first posture to the second posture (hereinafter referred to as “second operation”).
The first operation and the second operation are a series of operations of the movable body.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b2)
A game machine according to appendix b1,
A plurality of guiding portions capable of at least guiding the operation of the movable body;
The movable body is a movable body capable of executing the first operation in a state of being guided by at least one of the plurality of guide portions (hereinafter referred to as “first guide portion”),
The movable body is a movable body capable of executing the second operation in a state in which the movable body is guided by at least one of the plurality of guide sections (hereinafter referred to as “second guide section”);
The movable body is a movable body that can change from the first posture to the second posture in relation to being guided by the second guiding portion.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b3)
The game stand according to appendix b2,
The first guiding part is a guiding part capable of guiding the movable body in a first direction,
The second guiding portion is a guiding portion capable of guiding the movable body in a second direction,
The movable body is a movable body that is guided in the first direction while maintaining the first posture by the first guiding portion;
The movable body is a movable body that is guided in the second direction while changing from the first posture to the second posture by the second guiding portion.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b4)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix b2 or b3,
A peripheral member located around the movable body;
The first guiding part is a guiding part capable of guiding the movable body from a first position to a second position;
It is difficult for the movable body to take the second posture in at least a part of the section between the first position and the second position (hereinafter referred to as “first section”),
The first section is a section that interferes with the peripheral member when the movable body takes the second posture.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b5)
The game stand according to appendix b4,
The movable body is a movable body that is at least visually visible from the player at the first position;
The movable body is a movable body that is at least visually visible from a player in the second position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices b1 to b5,
Comprising one driving means capable of executing at least the first operation and the second operation;
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b7)
A game machine including a movable body including a plurality of movable parts,
At least one of the plurality of movable parts is a first movable part,
At least one of the plurality of movable parts is a second movable part,
The first movable part is a movable part capable of executing at least a first operation,
The first movable part is a movable part capable of performing at least a second operation,
The first operation and the second operation are a series of operations of the first movable part,
The first operation is an operation including at least an operation in which the first movable part operates in a first posture,
The second operation is an operation including at least an operation in which the first movable part changes from the first posture to the second posture,
The second movable part is a movable part capable of executing at least a third operation,
The third operation is an operation that can be started at least during execution of the first operation;
The third operation is an operation that can be started at least during execution of the second operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b7,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b7,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b10)
A game machine having movable means including a plurality of movable bodies,
One of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body,
One of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a first operation,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a second operation,
The first operation and the second operation are a series of operations of the first movable body,
The first operation is an operation including an operation in which the first movable body operates in a first posture,
The second operation is an operation including an operation in which the first movable body changes from the first posture to the second posture,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of executing a third operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b11)
A gaming machine according to appendix b10,
First driving means;
A second driving means;
With
The first operation is an operation that can be executed by the first driving means,
The second operation is an operation that can be executed by the first driving means,
The third operation is an operation that can be executed by the second driving means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b12)
A gaming machine according to appendix b10 or b11,
The third operation can be executed during execution of at least one of the first operation and the second operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b10 to b13,
The third operation is an operation that can be started during execution of the first operation,
The third operation is an operation that can be started during execution of the second operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b14)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b10 to b13,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b15)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b10 to b13,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b16)
A game machine having movable means including a plurality of movable bodies,
One of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body,
One of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body,
The second movable body is a movable body different from the first movable body,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a first operation,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a second operation,
The first operation and the second operation are a series of operations of the first movable body,
The first operation is an operation including an operation in which the first movable body operates in a first posture,
The second operation is an operation including an operation in which the first movable body changes from the first posture to the second posture,
The second movable body is received from a player in at least one of a case where the first movable body is in the first posture and a case where the first movable body is in the second posture. It is a movable body that can be seen,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of executing a third operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b17)
A gaming machine according to appendix b16,
In a part of the operation of changing from the first posture to the second posture, at least a part of the first movable body is configured in front of the second movable body.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b18)
A gaming table according to appendix b16 or b17,
When the first movable body performs the second operation, a region where the second movable body is visible is changed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b19)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b16 to b18,
The first movable body is a movable body that is visible from a player when the first body is in the first posture,
The first movable body is a movable body that is visible to the player when the second movable body is in the second posture.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b20)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b16 to b19,
The third operation is an operation including an operation in which a part of the second movable body is deformed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b21)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices b16 to b20,
First driving means;
A second driving means;
With
The first operation is an operation that can be executed by the first driving means,
The second operation is an operation that can be executed by the first driving means,
The third operation is an operation that can be executed by the second driving means,
The third operation is an operation that the first movable body cannot execute.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b16 to b21,
The third operation can be executed during execution of at least one of the first operation and the second operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b23)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b16 to b22,
The third operation is an operation that can be started during execution of the first operation,
The third operation is an operation that can be started during execution of the second operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b24)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b16 to b23,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b25)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b16 to b23,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b26)
A game machine having movable means including a plurality of movable bodies,
One of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body,
One of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body,
The second movable body is a movable body different from the first movable body,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a first operation,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a second operation,
The first operation and the second operation are a series of operations of the first movable body,
The first operation is an operation including an operation in which the first movable body operates in a first posture,
The second operation is an operation including an operation in which the first movable body changes from the first posture to the second posture,
The first movable body is a movable body that is visible from a player when the first body is in the first posture,
The first movable body is a movable body that is visible from a player when the second posture is set,
The second movable body is received from the player in at least one of the case where the first movable body is in the first posture and the case where the first movable body is in the second posture. It is a movable body that can be seen,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of executing a third operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b27)
A gaming machine according to appendix b26,
As described in appendix b26, “the first operation and the second operation are a series of operations of the first movable body,” means that the first movable body performs the first operation. The second operation can be performed after the first movable body is difficult to perform the second operation without performing the first operation;
The third operation can be executed during execution of at least one of the first operation and the second operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b28)
A gaming table according to appendix b26 or b27,
The third operation is an operation that can be started during execution of the first operation,
The third operation is an operation that can be started during execution of the second operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b29)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b26 to b28,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b30)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b26 to b28,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  Subsequently, a central lower part 1600 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

  The central lower part 1600 is used for producing special figure floating games, producing ordinary figure floating games, producing big hit games, producing demonstrations, and the like. For example, a reach effect, a special figure 1 small hit effect, a special figure 2 small hit effect, a universal drawing winning effect, a pre-reading notice effect, a 2R big hit game effect, a 15R special big hit game effect, and an operation or setting operation unit of the chance button 136 This is used for various other effects such as effects related to the operation 137. In addition, the movable body (hereinafter, also referred to as “central lower movable body” or “movable body”) 1601 of the central lower accessory 1600 of the present embodiment can move in the vertical direction, and is movable in the central lower portion. A part of the body 1601 can also rotate in a plane parallel to the board surface of the game board 200 (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation operation”). Further, the central lower movable body 1601 may operate in conjunction with the operation of another movable body, or may operate independently of the operation of the other movable body.

  FIG. 37 is an example of the movable body 1601 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the central lower accessory 1600 including the movable body 1601. FIG. 37 shows a state where the center lower accessory 1600 is viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left.

  The central lower part 1600 mainly includes a central lower movable body 1601 and a movable body support unit 1650 for moving the central lower movable body 1601. The central lower movable body 1601 mainly includes a front portion 1601a and a rear portion 1601b related to the vertical movement of the movable body 1601. The front part 1601a has a decoration part 1601a1 and a circular display part 1601a2.

  First, the decoration part 1601a1 of the front part 1601a of the center lower movable body 1601 will be described. The movable body front decorative portion 1603a is a front decorative portion of the central lower movable body 1601. In addition, an opening is formed in the movable body front decoration portion 1603a so that the circular film 1605 can be visually recognized by the player. Moreover, the movable body front side decorative portion 1603a is fixed to the front wall surface of the movable body rear side cover portion 1603b in the rear portion 1601b by screws. The movable body upper decorative portion 1603d is an upper decorative portion of the central lower movable body 1601. The movable body upper decorative portion 1603d is fixed to the upper part of the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1603b with screws.

  Next, the circular display portion 1601a2 will be described. The circular film 1605 is used as a film-shaped circular display unit that performs a rotation operation. The circular film 1605 is attached to the front surface of the circular object 1607. The circular object 1607 is a transparent resin disk, and has a fixing hole for fixing one end of the shaft 1615d at the center of the circle. For this reason, the circular object 1607 and the shaft 1615d are fixed, and the circular object 1607 rotates when the shaft 1615d rotates. In the present embodiment, the control is performed so that the circular object 1607 rotates after the central lower movable body 1601 reaches a target position to be described later. For example, the circular object 1607 may be controlled to rotate from a state where the central lower movable body 1601 is located at an initial position described later, or the central lower movable body 1601 may be arbitrarily set between an initial position and a target position. You may control so that the circular object 1607 may rotate from the state located in the position. Alternatively, the rotation of the circular object 1607 may be stopped after the central lower movable body 1601 reaches the target position.

  The circular object cover portion 1609 is used to accommodate a circular object 1607 to which a circular film 1605 is attached. Further, the circular object cover portion 1609 is fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body front decoration portion 1603a by screws. In addition, a through hole through which the shaft 1615d passes in the front-rear direction is formed at the center of the circular object cover portion 1609. In addition, the movable body front side decorative portion 1603a, the circular film 1605, the circular object 1607, and the circular object cover portion 1609 have high light transmittance in order to transmit light from an LED (not shown) mounted on the LED substrate 1611. It is composed of members.

  The LED substrate 1611 is fixed to the rear wall surface of the circular object cover portion 1609, the rear wall surface of the movable body front side decorative portion 1603a, and the rear wall surface of the circular object cover portion 1609 with screws. An LED (not shown) and a drive circuit (not shown) for lighting the LED are mounted on the mounting surface of the LED substrate 1611. In addition, the LED substrate 1611 has a through hole for passing the shaft 1615d and an opening for securing a space for accommodating the motor 1613 in the front portion 1601a.

  The motor 1613 is a drive source for executing the rotation operation of the circular object 1607. The motor 1613 is fixed to the front wall surface on the lower side of the circular object cover portion 1609 with screws so that the rotation shaft of the motor (side on which the spur gear 1615a is attached) faces rearward. The circular object cover portion 1609 has a through hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1613 passes. The motor 1613 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 4 and is controlled by the second sub-control unit 500. In this embodiment, the motor 1613 is a stepping motor, but is not limited thereto. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used, but are not limited thereto.

  The power transmission mechanism 1615 is a mechanism used to rotate the circular object 1607 by the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1613, and mainly includes a spur gear 1615a, a spur gear 1615b, a spur geared disc 1615c, and a shaft 1615d. doing. The spur gear 1615 a is fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor 1613. Further, the spur gear 1615b is installed adjacent to the spur gear 1615a so that the teeth of the spur gear 1615a and the teeth of the spur gear 1615b mesh with each other. Further, the spur gear 1615b is installed adjacent to the spur gear-attached disc 1615c so that the teeth of the spur gear 1615b and the spur gear 1615c1 (not shown) of the spur gear-attached disc 1615c mesh with each other. A shaft 1615d is fixed to the center portion of the spur geared disc 1615c. Further, the spur gear-equipped disc 1615c is formed by integrating a disc 1615c2 having a notch 1615c3 formed in a part of the outer periphery with a spur gear 1615c1 (not shown).

  In this embodiment, the position of the rotation axis of the motor 1613 (position coordinates on a plane parallel to the game board 200) and the position of the rotation axis of the circular object 1607 (position coordinates on a plane parallel to the game board 200) are made different. Therefore, a power transmission mechanism 1615 is used. Thereby, an installation space for the motor 1613 can be arbitrarily provided. Further, in consideration of the center of gravity of the central lower movable body 1601, an installation space for the motor 1613 can be arbitrarily provided. Further, by changing the ratio of the number of teeth of the spur gear 1615a and the number of teeth of the spur gear 1615c1, the rotational speed of the rotating shaft of the motor 1613 can be converted into a predetermined rotational speed to rotate the circular object 1607. In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the spur gear 1615a and the number of teeth of the spur gear 1615c1 are the same. For this reason, the rotational speed of the rotating shaft of the motor 1613 and the rotational speed of the circular object 1607 are approximately the same. Further, since there is a spur gear 1615b between the spur gear 1615a and the spur geared disc 1615c, the rotation direction of the rotating shaft of the motor 1613 and the rotation direction of the circular object 1607 are the same. The power transmission mechanism 1615 is also used to transmit the torque of the rotating shaft of the motor 1613 to the circular object 1607.

  The photo sensor 1617 is used to detect the initial position of the circular object 1607. The photosensor 1617 is included in the various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 4 and is connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. The photosensor 1617 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and has a configuration in which light emitted from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit. In the photosensor 1617, the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion face each other in the front-rear direction, and have a U-shape (a shape in which the lower side is open) when viewed from the right side. Further, the photo sensor 1617 is fixed to the rear wall surface of the circular object cover portion 1609 with screws so that the outer peripheral portion of the spur gear 1615c1 of the spur gear-attached disc 1615c is positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. When the notch 1615c3 of the disc 1615c2 of the spur gear-equipped disc 1615c is positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the photosensor 1617, the light emitted from the light emitting portion is a disc with the spur gear. The 1615c disk 1615c2 is not shielded from light. For this reason, this position is set as the initial position of the circular film 1605.

  Next, the rear part 1601b of the central lower movable body 1601 will be described. The movable body rear cover 1603b is a member related to the vertical movement of the central lower movable body 1601. When the movable body rear side cover portion 1603b moves in the vertical direction, the front portion 1601a screwed to the movable body rear side cover portion 1603b moves in the vertical direction. In addition, the inner rail 1660a of the guide rail 1660 of the movable body support section 1650 is fixed to the center of the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover section 1603b by screws.

  The movable body lower portion 1603c is a member related to the vertical movement of the central lower movable body 1601. The movable body lower portion 1603c has a substantially rectangular guide hole portion 1603c1 (not shown). The guide hole portion 1603c1 penetrates in the left-right direction, and the through hole is formed to be elongated in the front-rear direction. The length of the short side of the guide hole portion 1603c1 is a length obtained by adding a slight margin (clearance) to the diameter of the outer circumference of the roller portion 1658a of the connecting portion 1658. The length of the long side is a length obtained by adding a slight margin to the length of the straight line from the center of the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 to the circumferential end of the roller portion of the connecting portion 1658 through the center of the connecting portion 1658. . In addition, both front and rear ends of the guide hole portion 1603c1 have a semicircular arc shape in accordance with the circumferential portion of the roller portion of the connecting portion 1658. The front end portion of the guide hole portion 1603c1 may function as a restricting portion (or restricting portion) that restricts (or restricts) the central lower movable body 1601 to the initial position, and the target position of the central lower movable body 1601 May function as a mechanical end (details will be described later). In addition, the movable body lower portion 1603c is arranged on the front wall surface of the movable body rear side cover portion 1603b so that the position coordinates in the left and right direction of the guide hole portion 1603c1 and the position coordinates in the left and right direction of the center portion of the central lower movable body 1601 are the same. Fixed to the bottom with screws. In addition, the restricting portion of the present embodiment uses a member having relatively high rigidity (for example, a member made of resin, metal, or ceramic) as a wall, but is not limited thereto. For example, a cushioning member (for example, soft resin, rubber, cotton, cloth, styrene foam, bubble cushioning material) that softens the contact with the mechanical end may function as the restricting portion.

  The movable body lower portion 1603c is formed with a spring locking portion 1603c2 that locks one end of the lower side of the helical spring 1664 at the upper portion of the rear end portion of the guide hole portion 1603c1. In this embodiment, only one spring locking portion is formed on the movable body lower portion 1603c, but a configuration in which a plurality of spring locking portions are formed may be used. Further, a plate-shaped light shielding portion 1603c3 used for detection of the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601 is formed on the movable body lower portion 1603c.

  Next, the movable body support unit 1650 for moving the central lower movable body 1601 will be described. The motor 1652 is a drive source for moving the central lower movable body 1601 in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used, but are not limited thereto.

  The motor 1652 is fixed to the motor mounting portion 1654 with screws so that the side on which the crank 1656 of the rotating shaft of the motor is fixed is directed to the right. The motor mounting portion 1654 is fixed to the front wall surface of the base portion 1662 with screws. The base portion 1662 is fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820 with screws. That is, the motor 1652 is fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820. The motor 1652 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 4 and is controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

  The crank 1656 is used as a link mechanism that connects the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 and the movable body lower portion 1603c. One end of the crank 1656 is fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor 1652, and the other end of the crank 1656 is fixed to the connecting portion 1658 so that the connecting portion 1658 can roll. In this embodiment, the crank 1656 is fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor 1652. However, the crank 1656 is fixed to a rotating shaft (shaft) different from the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 using a plurality of spur gears. It may be. As a result, the crank 1656 may be rotated by converting the rotational speed or torque of the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 into a predetermined rotational speed or torque.

  The connecting portion 1658 is used to connect the other end of the crank 1656 and the movable body lower portion 1603c via the guide hole portion 1603c1. The connecting portion 1658 is formed by integrating a substantially cylindrical roller portion 1658a and a substantially annular plate-shaped roller exterior 1658b. The roller exterior 1658b is formed at one end of the roller portion 1658a. The diameter of the outer circumference of the roller outer 1658b is longer than the diameter of the outer circumference of the roller 1658a, and is longer than the length of the short side of the guide hole 1603c1. Further, the diameter of the outer peripheral circle of the roller portion 1658a is shorter than the length of the short side of the guide hole portion 1603c1. For this reason, the connecting portion 1658 is attached to the crank 1656 so that the roller outer portion 1658b is positioned on the right outer side of the guide hole portion 1603c1, and the roller portion 1658a is positioned in the guide hole portion 1603c1, so that the connecting portion 1658 becomes the guide hole portion. 1603c1 is not easily removed. Further, the connecting portion 1658 can roll (or move) in the region of the guide hole portion 1603c1 as the crank 1656 rotates (details will be described later).

  The guide rail 1660 is used to guide the direction of movement of the central lower movable body 1601. The guide rail 1660 includes an inner rail 1660a, an intermediate rail 1660b, and an outer rail 1660c. The inner rail 1660a is fixed to the center of the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover 1603b with screws in the vertical direction so that the movable body 1601 can move in the vertical direction. The outer rail 1660c is fixed to the upper center of the front wall surface of the base portion 1662 with screws in the vertical direction so that the movable body 1601 can move in the vertical direction. The middle rail 1660b is provided inside the outer rail 1660c so as to be movable along the rail of the outer rail 1660c. An inner rail 1660a is provided inside the middle rail 1660b so as to be movable along the rail of the middle rail 1660b. A plurality of steel balls (not shown) are arranged on the rail contact surfaces of the inner rail 1660a and the middle rail 1660b so that the friction between the rails can be reduced and the rails can slide smoothly. A plurality of steel balls (not shown) are also arranged on the rail contact surface portions of the middle rail 1660b and the outer rail 1660c so as to reduce friction between the rails and allow the rails to slide smoothly. Depending on the configuration of the guide rail 1660, the movable body rear cover portion 1603b can operate in the installation direction of the outer rail 1630c fixed to the base portion 1662, that is, in the vertical direction. Further, a rail stop portion 1660c1 for stopping the middle rail 1660b and the inner rail 1660a is provided at the lower end portion of the outer rail 1660c. Further, the outer rail 1660c may be provided in a direction other than the vertical direction. For example, the rear upper direction may be the front upper direction, or the front lower direction may be the rear upper direction. The outer rail 1660c is a combination of a vertical rail, a rear lower to front upper rail, a front lower to rear upper rail, a front curved upper rail, a rear upper curved rail, or the like. It may be a configuration. In this case, the movable body 1601 can move not only in the vertical direction but also in the front-rear direction.

  The base portion 1662 is used as a support portion that moves the movable body 1601 in the vertical direction. The base portion 1662 has a substantially plate shape, and a spring locking portion 1662a for locking the upper end of the helical spring 1664 is provided on the rear wall upper portion. One end (upper side) of the helical spring 1664 is connected to the spring locking portion 1662a, and the other end (lower side) of the helical spring 1664 is connected to the spring locking portion 1603c2 of the movable body lower portion 1603c. Also, the installation direction of the helical spring 1664 and the installation direction of the guide rail 1630 are the same direction (vertical direction), and the horizontal position coordinate of the installation position of the helical spring 1664 and the horizontal direction of the installation position of the guide rail 1660 are the same. A spring locking portion 1662a of the base portion 1662 and a spring locking portion 1603c2 of the movable body lower portion 1603c are formed so that the position coordinates are the same. With this structure, the movable direction of the central lower movable body 1601 and the extension / contraction direction of the helical spring 1664 are the same. Further, since the horizontal position coordinate of the installation position of the helical spring 1664 and the horizontal position coordinate of the installation position of the guide rail 1660 are the same, a moment of force in the horizontal direction is generated in the central lower movable body 1601. In some cases, the lower central movable body 1601 can be moved efficiently. In this embodiment, only one spring locking portion is formed on the base portion 1662, but a plurality of spring locking portions may be formed.

  In this embodiment, a tension spring is used as the helical spring 1664. When the movable body 1601 is located at the lower end (initial position), the helical spring 1664 is elastically deformed and extended. When the movable body 1601 is located at the upper end (target position), the helical spring 1664 is extended. However, it is not limited to this, but it is in a state in which it has shrunk and is not elastically deformed (details are described later). For example, even when the movable body 1601 is located at the upper end (target position), the helical spring 1664 may be in a state of being elastically deformed and extended, or the helical spring 1664 is in a state of being elastically deformed and reduced. It may be. In this embodiment, only one helical spring is provided, but a configuration in which a plurality of helical springs are provided may be used. Further, a leaf spring may be used instead of the helical spring 1664, or a flexible member such as rubber may be used. Further, instead of the helical spring 1664, a linear reciprocating solenoid or other linear actuator may be used.

  The photo sensor 1666 is used to detect that the movable body 1601 is located near the initial position (details of the initial position of the movable body 1601 will be described later). The photosensor 1666 is included in the various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 4 and is connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. The photosensor 1666 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and has a configuration in which light emitted from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit. The photosensor 1666 has a U-shape (a shape in which the left side is open) when viewed from above with the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion facing in the front-rear direction. Further, the photosensor 1666 is fixed to the lower portion of the front wall surface of the base portion 1662 with screws so that the light shielding portion 1603c3 of the movable body lower portion 1603c is positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion.

  The flexible substrate 1668 is used to electrically connect the LED substrate 1611 and the game board lamp drive circuit 530. One end of the flexible board 1668 is connected to the LED board 1611, and the other end of the flexible board 1668 is connected to the game board lamp drive circuit 530 through the base portion 1662.

  Next, operation | movement of the center lower movable body 1601 of the center lower part 1600 is demonstrated using FIG. 38A to 38D are right side views of the central lower accessory 1600 in which the central lower movable body 1601 represents the movement from the initial position to the target position in a stepwise manner. FIG. 38A shows a state where the central lower movable body 1601 is located at the initial position. FIG. 38B shows a state immediately after the central lower movable body 1601 starts moving from the initial position. FIG. 38 (c) shows a state where the central lower movable body 1601 has moved upward from the position of FIG. 38 (b). FIG. 38D shows a state where the central lower movable body 1601 moves further upward from the position of FIG. 38C and reaches the target position. 38, the state where the center of the connecting portion 1658 is directly below the rotation axis of the motor 1652 (the position coordinate in the front-rear direction of the center of the connection portion 1658 and the position coordinate in the front-rear direction of the rotation axis of the motor 1652). The rotation angle of the crank 1656 is defined as 0 °. Further, the direction in which the crank 1656 rotates in the order of upward, rearward, and downward is expressed as clockwise (or clockwise), and the opposite direction is expressed as counterclockwise (or counterclockwise). Further, the clockwise rotation angle of the crank 1656 is represented by a negative number, and the counterclockwise rotation angle is represented by a positive number. For example, a rotation angle obtained by rotating the crank 1656 by 10 ° clockwise from 0 ° is represented as −10 °, and an angle obtained by rotating, for example, 10 ° counterclockwise from 0 ° is represented by + 10 °.

  First, matters common to the operation of the central lower movable body 1601 shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (d) will be described. A part of the torque of the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 is transmitted to the central lower movable body 1601 by the crank 1656 and the connecting portion 1658 via the guide hole portion 1603c1 of the movable lower portion 1603c. That is, a force is applied to the connecting portion 1658 by driving (rotating) the motor 1652, and a driving (rotating) force of the motor 1652 is applied to the central lower movable body 1601 by the connecting portion 1658. Further, the connecting portion between the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 and the crank 1656 is a force application point, and the contact portion between the connecting portion 1658 and the guide hole 1603c1 is an application point of force. When the connecting portion 1658 is not positioned at the front and rear end portions of the guide hole portion 1603c1, the contact portion between the connecting portion 1658 and the guide hole portion 1603c1 is the upper portion or the lower portion of the connecting portion 1658, and the motor 1652 is disposed in the front-rear direction. Power does not work. When the rotation angle of the crank 1656 rotates counterclockwise from 0 ° to + 180 °, the connecting portion 1658 does not contact the front and rear ends of the guide hole portion 1603c1 (details will be described later). For this reason, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 rotates counterclockwise between 0 ° and + 180 °, a vertically upward force due to the drive (rotation) of the motor 1652 acts on the movable body 1601, and conversely When the crank 1656 rotates clockwise from + 180 ° to 0 °, a vertically downward force due to driving (rotation) of the motor 1652 acts on the movable body 1601. Further, the vertically upward force acting on the central lower movable body 1601 driven by the motor 1652 is proportional to the vertically upward component of the tangent in the locus of movement of the contact portion (upper portion) of the connecting portion 1658 serving as the force application point. . That is, assuming that the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is x °, the vertically upward force acting on the central lower movable body 1601 driven by the motor 1652 is proportional to sin (x °). For example, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is 0 °, the tangent line in the locus of movement of the contact portion (upper portion) is parallel to the front-rear direction, so the vertically upward component is 0 (= sin (0 °)). is there. Therefore, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is 0 °, a vertically upward force due to the driving of the motor 1652 does not act on the central lower movable body 1601. Further, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is + 90 °, the vertical upward component of the tangent in the locus of movement of the contact portion (upper portion) serving as the action point of the force of the connecting portion 1658 is the maximum value +1 (= sin (+90 °)). For this reason, assuming that the torque of the motor 1652 is constant, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is + 90 °, the vertically upward force due to the driving of the motor 1652 acts on the central lower movable body 1601 at the maximum.

  The motor 1652 is fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820. For this reason, the center of the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 functions as a fulcrum that is fixed and does not move. On the other hand, the connecting portion 1658 is displaced in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction with the center of the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 as a fulcrum by the rotation of the crank 1656 fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1652. Further, the central lower movable body 1601 is movable in the vertical direction, which is the installation direction of the guide rail 1660, and the central lower movable body 1601 is connected via a connecting portion 1658 and a guide hole portion 1603c1. Accordingly, the central lower movable body 1601 is displaced in the vertical direction by the vertical displacement of the connecting portion 1658.

  The spring locking portion 1662a of the base portion 1662 functions as a fulcrum of the helical spring 1664 (the direction in which the tip of the spring does not move), and the spring locking portion 1603c2 of the lower movable body 1603c is the point of action of the helical spring 1664 ( Acts as the spring tip moves). Since the spring locking portion 1603c2 is displaced by the vertical displacement of the connecting portion 1658, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is 0 °, the helical spring 1664 is extended to the maximum. On the other hand, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is + 180 °, the helical spring 1664 is configured to have a natural length. Therefore, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is 0 °, the vertically upward force by the helical spring 1664 acts on the central lower movable body 1601 at the maximum, and when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is + 180 °, A vertically upward force by the helical spring 1664 does not act on the central lower movable body 1601.

  Next, the state of the central lower movable body 1601 shown in FIG. FIG. 38A shows a state where the central lower movable body 1601 is located at the initial position. When the central lower movable body 1601 is located at the initial position, the connecting portion 1658 is a half of the front end portion of the guide hole portion 1603c1 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “restricting portion” or “restraining portion”) 1603c4. It stops by hitting the circular arc-shaped wall of the circle. Further, the crank 1656 in this case adjusts the mounting position of the motor 1652 and the movable body lower portion 1603c so as to rotate and stop at a predetermined angle clockwise from 0 °.

  In the state where the central lower movable body 1601 is located at the initial position, the motor 1652 is not driven. For this reason, the force of the motor 1652 is not acting on the connecting portion 1658. On the other hand, since the helical spring 1664 is elastically deformed and extended, a vertically upward force is applied to the movable body 1601 by the elastic force of the helical spring 1664. When the moment of force is ignored, a force (f1) obtained by subtracting the weight of the central lower movable body 1601 from the vertically upward force due to the elastic force of the helical spring 1664 acts on the connecting portion 1658. In this embodiment, in the state where the central lower movable body 1601 is located at the initial position, the spring coefficient of the helical spring and the central lower portion are set so that the elastic force of the helical spring 1664 is larger than the weight of the central lower movable body 1601. Although the initial position of the movable body 1601 is set, the present invention is not limited to this. Further, since the connecting portion 1658 is connected to the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 via the crank 1656, the locus of movement of the connecting portion 1658 draws an arc with the center of the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 as the rotating shaft. For this reason, the upward force f1 can be decomposed into a tangential force (f2) of the movement locus of the connecting portion 1658 and a force (f3) in the center direction of the arc of the movement locus of the connecting portion 1658. If the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is x °, f2 is expressed by f2 = f1 × sin (x °).

  In this embodiment, since the rotation angle of the crank 1656 at the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601 is a negative angle, the connecting portion 1658 causes the force f2 to act on the restricting portion 1603c4. On the other hand, the movable body lower portion 1603c including the restricting portion 1603c4 is fixed to the movable body rear side cover portion 1603b, and the movable body rear side cover portion 1603b is provided to the base portion 1662 via the guide rail 1660. With this configuration, the restricting portion 1603c4 cannot move in the front-rear direction. For this reason, the connecting portion 1658 is pressed against the restricting portion 1603c4 with the force of f2, and the connecting portion 1658 is kept in contact with the restricting portion 1603c4 and stopped. Note that the direction of the force f2 when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is a negative angle is opposite to the direction of the force acting on the connecting portion 1658 when the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 rotates counterclockwise. . Thus, even when the motor 1652 is not driven, the center lower movable body 1601 can be effectively suppressed to the initial position by the helical spring 1664 in some cases. In addition, there may be a case where the coupling portion 1658 can be kept in contact with the restricting portion 1603c4 and stopped by the excitation of the motor 1652. Even when the motor 1652 is not excited, the center lower movable body 1601 may be effectively suppressed to the initial position by the helical spring 1664. For this reason, the rotation angle of the crank 1656 at the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601 may be 0 ° or may be a positive angle.

  A method for setting the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601 will be described. In this embodiment, the state where the connecting portion 1658 is stopped by hitting the restricting portion 1603c4 is set as the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601. The initial position is set by rotating the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 clockwise until the connecting portion 1658 comes into contact with the restricting portion 1603c4 and stops. In this case, the light shielding portion 1603c3 of the movable body lower portion 1603c and the photo sensor 1666 (see FIG. 37) detect that the central lower movable body 1601 is located near the initial position, and then rotate the rotation axis of the motor 1652. The initial position of the central lower movable body 1601 is set by rotating it clockwise by a predetermined angle. The length of the short side of the guide hole portion 1603c1 is a length obtained by adding a slight margin (clearance) to the diameter of the roller portion of the connecting portion 1658, and is located at the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601. In the state, the rail stop portion 1660c1 may be provided so that the inner rail 1660a hits the rail stop portion 1660c1 of the outer rail 1660c and stops. In this case, the central lower movable body 1601 is not positioned below the initial position. Further, the rail stop portion 1660c1 may be provided so that the inner rail 1660a does not hit the rail stop portion 1660c1 of the outer rail 1660c in a state where the central lower movable body 1601 is located at the initial position. In this case, the central lower movable body 1601 may be positioned below the initial position.

  Next, the state of the central lower movable body 1601 shown in FIG. A state immediately after the central lower movable body 1601 starts moving from the initial position is shown. The rotation angle of the crank 1656 is approximately 0 °, but shows a slightly positive angle. For this reason, the direction of the force acting on the connecting portion 1658 by the elastic force of the helical spring 1664 coincides with the direction of the force acting on the connecting portion 1658 by the drive (rotation) of the motor 1652.

  Further, since the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is approximately 0 °, the upward force acting on the central lower movable body 1601 by the driving of the motor 1652 is small. On the other hand, since the helical spring 1664 is elastically deformed and extended, the upward force acting on the central lower movable body 1601 by the helical spring 1664 is increased. For this reason, the upward movement of the central lower movable body 1601 is promoted by the elastic force of the helical spring 1664, and the moving operation may be performed smoothly in the initial movement of the central lower movable body 1601. Even when the torque generated by driving the motor 1652 is small, the movable body 1601 may be able to move upward by the elastic force of the helical spring 1664.

  Next, the state of the central lower movable body 1601 shown in FIG. FIG. 38C shows a state where the central lower movable body 1601 moves upward from the state of FIG. 38B and the crank 1656 rotates about + 90 °. The length of the long side of the guide hole portion 1603c1 has a slight margin in the length of the straight line from the center of the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 to the circumferential end of the roller portion of the connecting portion 1658 through the center of the connecting portion 1658. Because of the added length, the connecting portion 1658 does not contact the rear end portion 1603c5 of the guide hole portion 1603c1. Thus, the crank 1656 can rotate at least 180 °. Further, the elastic force of the helical spring 1664 is reduced by the amount that the spring locking portion 1603c2 of the movable body lower portion 1603c has moved upward. On the other hand, since the crank 1656 is rotated by about + 90 °, an upward force due to the driving of the motor 1652 acts on the central lower movable body 1601 greatly.

  Next, the state of the central lower movable body 1601 shown in FIG. FIG. 38D shows a state where the central lower movable body 1601 has moved upward from the state of FIG. 38C and reached the target position. The connecting portion 1658 hits the restricting portion 1603c4 of the movable body lower portion 1603c and is stopped. The angle of the crank 1656 in this case is an angle obtained by adding + 180 ° to the crank angle at the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601. Further, since the restricting portion 1603c4 functions as a mechanical end of the connecting portion 1658, even when the motor 1652 continues to drive, the connecting portion 1658 hits the restricting portion 1603c4 and stops. On the other hand, since the crank 1656 is positioned substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the motor, the force in the backward direction of the connecting portion 1658 due to the gravity of the central lower movable body 1601 hardly acts. For this reason, the central lower movable body 1601 may be held at the target position by the excitation of the motor 1652. Further, even when the motor 1652 is de-energized and the motor 1652 is not excited, the center lower movable body 1601 can be held at the target position by the friction of the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 or the elastic force of the helical spring 1664. There is.

  When the central lower movable body 1601 moves from the target position (FIG. 38D) to the initial position (FIG. 38A), the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 is rotated clockwise. The method for setting the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601 is as described above.

  The central lower movable body 1601 can move upward when the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 are located at the initial positions. This is for the case where the motors 1070, 1152, and 1652 are stepped out, although the operation ranges of the central lower movable body 1601, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 do not overlap. Based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 has the upper photosensor 1084 in the on state and the upper front movable body 1002 positioned at the initial position shown in FIG. After confirming that the photosensor 1176 is on and the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the initial position, the motor 1652 is driven to move the center lower driver 1601 upward. The central lower movable body 1601 may be moved upward from the initial position when the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 are located at the lowest position, or while moving to the lowest position. Good (see FIG. 41 (h)).

  Further, in this embodiment, control for continuing to drive the motor 1652 is executed to move the central lower movable body 1601 from the initial position to the target position, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the central lower movable body 1601 is driven at the start of movement from the initial position and the crank 1656 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle from 0 °, the supply of power to the motor 1652 is stopped, and the elasticity of the helical spring 1664 You may perform control which moves the center lower movable body 1601 to a target position only with force. Further, when the photo sensor or the like detects that the central lower movable body 1601 has reached the vicinity of the target position, supply of electric power to the motor 1652 is started, and the central lower movable body 1601 is moved by the driving force or exciting force of the motor 1652. Control that stops at the target position may be executed, or control that does not start supplying power to the motor 1652 even when the central lower movable body 1601 reaches the vicinity of the target position may be executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the position of the central lower movable body 1601 in a state where the crank 1656 is rotated counterclockwise by + 180 ° from the state where the crank 1656 is positioned at the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601 The target position 1601 is not limited to this. For example, the position of the central lower movable body 1601 in a state where the crank 1656 is rotated counterclockwise by + 90 ° from the state where the crank 1656 is positioned at the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601 may be set as the target position. Further, the target position of the central lower movable body 1601 may be arbitrarily set by arbitrarily setting the rotation angle of the crank 1656. For example, the target position of the central lower movable body 1601 may be set according to the reliability of the big hit in the reach production, or according to the player's advantage in various big hit games or small hit games, The target position of the central lower movable body 1601 may be set.

  In addition, the movable body 1601 in the present embodiment can perform a vertical movement operation, but is not limited thereto. For example, the movable body 1601 can be moved in various directions by installing the movable body support unit 1650 of the central lower accessory 1600 in various directions.

Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 38 again.
(C1)
A movable body (for example, movable body 1601);
A first member related to the operation of the movable body (for example, a helical spring 1664 shown in FIG. 37);
A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100) comprising:
The movable body is a movable body that is movable at least from a first position to a second position (for example, a target position (see FIG. 38D)) (for example, see FIGS. 38A to 38D). ),
The first position is an initial position of the movable body (for example, see FIG. 38 (a)),
The first member can at least regulate the operation of the movable body located at the first position (for example, the connecting portion 1658 at the end of the crank 1656 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 is A member that is positioned obliquely forward and downward with respect to the rotation axis so as not to move by striking the restricting portion 1603c4 of the guide hole portion 1603c1 (see, for example, FIG. 38A)
The first member moves when the movable body starts to move from the first position (for example, when the crank 1656 rotates by 0 ° or more backward with respect to the vertical downward direction). It is a member that can promote the movement (for example, promote the upward movement of the movable body 1601) (for example, see FIGS. 37 and 38).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, the first member regulates the operation of the movable body when the movable body is in the initial position, and promotes the operation of the movable body after the movable body starts moving. You may be able to jump out vigorously. In addition, the first member maintains the initial position of the movable body in a state where the movable body is in the initial position, and after the movable body starts its operation, assists the operation of the movable body. May be performed smoothly.

(C2)
The game stand according to (C1) above,
Drive means (for example, a motor 1652 shown in FIG. 37) capable of driving the movable body;
A second member (for example, a crank 1656 and a connecting portion 1658 shown in FIG. 37) for connecting the driving means and the movable body;
In the state where the movable body is located at the first position (hereinafter referred to as “first state”), the movable member is moved in the first direction (for example, rightward) by the driving unit. Is a movable body that can start moving when a force is applied in a counterclockwise rotation direction as viewed from (see, for example, FIGS. 38 (a) to (d)),
In the first state, the movable body does not start moving when the second member is applied with a force in a second direction (for example, a clockwise rotation direction when viewed from the right). (For example, see FIG. 38 (a)),
The first member is a member that acts so that force is applied to the second member in the second direction in the first state (see, for example, FIG. 38A).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, there are cases where the operation of the movable body can be effectively suppressed in a state where the driving means is not driven.

(C3)
The game stand according to (C2) above,
The movable body is a movable body provided with a restriction portion (for example, a restriction portion 1603c4 of the guide hole portion 1603c1 shown in FIG. 38) that restricts the movement of the second member.
The restricting portion restricts the second member from moving in the second direction in the first state (for example, see FIG. 38A).
A game stand characterized by that.
(C4)
The game stand according to (C3) above,
When the movable body is located at the first position, the force of the first member is applied to the second member in the second direction, and the second member is applied to the restricting portion. By contact, the operation of the movable body is regulated (see, for example, FIG. 38 (a)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, even when a force is applied to the second member in the second direction, the operation of the movable body may be surely restricted by the configuration of the restricting portion.

(C5)
The game stand according to (C2) to (C4) above,
The driving means is a motor (for example, a motor 1652 shown in FIG. 37),
The second member is a member to which a force is applied by rotation of the motor,
The first direction is one rotation direction (for example, a counterclockwise rotation direction when viewed from the right),
The second direction is the other rotation direction (for example, a clockwise rotation direction when viewed from the right) (for example, see FIG. 38).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, when the force is applied in the second direction by the first member, the movement of the second member is regulated by the regulation unit, and the movement is also regulated by the excitation of the motor. Therefore, there are cases where the movable body can be reliably kept at the initial position.

(C6)
The game stand according to any one of (C2) to (C5) above,
The movable body is a movable body movable in the vertical direction,
The movable body has a movable body (for example, a scotch yoke mechanism) whose height changes when a connecting portion (for example, a coupling portion 1658 shown in FIG. 37) of the second member is displaced in the vertical direction. (See, for example, FIG. 38).
The first member is an elastic member (for example, a helical spring 1664 shown in FIG. 37),
The movable body is a movable body that may be promoted in the vertical direction by the elastic force of the first member (see, for example, FIGS. 38B to 38D).
A game stand characterized by that.

(C7)
The game stand according to any one of (C1) to (C6) above,
The first member is in a state of being elastically deformed at least when the movable body is located at the first position (for example, a state in which the helical spring 1664 is deformed by being extended from a natural length). (See, for example, FIG. 38 (a)),
The movable body is a movable body in which the first member that is elastically deformed may be promoted by a force to return to the original (see, for example, FIGS. 38B to 38D).
A game stand characterized by that.
(C8)
The game stand according to any one of (C1) to (C7) above,
The direction in which the first member returns from the elastically deformed state is the same as the direction in which the movable body moves from the first position to the second position (see, for example, FIG. 38).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above game table, there is a case where the force of the first member can be utilized to the maximum extent in the moving direction of the movable body. Further, depending on the elastic force of the first member, the first member may contribute more to the movement of the movable body than the driving means.

(C9)
The game stand according to any one of (C1) to (C8) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(C10)
The game stand according to any one of (C1) to (C8) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.
In this embodiment, the movable body is operated in the up-and-down direction, and the first direction and the second direction are rotational directions, but the directions may be the same. For example, the second member is composed of a plurality of parts, and the rotational movement of the motor is converted into a linear motion (for example, the first gear formed on the circumference meshes with the linear gear formed on the long side of the rectangle, etc. The operation direction of the driving means may be matched with the operation direction of the movable body.
Moreover, things other than a motor can also be employ | adopted for a drive means. For example, a linear reciprocating solenoid may be used.
The movable body may be configured such that the first position (initial position) moves downward at the top, or the first position (initial position) moves forward at the rear. Alternatively, the first position (initial position) may be a front part and may move backward, or the first position (initial position) may be a right part and moved to the left. Alternatively, the first position (initial position) may be the left part and may move to the right.
Further, the first member may be other than the elastic member. For example, a linear reciprocating solenoid or linear actuator may be used.
Further, the first position (initial position) of the movable body may not always be a fixed position.

The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Appendix c1)
A movable body,
A first member related to the operation of the movable body;
A game machine equipped with
The movable body is a movable body that is movable at least from a first position to a second position;
The first position is an initial position of the movable body,
The first member is a member that can at least regulate the operation of the movable body located at the first position;
The first member is a member that can promote the movement of the movable body when the movable body starts moving from the first position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c2)
The game stand according to appendix c1,
The game stand according to claim 1,
Driving means capable of driving the movable body;
A second member for connecting the driving means and the movable body;
In the state where the movable body is located at the first position (hereinafter referred to as “first state”), the movable member applies a force in the first direction by the driving means. It is a movable body that can start moving when
The movable body is a movable body that does not start moving when the second member is applied with a force in the second direction in the first state;
The first member is a member that acts so that force is applied to the second member in the second direction in the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c3)
A game machine according to appendix c2,
The movable body is a movable body provided with a restricting portion that restricts the movement of the second member,
The restricting portion restricts the second member from moving in the second direction in the first state;
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c4)
A gaming machine according to appendix c2 or c3,
The driving means is a motor;
The second member is a member to which a force is applied by rotation of the motor,
The first direction is one rotational direction;
The second direction is the other rotation direction,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c2 to c4,
The movable body is a movable body movable in the vertical direction,
The movable body is a movable body whose height changes as the connecting portion of the second member with the movable body is displaced in the vertical direction.
The first member is an elastic member,
The movable body is a movable body that may be promoted in the vertical direction by the elastic force of the first member.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c5,
The first member is at least elastically deformed when the movable body is located at the first position;
The movable body is a movable body in which the first member that is elastically deformed may be promoted by a force that returns to its original state.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c6,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c6,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  Next, production example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. FIG. 39A to FIG. 41L show production example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 in this order in this order. First, a configuration used in common among the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 39 to 44 will be described with reference to FIG. 39A as an example. 39A, the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the logo object 900 shown in FIG. Logo movable body 902, upper front movable body 1002 of the upper front ornament character 1000, upper right side movable member 1201 of the upper right side character 1200, upper left side movable member 1301 of the upper left side character 1300, lower right side A lower right side movable body 1401 of the accessory 1400, a lower left side movable body 1501 of the lower left side accessory 1500, and a central lower movable body 1601 of the center lower accessory 1600 are schematically shown.

  The special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 2 display device 214 is a special figure. One display device 212 is shown on the right side. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is shown on the upper side of the special figure 1 display device 212, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 is shown on the upper side of the special figure 2 display device 214. In addition, the extinguished portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lighting portions are shown in black. In addition, since the maximum number of the hold of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in this embodiment can be accumulated, four LEDs of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are provided.

  39A, the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, the upper right side movable body 1201, the upper left side movable body 1301, the lower right side movable body 1401, and the lower left side movable body 1501. , And the central lower movable body 1601 are located at the initial position. When the lower right side movable body 1401, the lower left side movable body 1501, and the central lower movable body 1601 are located at the initial position, they are hidden by the center decoration member 806 and the game board decoration member 808, and these movable bodies It is difficult for the player to visually recognize the whole. 39 to 41, for the sake of explanation, the lower right side movable body 1401, the lower left side movable body 1501, and the central lower movable body 1601 that are difficult for the player to visually recognize when originally located at the initial position. Is illustrated.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39A, symbol display areas 208a to 208c for performing decorative display variation display and stop display are allocated to the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In a case where a predetermined effect is executed by enlarging the effect display area 208d, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in areas other than the center of the image display area, for example, the lower left corner as necessary. In some cases.

  A fourth symbol display area is provided on the lower right side in the effect display area 208d. The left side in the fourth symbol display area is the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, and the right side is the fourth symbol display area t2 for special figure 2. While the special figure 1 variable game is not in operation, if the result of the previous special figure 1 variable game is out of place, an image representing "x" as the special figure 1 4th figure is the 4th figure for the special figure 1 It is displayed in the display area t1. Also, when the special figure 1 variable game is not in operation, if the result of the previous special figure 1 variable game is a win, an image representing “A” as the fourth figure of the special figure 1 is used for the special figure 1 It is displayed in the four symbol display area t1. While the special figure 2 variable game is not in operation, if the result of the previous special figure 2 variable game is out of place, an image representing "x" as the special figure 2 4th figure is the 4th figure for the special figure 2 It is displayed in the display area t2. In addition, while the special figure 2 variable game is not in operation, if the result of the previous special figure 2 variable game is a win, an image representing "A" as the special figure 2 fourth pattern is used for the special figure 2 It is displayed in the four symbol display area t2. Further, an image representing “−” as the fourth symbol is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, and “−” as the fourth symbol during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game. Is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t2.

  A horizontally long special figure 1 hold icon display area A is provided on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, a number of special figure 1 hold icons a1, a2 and the like corresponding to the number of holds in the special figure 1 are displayed. Further, according to the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon, whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable game related to the hold is appropriate can be notified (pre-reading notice) with a predetermined reliability. In this example, a white circular hold icon is displayed as the display mode with the lowest reliability (see the special figure 1 hold icon a1 in FIG. 39A), and the character number length is set as the display mode with relatively high reliability. A hold icon representing the face is displayed (see the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in FIG. 39C). In this embodiment, a maximum of four special figure 1 hold icons can be displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area A. A plurality of special figure 1 hold icons are arranged and displayed in order from right to left in the special figure 1 hold icon display area as the holding order decreases.

  In addition, a special figure 2 hold icon display area in which the number of special figure 2 hold icons corresponding to the number of holds in the special figure 2 is displayed may be provided. In that case, for example, a vertically long special figure 2 reserved icon display area is provided adjacent to the right side surface of the effect display area 208d. Although the special figure 2 hold icon display area is not provided when there is no special figure 2 hold and is provided only when the special figure 2 hold is accumulated, it may be always provided. The special figure 2 hold icon display area may be arranged on the right side of the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, or may be arranged above the special figure 1 hold icon display area A. During the promiscuous electric power supply support, it is easy for a game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232, so that the player can easily visually recognize the special figure 2 hold icon displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area. In addition, the display position of the special figure 1 hold icon display area A and the display position of the special figure 2 hold icon display area may be switched.

  Further, the state in which all segments are represented in white in the special figure 1 display device 212 indicates that the special figure 1 variable display is being performed (see FIG. 39B). The same applies to the special figure 2 display device 214. Further, the variation display of each decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c during the execution of the special symbol variable game is indicated by a downward arrow (see FIG. 39B).

  FIG. 39 (a) shows a state in which the variable games of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are not in operation. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the first special symbol "Special figure I" is stopped and displayed. On the special figure 2 display device 214, the first special symbol "Special figure I" is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display areas t1 and t2 of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “x” is displayed as the fourth symbol. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 8” is stopped and displayed as a combination of ornamental symbols, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the previous special symbol variable game is wrong has been missed. Yes.

  The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 reports that there are two special figure 1 holds. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 notifies that there is no special figure 2 hold. In the special figure 1 holding icon display area A of the decorative symbol display device 208, two special figure 1 holding icons a1 and a2 are displayed in a white circular display mode.

  Further, the logo movable body 902 emits white light. The logo movable body 902 emits white light during normal times when no notice is given.

  FIG. 39B shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. In this example, the start order of the special figure 1 variable game is as follows. In this example, one special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off and the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display. The 4th symbol of t1 starts to display the variation, and then the display of the reduced animation of the special figure 1 holding icon is executed, and then the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. Note that the order of the start time of these operations may be changed.

  Further, prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 39 (b), the main control unit 300 uses a success / failure determination table (not shown) in the special figure 1 related lottery process (see step S231, FIG. 7). Judgment is made and it is determined that the result of the special figure variation game is out of place. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 1 symbol determination table (not shown), “Special Figure I” is selected. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 1 variable display time determination table (not shown), the variable time is determined. In addition, the main control unit 300 transmits a symbol variation start command including information on these lottery results to the first sub-control unit 400 in a command setting transmission process (step S233, see FIG. 7).

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, performs a predetermined effect lottery process within the effect control process (see step S309, FIG. 8), and the special figure 1 variable game. It is decided not to execute the notice effect.

  In the display of the reduced animation of the special figure 1 holding icon, the special figure 1 holding icon a1 having the first holding order is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 holding icon a2 moves to the right. Note that the special figure 1 hold icon a1 having the first hold order may be displayed as a variable icon. The change icon is displayed as a notice effect of the special figure change game being executed.

  FIG. 39 (c) shows a state in which only one game ball enters the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 increases to two. The second LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is lit, indicating that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has increased from 1 to 2. In addition, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information related to the increased suspension of the special figure 1 and pre-determines the special symbols 1 variable game stop symbols and the like prior to the success / failure determination in the special figure-related lottery process. The figure prefetch process (step S224, see FIG. 7) is executed, and the prefetch result information command including the result of the prior determination is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process (step S233, see FIG. 7). In this example, the result of the pre-judgment is a big hit of “Special Figure A”.

  The first sub-control unit 400 receives the pre-read result information command from the main control unit 300, performs a predetermined effect lottery process within the effect control process (step S309, see FIG. 8), and holds the increased special figure 1 on hold. The display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon shown is determined to be a mode representing the face of the character's head. As a result, a special figure 1 hold icon a3 representing the face of the character's head is newly displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area A. The decorative symbol display device 208 performs a pre-reading notice with a relatively high degree of reliability on the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is in second place.

  FIG. 39D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the shaking variation state in the left symbol display area 208a. FIG. 39 (e) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a swinging fluctuation state in the right symbol display area 208c. FIG. 39 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a swinging fluctuation state in the middle symbol display area 208 b. As a result, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in a fluctuation state. In this manner, the decorative symbol variation display is temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol (first symbol), the right symbol (second symbol), and the middle symbol (third symbol).

  FIG. 39 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the first special symbol "Special figure I" is stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol “x” indicating that the special symbol 1 variable game is out of play is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display region t1 for special symbol 1, and the symbol display regions 208a to 208c are displayed in the symbol display regions 208a to 208c. As a combination of the decorative symbols, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 3” indicating a disengagement is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is notified that the determination result of the finished special figure 1 variable game is out of place.

  FIG. 39 (h) shows a state where the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 39 (h), the main control unit 300 determines the success / failure using a validity determination table (not shown) in the special figure 1 related lottery process (see step S231, FIG. 7). Then, it is determined that the result of the special figure variation game is out of sync. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 1 symbol determination table (not shown), “Special Figure I” is selected. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 1 variable display time determination table (not shown), the variable time is determined. In addition, the main control unit 300 transmits a symbol variation start command including information on these lottery results to the first sub-control unit 400 in a command setting transmission process (step S233, see FIG. 7).

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, performs a predetermined effect lottery process within the effect control process (see step S309, FIG. 8), Decide to execute the pre-reading notice effect using the logo movable body 902 for the second special figure 1 variable game. Note that it may be determined in advance that the prefetching notice is executed at the time of starting to hold the special figure 1 variable game subject to the prefetching notice.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 hold icon decreasing animation is executed, the special figure 1 hold icon a2 having the first holding order is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 hold icon a3. Moves to the right.

  FIG. 39 (i) shows a state in which a pre-reading notice using the logo movable body 902 is started during the special figure 1 variable game. The logo movable body 902 performs pre-reading notice by executing vertical vibration that repeatedly moves up and down minutely. FIG. 39 (i) shows a state where the logo movable body 902 is lowered from the initial position. Further, the logo movable body 902 changes its light emission mode from white to blue. In this example, the logo movable body 902 emits white light at the normal time when the notice or the like is not executed, and the light emission color changes to blue or the like when the prefetch notice or the like is executed. In addition, the pre-reading notice may be a gusset notice (false notice) in which the special figure change game subject to the pre-reading notice is lost.

  FIG. 39 (j) shows a state where the logo movable body 902 is oscillating up and down. In FIG. 39 (j), the logo movable body 902 rises from the position shown in FIG. 39 (i) and returns to the vicinity of the initial position.

  FIG. 39 (k) shows a state where the logo movable body 902 is lowered again. With this downward movement, the vertical vibration of the logo movable body 902 ends. Further, the logo movable body 902 continues to emit blue light even after the vibration is stopped, and executes a pre-reading notice.

  FIG. 39 (l) shows a state where the logo movable body 902 has moved to the uppermost position. As described above, when the logo movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position, the photo sensor 984 shown in FIG. 18 detects the light shielding piece (not shown) of the sector gear 976, so that the first sub-control unit 400 displays the logo. It can be determined that the movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position. The logo movable body 902 is lowered by a predetermined number of steps from the uppermost position and returns to the initial position. Further, when the logo movable body 902 moves to the uppermost position, the rotation decoration portion 1124 of the upper rear movable body 1102 becomes visible. As described above, even when the upper rear movable body 1102 is not operating, the rotation decoration portion 1124 may be visible to the player.

  FIG. 40A continued from FIG. 39L shows a state where the logo movable body 902 has returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 40B shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a swinging fluctuation state in the left symbol display area 208a. FIG. 40C shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a swinging fluctuation state in the right symbol display area 208c. FIG. 40 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a swinging fluctuation state in the middle symbol display area 208b. As a result, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in a shaking fluctuation state.

  FIG. 40 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the first special symbol "Special figure I" is stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol “x” indicating that the special symbol 1 variable game is out of play is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display region t1 for special symbol 1, and the symbol display regions 208a to 208c are displayed in the symbol display regions 208a to 208c. As a combination of the decorative symbols, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 2” indicating a disengagement is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the determination result of the finished special figure 1 variable game is out of place.

  FIG. 40 (f) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 40 (f), the main control unit 300 determines the success / failure using a validity determination table (not shown) in the special figure 1 related lottery process (see step S231, FIG. 7). Then, it is determined that the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 1 symbol determination table (not shown), “Special Figure A” is selected. Next, as a result of performing the lottery process with reference to the special figure 1 variable display time determination table (not shown), the variable time is determined. In addition, the main control unit 300 transmits a symbol variation start command including information on these lottery results to the first sub-control unit 400 in a command setting transmission process (step S233, see FIG. 7).

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, performs a predetermined effect lottery process in the effect control process (see step S309, FIG. 8), and executes the special figure change being executed. As a game advance notice, it is determined to execute a step-up advance notice, a notice using a character image of a Bancho, and a super reach effect.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 hold icon decreasing animation is executed, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is deleted.

  FIG. 40G shows a state in which the logo movable body 902 starts vertical vibration. FIG. 40G shows a state where the logo movable body 902 is lowered from the initial position. Further, the logo movable body 902 changes its emission color from blue to red with the start of vibration. In FIG. 39 (i), the logo movable body 902 starts the first vibration, and in FIG. 40 (g), the logo movable body 902 starts the second vibration. The logo movable body 902 changes the emission color every time the vibration starts, and increases the expectation level of the notification target. In addition, the logo movable body 902 executes a continuous notice by changing the emission color for each special figure variation game. The change in emission color also functions as an increase in the expectation of continuous notice. In addition, when the logo movable body 902 is lowered, a part of the upper rear movable body 1102 (for example, the rotation decoration portion 1124) may be visible to the player.

  FIG. 40 (h) shows a state where the upper left side movable body 1301 has moved from the initial position to the lower right and stopped and stopped. In this example, the first stage of step-up notice is executed by moving the upper left side movable body 1301 obliquely downward to the right from the initial position. Further, the vertical vibration of the logo movable body 902 is continuing, and in FIG. 40 (h), the logo movable body 902 rises and returns to the vicinity of the initial position. In addition, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed at the lower left corner of the image display area.

  FIG. 40 (i) shows a state in which the upper right side movable body 1201 has moved from the initial position to the left diagonally downward direction and stopped. The second stage of step-up notice is executed by moving the upper right side movable body 1201 obliquely downward to the left from the initial position. Moreover, the vertical vibration of the logo movable body 902 is continuing, and the logo movable body 902 moves downward from the initial position. In addition, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a in a shaking fluctuation state. In addition, an animation in which the character's dress length is undressed and a character string “chance” are displayed in the effect display area 208d enlarged in the center of the display area, and a notice of the change is executed.

  FIG. 40J shows a state in which the rotating operation of the movable body front portion 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201 and the rotating operation of the movable body front portion 1303 of the upper left side movable body 1301 are performed. The third stage of the step-up notice is executed by the counterclockwise rotation operation of the movable body front portion 1203 and the clockwise rotation operation of the movable body front portion 1303.

  Further, the vertical vibration of the logo movable body 902 is finished, and the logo movable body 902 is moved to the uppermost position. After moving the logo movable body 902 to the uppermost position, the logo movable body 902 is driven a predetermined number of steps to return to the initial position. In addition, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right pattern display area 208c in a swinging state. In the effect display area 208d, the animation in which the character's dress length broke off and the character string “chance” are erased. The character string “reach” is displayed and the reach start effect is executed.

  FIG. 40 (k) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a swinging variation state in the symbol display regions 208a and 208c in which the symbol display regions 208a to 208c are enlarged in the center of the display region. At the start of the reach effect, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and displayed at the center of the display area, and it is notified that the decorative symbols are aligned in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c.

  Further, the logo movable body 902 moves downward and returns to the initial position. Further, the movable body front part 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201 rotates clockwise, the movable body front part 1303 of the upper left side movable body 1301 rotates counterclockwise, and the movable body front part 1203 and the movable body front part are rotated. 1303 has returned to the initial position. In addition, a part of “decoration 3” in the symbol display areas 208 a and 208 c is hidden by a part of the upper right side movable body 1201 and a part of the upper left side movable body 1301.

  FIG. 40 (l) shows a state in which the upper right side movable body 1201 moves diagonally right upward and returns to the initial position, and the upper left side movable body 1301 moves diagonally left upward and returns to the initial position. ing. At the start of reach production, all the movable bodies are temporarily returned to the initial positions.

  In FIG. 41A continued from FIG. 40 (l), the lower right side movable body 1401, the lower left side movable body 1501, and the center lower movable body 1601 move upward from the initial position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 The state located in front is shown. Further, the movable body 1403 of the lower right side movable body 1401 and the movable body 1503 of the lower left side movable body 1501 rotate about the horizontal direction from the posture at the initial position, and the posture changes. In addition, an effect animation is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and a development effect to a super reach effect is executed.

  FIG. 41B shows a state in which the lower right side movable body 1401, the lower left side movable body 1501, and the center lower movable body 1601 have moved downward and returned to the initial position. Further, the postures of the movable body 1403 of the lower right side movable body 1401 and the movable body 1503 of the lower left side movable body 1501 are restored to the original positions. In addition, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area, and a super reach effect is started. The effect animation is continuously displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 41 (c) shows a state in which the super reach effect is started. The effect display area 208d is enlarged and displayed in the center of the image display area, the image of the main character is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, the image of the enemy character is displayed on the right side, and the character string “subjugation reach” is in the center. Is displayed. In the super reach production of this example, an animation of a scene where the main character and the enemy character slash is displayed in the production display area 208d.

  FIG. 41D shows a state in which the super reach effect is continued. In the effect display area 208d, the character string of “subjugation reach” is deleted, and the character string of “one blow!” Is displayed instead, suggesting that the slashing is started.

  FIG. 41 (e) shows a state where the super reach effect is continued. In the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed above the character string “one hit!”. An image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed to prompt the player to operate the chance button 136 when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. Note that during the operation effective period of the chance button 136, an image (for example, a meter image or a number indicating the remaining number of seconds) indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period may be displayed.

  FIG. 41 (f) shows a state where the player has operated the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. On the right side of FIG. 41 (f), a chance button 136 and a player's hand operating it are schematically shown. By operating the chance button 136, a slash animation is started.

  FIG. 41G shows a state where the logo movable body 902 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position. The movement of the logo movable body 902 to the top is an operation for causing the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 arranged behind the logo movable body 902 to appear in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. Therefore, the upward movement of the logo movable body 902 can be used as a sign that the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 move downward. When the logo movable body 902 moves to the uppermost position, it may be expected that the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 move downward to further develop the effect.

  FIG. 41 (h) shows a state in which a moving body other than the logo movable body 902 has been moved. The lower right side movable body 1401, the lower left side movable body 1501, and the center lower movable body 1601 move upward from the initial position and stop in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The postures of the lower right side movable body 1401 and the lower left side movable body 1501 are changed. Further, the upper right side movable body 1201 moves to the left diagonally downward from the initial position and stops, and the movable body front portion 1203 executes the rotation operation and stops. Similarly, the upper left side movable body 1301 moves diagonally downward to the right from the initial position and stops, and the movable body front portion 1303 performs a rotation operation and stops. Further, the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 move downward and stop at the lowest position. Further, the upper movable body 1002 moves to the lowermost position, and then the movable lens body 1002a moves forward. In addition, the rotating decoration portion 1124 that is rotating is viewed through the lens 1018 of the upper front movable body 1002 in an enlarged manner.

  In the effect display area 208d, the image of the main character and the image of the enemy character are erased, and the effect animation is displayed on almost the entire surface.

  FIG. 41 (i) shows a state in which an effect (premier effect) for notifying that the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit is executed during the super reach effect. An operation of opening and rotating the decorative portion of the movable body 1425 of the lower right side movable body 1401 is executed, and an operation of opening and rotating the decorative portion of the movable body 1525 of the lower left side movable body 1501 is executed. Further, the rotation operation of the circular film 1605 of the central lower movable body 1601 is performed. Further, the rotation operation of the rotary decoration portion 1124 of the upper rear movable body 1102 is performed. Also, seven-color effects (rainbow effects) are displayed on almost the entire surface of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 41 (j) shows a state in which an animation for informing the result of slashing is displayed. In the effect display area 208d, the animation of the seven-color effect is erased, the image of the hero character who won the slashing on the right side, and the image of the enemy character that was slashed and fell on the left side are displayed. A character string is displayed. Further, “decoration 3” is displayed under the character string “win”, suggesting that “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the super reach effect is ended.

  As the super reach production ends, each movable body returns to the initial position. After the lens movable body 1002a of the upper front movable body 1002 moves rearward, the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 move upward to return to the initial position, and then the logo movable body 902 moves downward. Move and return to the initial position. The order of movement of the other movable bodies to the initial position may be simultaneous, or may be set in an arbitrary order.

  In FIG. 41 (k), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged to the original position in the center of the image display area, and “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is temporarily stopped as a combination of the ornamental patterns in a fluctuation state. The displayed state is shown. Further, the logo movable body 902 moves downward and returns to the initial position.

  FIG. 41 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special special jackpot symbol “R” is specially displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol “A” indicating that the special symbol 1 variable game is a big hit is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display region t1 for special symbol 1, and is displayed in the symbol display regions 208a to 208c. As a combination of decorative symbols, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” indicating a special big hit is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game has ended is a special big hit (probability big hit).

  Next, production example 2 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 42 and FIGS. 43 and 44 described later, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214, special figure 1 hold lamp 218, special figure 2 hold lamp 220, upper right side accessory 1200, The upper left side accessory 1300, the lower right side accessory 1400, the lower left side accessory 1500, and the center lower accessory 1600 are not shown.

  FIG. 42A shows a state in which the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 are located at the initial positions. When the lens movable body 1002a moves forward after the upper front movable body 1002 moves to the lowermost position, the logo movable body 902 moves to the top in order to avoid contact between the lens movable body 1002a and the logo movable body 902. After that, the lens moves to the lowermost position, and the lens movable body 1002a moves forward. However, when the lens movable body 1002a does not move forward, the lens movable body 1002a and the logo movable body 902 do not contact each other, so that the logo movable body 902 is in the initial position as shown in FIG. The upper front movable body 1002 may move downward in a state where it is still positioned. Further, the upper rear movable body 1102 may move downward together with the upper front movable body 1002 or may not move.

  Further, the upper right side movable body 1201 of the upper right side accessory 1200, the upper left side movable body 1301 of the upper left side accessory 1300, the lower right side movable body 1401 of the lower right side accessory 1400, and the lower left side accessory 1500. Since the lower left side movable body 1501 and the central lower movable body 1601 of the central lower accessory 1600 do not come into contact with other movable bodies, they can be moved at any timing.

  FIG. 42C shows a state in which the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 are located at the initial positions. FIG.42 (d) continuing from FIG.42 (c) has shown the state which the logo movable body 902 moved to the uppermost position. FIG.42 (e) continuing from FIG.42 (d) has shown the state which the upper front movable body 1002 moved to the lowest part. In this manner, only the upper front movable body 1002 of the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 may be moved downward. Thereby, an image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 via the lens 1018 of the upper front movable body 1002 can be shown to the player.

  Even when the lens movable body 1002a is located at the forefront position, the distance between the lens 1018 and the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shorter than the focal length of the lens 1018. Therefore, various displays displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 via the lens 1018 (for example, a hold icon, a variation icon, a cut-in image, a character image, a conversation image, a decorative symbol, a fourth symbol, a normal symbol decorative symbol) , Effect image, tutorial display explaining production, tutorial display explaining operation, button image, meter image, error display (for example, bottom plate full error), alert notification (for example, alert notification of prepaid card forgetting prevention) ), The player can observe the upright virtual image, and the player can observe the upright virtual image enlarged at a predetermined magnification to make the display stand out.

  Next, production example 3 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43A shows a state where the logo movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position, and the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 are located at the lowermost position. An erecting virtual image of the rotation decoration unit 1124 is visually recognized through the lens 1018.

  FIG. 43B continued from FIG. 43A shows a state where the lens movable body 1002a of the upper front movable body 1002 has moved forward. As the movable lens body 1002a moves forward, the distance between the lens 1018 and the rotating decoration portion 1124 approaches the focal length of the lens 1018. Therefore, FIG. 43B is more enlarged than FIG. 43A. The upright virtual image of the rotated decorative portion 1124 can be observed. Thereby, the rotation decoration part 1124 may be shown enlarged and the rotation operation of the rotation decoration part 1124 may be made conspicuous.

  In FIG. 43 (c), the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 are positioned at the initial positions, and “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display is executed at a relatively slow speed. “Decoration 3” is arranged in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and a reach effect (normal reach effect) is executed. In FIG. 43C, “decoration 2” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  In FIG. 43 (d) following FIG. 43 (c), the decorative symbol variation display is continued at a relatively slow speed in the middle symbol display area 208 b, and “decoration 3” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b. Shows the state.

  In FIG. 43 (e) following FIG. 43 (d), the decorative symbol variation display is continued at a relatively slow speed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 4” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Shows the state.

  In this example, the decorative symbol is not shown to the player via the lens 1018. For example, when the result of the special figure variation game is out of place, the upper front movable body 1002 does not move from the initial position, and the decorative design does not have to be enlarged by the lens 1018 and shown to the player.

  In FIG. 43 (f), the logo movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position, the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position, the lens movable body 1002a is located at the frontmost position, and the upper rear movable position. The state where the body 1102 is located in the initial position is shown. Part of the upper rear movable body 1102 (the rotation decoration portion 1124) is visually recognized. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the fluctuation state, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, the decoration symbol fluctuation display is executed at a relatively slow speed to achieve reach effect (normal reach effect). ) Is executed. As shown in FIG. 43 (f), an enlarged upright virtual image of “decoration 2” displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b is observed through the lens 1018.

  FIG. 43 (g) continued from FIG. 43 (f) shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the swinging variation state in the middle symbol display area 208 b. An enlarged erecting virtual image of “decoration 3” displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is observed through the lens 1018. Thereby, for example, at the time of a big hit, it may be possible to increase the expectation by showing the middle symbols arranged at the end of the reach effect in an enlarged manner.

  FIG. 43 (h) continued from FIG. 43 (g) shows a state where the logo movable body 902 and the upper front movable body 1002 are returned to the initial positions. The order of returning each movable body to the initial position is such that after the lens movable body 1002a moves to the rearmost position, the upper front movable body 1002 moves upward to return to the initial position, and then the logo movable body 902 moves downward. Move and return to the initial position.

  As described above, there is a case where the game effect can be sharpened by using the upper front movable body 1002 in the reach effect at the time of losing and using the upper front movable body 1002 in the reach effect at the time of the big hit.

  Next, an effect example 4 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  44A, the logo movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position, the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position, the lens movable body 1002a is located at the forefront position, and the upper rear movable. The state where the body 1102 is located in the initial position is shown. In addition, the special symbol variation game is being executed, the decorative display variation display is performed in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c, and the decorative symbol variation display is visually recognized through the lens 1018. In addition, the game state at the present time is in the process of being probabilistic (during probable electric power support), and the character string “Probably changing” is displayed below the effect display area 208d. Further, the image of the main character is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and the image of the enemy character is displayed on the right side, and the effect at the time of probability change is executed.

  As described above, in the probability variation state, the decorative symbol change display may be emphasized by visually recognizing the decorative symbol through the lens 1018. It should be noted that the gaming state in which the decorative symbol is visually recognized via the lens 1018 may be a latent state (a special figure high-accuracy common figure low probability state) or a short-time state (a special figure low-accuracy common figure high probability state).

  44B, the logo movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position, the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position, the lens movable body 1002a is located at the forefront position, and the upper rear movable. The state where the body 1102 is located in the initial position is shown. In addition, when the special figure variable game is not being executed (design stop display is in progress), “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the decoration symbol being stopped is displayed as a lens. It is visually recognized through 1018. In addition, the game state at the present time is in the process of being probabilistic (during probable electric power support), and the character string “Probably changing” is displayed below the effect display area 208d. Note that character strings such as “hidden”, “hidden”, and “mystery” may be displayed during the latent state. In addition, a character string representing the current effect mode may be displayed. Further, the image of the main character is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and the image of the enemy character is displayed on the right side, and the effect at the time of probability change is executed.

  As described above, in the probability variation state, the decorative symbol stop display may be emphasized by visually recognizing the decorative symbol through the lens 1018. It should be noted that the gaming state in which the decorative symbol is visually recognized through the lens 1018 may be a latent state (special figure high-precision normal figure low-probability state) or a time-short state (special figure low-precision normal figure high-precision state).

  44C, the logo movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position, the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position, the lens movable body 1002a is located at the forefront position, and the upper rear movable position. The state where the body 1102 is located in the initial position is shown. Also, a special figure variable game is being executed. In addition, the game state at the present time is in the process of being probabilistic (during probable electric power support), and the character string “Probably changing” is displayed below the effect display area 208d. Further, the image of the main character is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and the image of the enemy character is displayed on the right side, and the effect at the time of probability change is executed.

  In addition, the effect display area 208d is enlarged over the entire image display area, and the word “heat” is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d, and the notice effect (the notice of the change or the pre-read notice) is executed. . The word “heat” is enlarged and viewed through the lens 1018. Thereby, the notice effect may be conspicuous.

  In FIG. 44D, the logo movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position, the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 move slightly downward from the initial position, and the lens movable body 1002a is located at the rearmost position. The state located in is shown. Also, a special figure variable game is being executed. In addition, the game state at the present time is in the process of being probabilistic (during probable electric power support), and the character string “Probably changing” is displayed below the effect display area 208d. Further, the image of the main character is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and the image of the enemy character is displayed on the right side, and the effect at the time of probability change is executed. In addition, the effect display area 208d is enlarged over the entire image display area, and the word “heat” is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d, and the notice effect (the notice of the change or the pre-read notice) is executed. .

  In FIG. 44 (d), a part of the rotation decoration portion 1124 is visually recognized through the lens 1018. Thereby, the player may notice that something is hidden behind the upper front movable body 1002 and may be able to focus on the upper rear movable body 1102.

  FIG. 44E shows a state in which the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 are located at the initial positions. Also, the special figure variable game is being executed, the effect display area 208d is enlarged over the entire image display area, the image of the main character is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and the image of the enemy character is displayed on the right side. The character string “subjugation reach” is displayed in the center and the reach production is executed.

  As described above, when the reach effect is executed, the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 may be stopped at the initial positions. As a result, the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be widely used to display an animation or the like and execute a reach effect.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can cause the player to visually recognize various displays displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 through the lens 1018 of the upper front movable body 1002. As a display to be visually recognized by the player through the lens 1018, a re-lottery effect display, a promotion effect display, a probability change notification effect display, an icon display such as a hold icon or a variation icon, a game state notification display, and various information Notification display etc. are mentioned. The pachinko machine 100 may be able to emphasize these displays by enlarging these displays via the lens 1018 and allowing the player to visually recognize them.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 44 again.

(D1)
First display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying at least the display;
A movable body (for example, logo movable body 902) capable of performing at least the first operation;
A game machine equipped with
The first operation is an operation including at least an operation in which the movable body is movable upward from a first position (for example, an initial position) (for example, see FIG. 19B).
The movable body located at the first position is a movable body at least a part of which is higher than the first display means (see, for example, FIG. 39A).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above game table, there may be a case where it is possible to provide a game table characterized by a movable body. Further, there are cases where the player can be shown to the player using the display area of the first display means while making the operation of the movable body conspicuous.

(D2)
(D1) is a gaming machine according to
The movable body is a movable body capable of executing at least a second operation (for example, see FIG. 19C),
The second operation is an operation that moves downward from the first position (for example, see FIG. 19C),
After the second operation is performed, at least a part of the movable body is positioned on the front side of the first display means (for example, see FIG. 39 (i)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above game table, the movable body can be moved to a position overlapping the first display means in the front-rear direction, and there are cases where variations can be increased in the relationship between the movable body and the first display means.

(D3)
(D2) is a gaming machine according to
The first operation is an operation that moves from the first position to a second position (for example, the uppermost position) (for example, see FIG. 19B),
The second operation is an operation that moves from the first position to a third position (for example, the lowermost position) (for example, see FIG. 19C).
The movable amount in the first operation is larger than the movable amount in the second operation (for example, see FIG. 19).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above-mentioned game machine, there may be a case where an effect can be performed by widely using the display area of the first display means while showing a large movement of the movable body. In some cases, even when the movable body is located at the second position and is away from the first display means, the movable body can be noticed. Further, even when the movable body is positioned at the third position and overlaps the first display means in the front-rear direction, the movable body may be noticed by the third operation.

(D4)
(D3) is a gaming machine according to
A detection means (for example, a photosensor 984) capable of detecting at least the position of the movable body;
The detection means is a means capable of detecting at least the position of the movable body when the movable body is located at the second position;
When the movable body returns to the first position after the second operation is performed, the movable body moves from the third position to the second position and then returns to the first position ( For example, see FIG. 39 (i) to FIG. 40 (a)),
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, the movable body is returned to the first position without hiding the display displayed on the first display means by the movable body so as not to disturb the player who is paying attention to the display. You may be able to For example, if the movable body moves to the third position during the symbol variation display and the advance notice is executed, and the announcement ends at the end of the symbol variation display, the movable body moves to the second position. Since it returns to the first position, it may be possible to prevent the movable body from interfering with a player who pays attention to the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display.

(D5)
(D1) to (D4) according to any one of the game tables,
The movable body is a movable body including at least a rotation mechanism (for example, a rotation link mechanism 902b) capable of performing a rotation operation,
Said 1st operation | movement is operation | movement which the said movable body moves upwards in connection with the said rotation operation | movement being performed (for example, refer FIG.20 (b)),
The movable body is a movable body configured at least by a plurality of movable parts (for example, the second character part 912 to the sixth character part 920),
At least one of the plurality of movable parts (hereinafter referred to as “second movable part” (for example, a fourth character part 916)) is the second movable part of the plurality of movable parts. Is a movable part provided at a position farther from the center of rotation in the rotational operation than at least one of the other (hereinafter referred to as "first movable part" (for example, second character part 912)),
The first operation is an operation in which the upward movable amount of the second movable portion is larger than the upward movable amount of the first movable portion (for example, see FIG. 19B).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the game table, there are cases where a plurality of parts of the movable body can be moved regularly. Moreover, the rotational motion by a motor can be converted into a linear motion by a rotation mechanism and transmitted to a plurality of parts of the movable body.

(D6)
(D5) is a gaming table,
The first operation is an operation in which at least one movable part (for example, the fourth character part 916) of the plurality of movable parts moves upward.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above game table, the player may be able to focus on the part of the movable body that has moved.

(D7)
(D1) to (D6) according to any one of the game tables,
The first position is a position where at least a part of the movable body is located on the front side of the first display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, since the movable body overlaps the first display means that the player usually pays attention to, the first operation of the movable body may not be overlooked.

(D8)
(D1) to (D7) according to any one of the game tables,
The movable body is a movable body including second display means (for example, a sub display device) capable of displaying at least a display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, since the movable body includes the second display means, it may be possible to pay attention to the movable body after the operation.

(D9)
(D1) to the game table according to any one of (D8),
The movable body is a movable body including at least a character portion having a character shape (for example, a first character portion 910 to a seventh character portion 922),
The movable body is a movable body capable of emitting the character portion by light emitting means (for example, an LED mounted on the LED substrate 910c or the like).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above game console, the character portion of the movable body may be made conspicuous.

(D10)
(D1) to the game table according to any one of (D9),
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

(D11)
(D1) to the game table according to any one of (D9),
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

  When the movable body is located at the first position, at least a part of the movable body may overlap the first display means in the front-rear direction, or the whole may not overlap the first display means in the front-rear direction. Good.

  The first display means and the second display means include a liquid crystal display device, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma Other display devices including a display and a projector can be used.

  The movable body may be configured to be capable of moving operations other than parallel movement and rotational movement, and may be configured to execute the first operation, the second operation, or the third operation from a plurality of operation modes. It may be.

  The second operation may be an operation of moving to a position that passes the lower limit position of the first display means.

  The movable body may have a movement amount in a direction away from the first display means smaller than a movement amount in a direction overlapping the first display means.

  The initial position of the movable body may not be in front of the first display means.

  The movable body may be an integral movable body having a plurality of movable portions. For example, the movable sub liquid crystal and another movable body that moves in the vicinity of the sub liquid crystal may be integrated as a movable body.

  Characters represented by the character shape include title logo characters that include at least a part of the model name of the game machine, etc., and characteristic characters related to game machine characteristics and game machine titles and motifs (for example, latent probability change) If it is a game stand having a "dive" or "mystery", and if it is a historical drama motif, "war", "fight", etc.). The number of characters may be two or more.

  The movable body may not include the light emitting means. Moreover, the structure which at least 1 character part light-emits among several character parts may be sufficient.

  The movable body may be configured not to execute a multi-stage operation, and may only be able to execute a moving operation.

  In this example, the detection means can detect the position of the movable body when the movable body is located at the second position. The movable body returns to the initial position after the position is once detected by the detecting means. In this example, when the detection means can detect the position of the movable body when the movable body is located at the second position, the movable body is moved to the second position, which is the position above the first display means. It returns to the initial position after moving. In addition, for example, when the detection unit can detect the position of the movable body when the movable body is located at the third position, the movable body is moved to the third position which is the position in front of the first display means. It returns to the initial position after moving. For this reason, when the detection means can detect the position of the movable body when the movable body is located at the second position, the position of the movable body is determined when the detection means is located at the third position. The movable body can return to the initial position without hiding the display of the first display means, compared to the case where it can be detected. The detection means may be capable of detecting the position of the movable body when the movable body is located at the third position, or detects the position of the movable body when the movable body is located at the first position. It may be possible.

(E1)
A game machine having a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a movable body (at least movable from a first region (for example, see FIG. 19A)) to a third region (for example, see FIG. 19B). Hereinafter referred to as “first movable body”) (for example, logo movable body 902),
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies includes a second region (for example, see FIG. 24A and FIG. 28A) to a fourth region (for example, FIG. 24C and FIG. 28). a movable body (hereinafter referred to as “second movable body”) (for example, an upper front movable body 1002, a lens movable body 1002a, and an upper rear movable body 1102).
The fourth region is a region including at least a part of the first region,
The first area is an area occupied by the first movable body in a state before the first movable body moves (for example, a state located at an initial position),
The fourth region is a region occupied by the second movable body in a state after the second movable body has moved (for example, a state after moving to the lowest position).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above game table, there may be a case where it is possible to provide a game table characterized by a movable body. In addition, various operations may be possible in connection with a plurality of movable bodies.

(E2)
A gaming machine according to (E1),
The second movable body is a movable body positioned at least in the front-rear direction with respect to the first movable body (see, for example, FIGS. 16 and 17),
The second movable body is a movable body that is movable at least in the front-rear direction when moving to the fourth region (see, for example, FIG. 25).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming table, the second movable body that moves forward may have an impact on the player.

(E3)
(E1) or (E2) according to the game machine,
The second area is an area occupied by the second movable body in a state before the second movable body moves (for example, a state positioned at an initial position) (see, for example, FIG. 24A). ),
The second region is a region in which at least a part of the region is the front-rear direction of the first region (see, for example, FIGS. 16 and 17).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, there are cases where the player can expect the operation of the movable body by seeing the plurality of movable bodies from the player side during normal times.

(E4)
(E1) thru | or the game stand as described in any one of (E3),
A first display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying at least the display;
The fourth region is a region including a region in which at least a part of the region is in front of the first display means (see, for example, FIG. 41 (h)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, there is a case where the second movable body can be operated in relation to the display of the first display means.

(E5)
(E4) a game machine according to
The first movable body is a movable body that is movable at least from the first region to a fifth region (for example, see FIG. 19C).
The fifth region is a region including a region where at least a part of the region is in front of the first display means (see, for example, FIG. 39 (i))
The fifth region is a region including at least a part of the fourth region (see, for example, FIG. 39 (i)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, there is a case where the first movable body can perform an operation other than the operation that is a precursor of the operation of the second movable body.

(E6)
(E5) is a gaming machine according to
The third region is a region shifted upward from the first region,
The fifth region is a region shifted downward from the first region.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, there may be a case where an unexpected operation can be performed by the first movable body moving upward away from the display area of the first display means. Moreover, the expectation that the second movable body appears in front of the display area of the first display unit may be increased.

(E7)
(E4) It is a game stand given in any 1 paragraph of (E6),
The first region is a region including a region where at least a part of the region is in front of the first display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, when the first movable body is positioned in front of the display area in the initial state, the operation of the first movable body in the direction away from the display area can be prevented from being overlooked. There is.

(E8)
(E1) thru | or the game stand as described in any one of (E7),
A second display means (for example, a sub display device) capable of displaying at least the display;
One movable body of the first movable body and the second movable body is a movable body including the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above game console, attention may be paid to the operation itself of the movable body including the second display means by paying attention to the display content of the second display means.

(E9)
(E1) thru | or the game stand as described in any one of (E7),
A second display means (for example, a sub display device) capable of displaying at least the display;
The third region is a region including a region where at least a part of the region is in front of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, there is a case where the movement of the first movable body can be naturally noticed by the presence of the second display means at the destination of the first movable body.

(E10)
(E1) thru | or the game stand as described in any one of (E9),
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

(E11)
(E1) thru | or the game stand as described in any one of (E9),
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

The first area is an area occupied by the first movable body when the first movable body is located at the first position;
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body.

The second movable body is movable to a position including the initial position of the first movable body.
The first movable body is, for example, a logo movable body 902. The second movable body is the upper front movable body 1002, the lens movable body 1002a, or the upper rear movable body 1102.

The first region and the second region do not have a common region and may overlap in the front-rear direction.
Further, the first area and the fourth area do not have a common area, and may overlap in the front-rear direction.

  The first movable body may be disposed behind the second movable body, and the second movable body may be movable rearward.

The above game machines are
The first movable body is a movable body that is visible from a player in a state of being in an initial position,
The second movable body is a movable body that is visible from the player in a state of being located at an initial position.
It is characterized by that.

The above game machines are
A symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing at least a symbol variation display;
A holding means (for example, RAM 308) capable of holding at least the start of the symbol variation display;
With
A notice for the currently running symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “first notice”) is configured to be executable at least,
A notice for the pending symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as “second notice”) is configured to be executable at least,
At least one of the first movable body and the second movable body is a movable body that can be used for execution of the first notice,
At least one of the first movable body and the second movable body is a movable body that can be used for execution of the second notice.
It is characterized by that.

The above game table,
The first movable body is a movable body that is movable at least from the first region to the fifth region;
The fifth region is a region that does not include a region in which at least a part of the region is in front of the first display means,
The fifth region is a region not including at least a part of the fourth region.
It is characterized by that.

  The fifth area is an area below the first display means.

One or both of the first movable body and the second movable body may include at least the second display means.
-The 2nd movable body may be arrange | positioned with respect to the 1st movable body in directions other than the front-back direction, for example, the position shifted | deviated to the left-right direction. When the second movable body is positioned in the front-rear direction with respect to the first movable body, the movable body may be housed compactly.

  The fourth area may be an area that does not include an area that is in front of the first display means, or may be an area in which all of the fourth area is in front of the first display means.

  The first movable body may be capable of moving outside the operating range of the second movable body (for example, the sixth region).

The first movable body may be configured to be movable in a direction approaching the first display means.
The second movable body may be movable at a position farther from the first display means than the first movable body.

  When the first movable body is positioned at the initial position, the first movable body may be configured not to overlap the display area of the first display unit in the front-rear direction and not to hide the display area.

  In the initial state, the plurality of movable bodies may be configured not to overlap in the front-rear direction. For example, one of the first movable body and the second movable body is located above the first display means, and the other movable body is located below the first display device. The structure which performs the operation | movement which retracts the other movable body in order for the movement range of a body to move to the operation range of the other movable body may be sufficient.

The first movable body may include a main display device (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).
The first movable body may include a sub display device (for example, a sub display device).
The second movable body may include a main display device (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).
The second movable body may include a sub display device (for example, a sub display device).
The first movable body and the second movable body may be configured by the main display device and the sub display device.
The effect display displayed on the main display device and the sub display device is a decorative symbol variation display, a hold display such as a hold icon (an example of a pre-reading notice), a variation icon (an example of a notice), a fourth symbol, a game It is information display such as status, etc. Whatever may be displayed on any display device, the same information may be displayed on both display devices, or with the main display device when a predetermined condition is satisfied, etc. The display may be switched on the sub display device.

A game machine having a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one movable body among the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body,
At least one movable body among the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body,
The first movable body is movable from a first position to a third position;
The second movable body is movable from a second position to a fourth position;
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body,
The second position is an initial position of the second movable body,
The third position is a position above the first position;
The fourth position is a position below the second position.
A game stand characterized by that.

A game machine having a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one movable body among the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body,
At least one movable body among the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body,
The first movable body is movable from a first position to a third position;
The second movable body is movable from a second position to a fourth position;
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body,
The second position is an initial position of the second movable body,
The third position is a position below the first position;
The fourth position is a position above the second position.
A game stand characterized by that.

(F1)
A game machine having a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies (hereinafter referred to as “first movable body” (for example, the upper front movable body 1002 and the lens movable body 1002a)) has a first position (for example, an initial position, A movable body at least movable from the uppermost position (see FIG. 24A) to a third position (for example, the lowermost position, see FIG. 24C);
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies (hereinafter referred to as “second movable body” (for example, the upper rear movable body 1102)) is a second position (for example, an initial position, an uppermost position, 28 (a)) to a fourth position (for example, the lowest position, see FIG. 28 (c)), and a movable body that is movable at least.
The second movable body located at the second position is a movable body at least partially overlapping with the first movable body located at the first position in the front-rear direction (for example, FIG. 16, FIG. 17),
The second movable body located at the fourth position is a movable body at least partially overlapping with the first movable body located at the third position in the front-rear direction (for example, FIG. )reference),
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by a movable body. In some cases, the movable body can be operated while maintaining the positional relationship thereof.

(F2)
The gaming machine according to (F1),
The first movable body is a movable body located in front of the second movable body (see, for example, FIGS. 16 and 17),
The first movable body is a movable body provided with at least a visual recognition area (for example, openings 1012a, 1014d, 1002b5) in which the rear of the first movable body can be visually recognized.
At least a part of the second movable body located at the second position is visible from the viewing area of the first movable body located at the first position (for example, FIG. 40 (j)),
At least a part of the second movable body located at the fourth position is visible from the viewing area of the first movable body located at the third position (for example, FIG. 41 (h)),
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, since the second movable body can be seen from the visual recognition area of the first movable body, even if the second movable body moves to a position overlapping the first movable body in the front-rear direction. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced.

(F3)
(F2) is a game machine,
The first movable body (for example, the lens movable body 1002a) is moved from the third position (for example, the rearmost position, see FIGS. 23 (a) and 24 (c)) to the fifth position (for example, A movable body that is movable at least to the foremost position (see FIG. 23B and FIG. 25),
The fifth position is a position in front of the third position (see, for example, FIG. 25)
The visual recognition area is an area including a lens (for example, the lens 1018),
At least a part of the second movable body located at the fourth position is visible from the viewing area of the first movable body located at the third position (for example, (See FIG. 43 (a))
The second movable body is more visible in the visual recognition area when the first movable body is located at the fifth position than when the first movable body is located at the third position. (For example, see FIG. 43 (b)),
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, there is a case where the relative position of the first movable body and the second movable body can be changed to change the appearance of the movable body. In some cases, the second movable body can be enlarged and shown to the player.

(F4)
The game stand according to any one of (F1) to (F3),
A display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying at least the display;
The third position is a position where at least a part of the first movable body is in front of the display means (for example, see FIG. 43 (a)).
The fourth position is a position where at least a part of the second movable body is in front of the display means (see, for example, FIG. 43A).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above game console, the movable body may be able to perform various operations in front of the display means.

(F5)
(F1) to (F4) according to any one of the game tables,
The first movable body is a movable body movable by a first driving means (for example, a motor 1070),
The second movable body is a movable body movable by a second driving means (for example, a motor 1152),
The second movable body is a movable body that may not be located at the second position when the first movable body is located at the first position;
The second movable body is a movable body that may not be positioned at the fourth position when the first movable body is positioned at the third position.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, the first movable body and the second movable body can be operated at the same position in the vertical direction, and the first movable body and the second movable body can be operated independently. In some cases, variations in the operation of the movable body can be increased.

(F6)
The gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F5),
The first movable body is a movable body operable in the vertical direction (for example, see FIG. 24),
The second movable body is a movable body operable in the vertical direction (see, for example, FIG. 28).
A game stand characterized by that.

(F7)
(F1) to (F6) according to any one of the game tables,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

(F8)
(F1) to (F6) according to any one of the game tables,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

  The first movable body and the second movable body have substantially the same operating range in the vertical direction. However, the first movable body and the second movable body may be configured to operate in different ranges. It is also possible to replace the rotation operation of the decorative portion 1124 with an operation involving movement to a different range.

  The drive source of the first movable body and the drive source of the second movable body may be the same, and the operation start timing and relative position of the first movable body and the second movable body may be determined by a link mechanism or the like. The relationship may be changed so that the first movable body and the second movable body can be viewed as if they can be operated independently by individual driving sources.

  The second position and the fourth position may be positions that are not in front of the display means. In this case, in addition to the operations of the first movable body and the second movable body, it may be possible to produce an effect by using the display area widely.

  The first position and the third position may be positions on the front side of the display unit, or may not be positions on the front side of the display unit. In addition, it is preferable that at least one of the first position and the third position is in front of the display unit, but this is not always necessary.

  The 1st movable body does not need to be provided with the visual recognition area which can visually recognize the 2nd movable body. If the drive source of the first movable body and the second movable body is different, the first movable body and the second movable body can be operated individually, so that the position deviates from the third position. If the second movable body is operated, the second movable body may be shown to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the fifth position is the front side of the third position, but the fifth position may be the rear side of the third position. The position in the direction in which the gap between the first movable body and the second movable body is the sixth position, and the first movable body may be movable to the sixth position. Thereby, there is a case where the relative position relationship between the first movable body and the second movable body can be changed to change the appearance of the movable body.

  A configuration other than the lens may be employed for the viewing area. For example, a simple transparent plate that does not have a lens function may be used, and an empty opening, a notch, or the like may be employed in the viewing area.

  The second movable body can be rotated at least when the second movable body is visible from the viewing area of the first movable body at the second position, but the second movable body is rotated outside the viewing area. May be. Further, the rotational operation of the second movable body may be a drive source different from the drive source for moving the second movable body from the second position to the fourth position, or may be the same drive source. May be.

  In addition, as the first display, hold icon, change icon, cut-in image, character image, conversation image, decorative design, fourth design, ordinary design decorative design, effect image, tutorial display explaining the production, operation Tutorial display, button image, meter image, error display (for example, bottom plate full tank error), alert notification (for example, alert notification to prevent prepaid card forgetting), and the like.

  The display means is means that can display at least the second display in the second region. The second area may be the same as or different from the first area, or at least a part thereof may overlap. In addition, as a second display, a hold icon, a variation icon, a cut-in image, a character image, a conversation image, a decorative pattern, a fourth pattern, a general-purpose decorative pattern, an effect image, a tutorial display explaining a production, and an operation are described. Tutorial display, button image, meter image, error display (for example, bottom plate full tank error), alert notification (for example, alert notification to prevent prepaid card forgetting), and the like. The second display may be the same as or different from the first display.

  In addition, the structure described as "at least ... possible" in the above can be interpreted by replacing the part with "only possible ...". For example, a movable body described as “at least the first operation can be performed” can be interpreted as a movable body that can “execute only the first operation”.

  In addition, in the above description, the configuration described as “... possible” should be interpreted by replacing the part with “... may not be included or must be included ...”. You can also. For example, the configuration described as “at least the first operation can be performed” is “means that the first operation may not be performed or a configuration that always executes the first operation” Can also be interpreted.

  The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.

(Appendix d1)
First display means capable of displaying at least a display;
A movable body capable of performing at least the first operation;
A game machine equipped with
The first operation is an operation including at least an operation of moving the movable body upward from the first position;
The movable body located at the first position is a movable body at least a part of which is higher than the first display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d2)
A game machine according to appendix d1,
The movable body is a movable body capable of executing at least a second operation,
The second operation is an operation that moves downward from the first position,
After the second operation is performed, at least a part of the movable body is located on the front side of the first display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d3)
A game machine according to appendix d2,
The first operation is an operation that moves from the first position to the second position;
The second operation is an operation that moves from the first position to the third position;
The movable amount in the first operation is larger than the movable amount in the second operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d4)
A game machine according to appendix d3,
A detection means capable of detecting at least the position of the movable body;
The detection means is a means capable of detecting at least the position of the movable body when the movable body is located at the second position;
When the movable body returns to the first position after the second operation is performed, the movable body moves from the third position to the second position and then returns to the first position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d4,
The movable body is a movable body including at least a rotation mechanism capable of performing a rotation operation,
The first operation is an operation in which the movable body moves upward in relation to the rotation operation being performed,
The movable body is a movable body constituted at least by a plurality of movable parts,
At least one of the plurality of movable parts (hereinafter referred to as “second movable part”) is at least one of the plurality of movable parts (hereinafter, referred to as “second movable part”). It is a movable part provided at a position farther from the center of rotation in the rotational operation than "first movable part"),
The first operation is an operation in which the upward movable amount of the second movable portion is larger than the upward movable amount of the first movable portion.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d6)
A game machine according to appendix d5,
The first operation is an operation in which at least one movable part of the plurality of movable parts moves upward.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d6,
The first position is a position where at least a part of the movable body is located on the front side of the first display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d7,
The movable body is a movable body including second display means capable of displaying at least a display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d8,
The movable body is a movable body including at least a character portion having a character shape,
The movable body is a movable body in which the character portion can emit light by light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d9,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e1)
A game machine having a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a movable body (hereinafter referred to as “first movable body”) that is at least movable from the first region to the third region.
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a movable body (hereinafter referred to as “second movable body”) that is at least movable from the second region to the fourth region.
The fourth region is a region including at least a part of the first region,
The first region is a region occupied by the first movable body in a state before the first movable body is movable,
The fourth region is a region occupied by the second movable body in a state after the second movable body has moved.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e2)
A gaming machine according to appendix e1,
The second movable body is a movable body positioned at least in the front-rear direction with respect to the first movable body,
The second movable body is a movable body that is movable at least in the front-rear direction when moving to the fourth region.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e3)
A gaming machine according to appendix e1 or e2,
The second region is a region occupied by the second movable body in a state before the second movable body is movable,
The second region is a region in which at least a part of the region is the front-rear direction of the first region.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e3,
A first display means capable of displaying at least a display;
The fourth region is a region including a region where at least a part of the region is in front of the first display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e5)
A gaming machine according to appendix e4,
The first movable body is a movable body that is movable at least from the first region to the fifth region;
The fifth region is a region including a region where at least a part of the region is in front of the first display means,
The fifth region is a region including at least a part of the fourth region.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e6)
A gaming machine according to appendix e5,
The third region is a region shifted upward from the first region,
The fifth region is a region shifted downward from the first region.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e4 to e6,
The first region is a region including a region where at least a part of the region is in front of the first display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e7,
A second display means capable of displaying at least the display;
One movable body of the first movable body and the second movable body is a movable body including the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e7,
A second display means capable of displaying at least the display;
The third region is a region including a region where at least a part of the region is in front of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e9,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix f1)
A game machine having a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies (hereinafter referred to as “first movable body”) is a movable body that is movable at least from a first position to a third position;
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies (hereinafter referred to as “second movable body”) is a movable body that is movable at least from the second position to the fourth position;
The second movable body located at the second position is a movable body at least partially overlapping with the first movable body located at the first position in the front-rear direction,
The second movable body located at the fourth position is a movable body at least partially overlapping with the first movable body located at the third position in the front-rear direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f2)
A game machine according to appendix f1,
The first movable body is a movable body located in front of the second movable body,
The first movable body is a movable body provided with at least a visual recognition area where the rear of the first movable body can be visually recognized,
At least a part of the second movable body located at the second position is visible from the visual recognition area of the first movable body located at the first position,
At least a part of the second movable body located at the fourth position is visible from the visual recognition area of the first movable body located at the third position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f3)
A game machine according to appendix f2,
The first movable body is a movable body that is movable at least from the third position to the fifth position;
The fifth position is a position that is in front of the third position;
The visual recognition area is an area including a lens,
At least a part of the second movable body located at the fourth position is visible from the viewing area of the first movable body located at the third position;
The second movable body is more visible in the visual recognition area when the first movable body is located at the fifth position than when the first movable body is located at the third position. Is,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f3,
A display means capable of displaying at least the display;
The third position is a position where at least a part of the first movable body is in front of the display means,
The fourth position is a position where at least a part of the second movable body is in front of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f4,
The first movable body is a movable body movable by a first driving means,
The second movable body is a movable body movable by a second driving means,
The second movable body is a movable body that may not be located at the second position when the first movable body is located at the first position;
The second movable body is a movable body that may not be positioned at the fourth position when the first movable body is positioned at the third position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f5,
The first movable body is a movable body operable in the vertical direction,
The second movable body is a movable body operable in the vertical direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f6,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f6,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, what was called a lamp | ramp so far is an example of a light emission means, and a lamp | ramp can be substituted if it emits light, such as LED and a cold cathode tube.

  For example, the above embodiment can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine. The enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

  Note that the items described in the above detailed description can be combined.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 2000 as shown in FIG. FIG. 45 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 2000 as seen from the front side (player side).

  A slot machine 2000 shown in FIG. 45 includes a main body 2001 and a front door 2002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 2001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 2001. Inside the center of the main body 2001, three reels (left reel 2010, middle reel 2011, and right reel 2012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are housed and configured to rotate inside the slot machine 2000. Has been. These reels 2010 to 2012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 2000, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 2010 to 2012 are configured by affixing the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member. When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reels 2010 to 2012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 2013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating the reels 2010 to 2012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 2010 to 2012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. In the slot machine 2000, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 2000. However, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited thereto.

  Reel backlights (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 2013 are disposed on the rear surfaces of the reels 2010 to 2012. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be irradiated evenly. In the slot machine 2000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 2010 to 2012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of the sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 2010 to 2012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 2020 is a lamp indicating the winning line 2014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 2014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 2014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

  The notification lamp 2023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 2024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 2022 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (the medal insertion is unnecessary) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 2028 is an effect lamp.

  The medal insertion buttons 2030 to 2032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 2000. In the slot machine 2000, every time the medal insertion button 2030 is pressed, a maximum of three are inserted one by one, two are inserted when the medal insertion button 2031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 2032 is pressed. A sheet is inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 2032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 2029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 2021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 2041 is an slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. In other words, the insertion of medals can be performed electronically with the medal insertion buttons 2030 to 2032, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 2041. It is. The stored number display 2025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 2000. The game information display 2026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during the bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display 2027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display unit 2025, the game information display unit 2026, and the payout number display unit 2027 are configured by a 7 segment (SEG) display unit.

  The start lever 2035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 2010 to 2012. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 2041 or the medal insertion buttons 2030 to 2032 are operated and the start lever 2035 is operated, the reels 2010 to 2012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 2035 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 2036 is provided with stop buttons 2037 to 2039. The stop buttons 2037 to 2039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 2010 to 2012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 2035, and are associated with the reels 2010 to 2012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 2037 to 2039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Also, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is the third stop reel. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 2037 to 2039. When the stop button 2037 to 2039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 2033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The payment button 2034 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 2000 and betting medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 2055. The door key hole 2040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 2002 of the slot machine 2000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 2055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  On the right side of the medal insertion button 2032, a chance button 2100 is provided. The chance button 2100 can perform an operation related to the operation of the reels 2010 to 2012, or can perform an operation related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 2057. Further, the chance button 2100 can take a plurality of states (for example, a light emission state, a rotation state, a vibration state, or a combination thereof) similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the chance button 2100 can be operated effectively. The state may be changeable during the period.

  The information display button unit 2050 is provided with an information display button 2046. The information display button 2046 is an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting individual player game history information), and includes a plurality of buttons. The configuration and operation of the information display button 2046 will be described later.

  Under the stop button unit 2036, a title panel 2062 for displaying a model name and pasting various certificate stamps is provided. A title panel lamp 2064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 2062. At the lower part of the title panel 2062, a medal payout opening 2055 and a medal tray 2061 are provided.

  The sound hole 2081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 2000 to the outside. Side lamps 2044 provided at the left and right portions of the front door 2002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. An effect device 2060 is disposed above the front door 2002, and a sound hole 2043 is provided above the effect device 2060. This effect device 2060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 2063 composed of two right shutters 2063a and 2063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 2057 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 2063. When the right shutter 2063a and the left shutter 2063b are opened outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 2057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 2057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 2000 (game). The structure appears on the person side).

  In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. In the present embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may be a curved surface.

  46A is an external perspective view of the information display button 2046, and FIG. 46B is a top view of the information display button 2046. As shown in FIG. 46, the information display button 2046 includes a plurality of buttons on a substantially rectangular plane of the information display button unit 2050. That is, the information display button 2046 is a collective term for a plurality of buttons provided in the information display button unit 2050. Specifically, a determination (call) button 2046O provided in the approximate center of the information display button unit 2050 and a determination ( (Call) button 2046O spaced apart to the left of the upper selection button 2046U, the lower selection button 2046D, the left selection button 2046L and the right selection button 2046R, and the cancellation provided to the right of the decision (call) button 2046O. Button 2046C.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 200 Game board 208 Decorative symbol display device 226 General winning opening 228 Special figure starting opening 230 Special figure 1 starting opening 232 Special figure 2 starting opening 232a Blade member 234 Variable winning opening 240 Out opening 241 Second out Mouth 300 main control unit 400 first sub control unit 400
500 Second sub-control unit 500
700 Ball passage unit 701 First ball passage 702 Second ball passage 703 Third ball passage 900 Logo accessory 900
1000 Upper front decoration 1100 Upper rear decoration 1200 Upper right side 1300 Upper left side 1400 Lower right side 1500 Lower left side 1600 Center lower

Claims (5)

A game machine having movable means including a plurality of movable bodies,
One of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body,
One of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body,
The second movable body is a movable body different from the first movable body,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a first operation,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a second operation,
The first operation and the second operation are a series of operations of the first movable body,
The first operation is an operation including an operation in which the first movable body operates in a first posture,
The second operation is an operation including an operation in which the first movable body changes from the first posture to the second posture,
The first movable body is a movable body that is visible from a player when the first body is in the first posture,
The first movable body is a movable body that is visible from a player when the second posture is set,
The second movable body is received from a player in at least one of a case where the first movable body is in the first posture and a case where the first movable body is in the second posture. It is a movable body that can be seen,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of executing a third operation.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The "first operation and the second operation are a series of operations of the first movable body" described in claim 1, wherein the first movable body is the first operation. It is possible to perform the second operation after performing the operation, and it is difficult for the first movable body to perform the second operation without performing the first operation. ,
The third operation can be executed during execution of at least one of the first operation and the second operation.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The third operation is an operation that can be started during execution of the first operation,
The third operation is an operation that can be started during execution of the second operation.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3 ,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

Images